150 FX 4 Electri

4.
ELECTRICAL
412 : Climate Control System
412-00 : Climate Control System – General Information
Specifications
Specifications
General Specification
Item Description
Automatic temperature control, heating, Dual zone with side to side temperature
ventilation and air conditioning unit control
Clutchless, belt driven from engine with
Compressor
electronically controlled outputs
General procedures
Air Conditioning (A/C) System Flushing

1.
WARNING: Use extreme care and observe all safety precautions related to the
use of refrigerants. Due to refrigerant hazards, always wear safety goggles and non-
penetrable gloves when working on or flushing air conditioning (A/C) systems. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
WARNING: When flushing the A/C system, refer to the manufacturers

equipment instructions for additional information. Failure to do so may result in system
damage or personal injury.
WARNING: The A/C refrigerant analyzer must be used before the recovery of
any vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts shop bulk refrigerant at risk of
contamination. If the vehicle A/C refrigerant is contaminated, refer the customer to
return to the repair facility that performed the last A/C repair. If the customer wishes to
pay the additional cost, use the A/C recovery equipment that is designated for
recovering contaminated A/C refrigerant. All contaminated A/C refrigerant must be
disposed of as hazardous waste. For additional information, refer to the manufacturers
equipment instructions. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Prior to using the A/C flushing equipment for the first time, follow
the operating instructions. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal
injury.
CAUTION: Prior to flushing, remove and discard the desiccant sack. Depending
on the equipment used, other A/C components may have to be removed prior to
flushing. For additional information, refer to the manufacturers equipment instructions
before flushing the A/C system.
Recover the refrigerant.
2. Remove the desiccant sack. <<412-03>>
3. Flush the system. For additional information, refer to the manufacturers equipment
instructions.
4. Install new refrigerant lines if blocked with debris.
5. Install a new desiccant sack. <<412-03>>
6. Add the required amount of oil to the A/C system depending on the repair procedure.
7. Evacuate and charge the A/C system.
8. Carry out fluorescent dye leak detection test.

Fluorescent Dye Leak Detection
9. Check the A/C system for correct operation.

Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery,
Evacuation and Charging (82.30.30)
1.
WARNING: Servicing must be carried out by personnel familliar with both

vehicle system and the charging and testing equipment. All operations must be carried
out in a well ventilated area away from open flame and heat sources.
NOTE:
The receiver drier need only be changed under the following circumstances: There is dirt
in the refrigerant circuit ( eg. compressor seizure ), the system is leaking and refrigerant
has been lost to atmosphere, or the refrigerant circuit has been open more than 24 hours,
due to repair.
Refrigerant recovery.
2. Remove the dust covers from the high and low pressure connections.
3. Connect the high and low pressure lines to the appropriate connections.
4. Open the valves on the connections.
5. Turn the valves on the station to the correct positions.
6. Turn the process switch to the correct position.
7. Turn the main switch to 'ON'.
8.
WARNING: Refrigerant must always be recycled before re-use to ensure that the
purity of the refrigerantis high enough for safe use in the air conditioning system.
Recycling should always be carried out with equipment which is design certified by
Underwriter Laboratory Inc. for compliance with SEA J1991. Other equipment may not
recycle refrigerant to the required level of purity. R143a Refrigerant Recover Recycling
Recharging station must not be used with any other type of refrigerant.Refrigerant
R134a from domestic and comercial sources must not be used in motor vehicles air
conditioning systems.
Allow the system to recover the refrigerant from the system.
9. Close the valves on the refrigerant station.
10. Turn the main switch 'OFF'.
11. Close the valves on the connections.
12. Disconnect the high and low pressure connections.
13. Install the dust covers to the connectors.
14. Open the tap at the rear of the station to drain the refrigerant oil.
15. Measure and record the quantity of refrigerant oil recovered from the system.
16. Close the tap at the rear of the station.
17. Evacuation.
18. Remove the dust covers from the high and low pressure connections.
19. Connect the high and low pressure lines to the appropriate connections.
20. Open the valves on the connections.
21. Turn the valves on the station to the correct positions.
22. Turn the process switch to the correct position.
23. Turn the main switch to 'ON'.

24. Allow the station to evacuate the A/C system.
25.
CAUTION: The system must be evacuated immediatley before recharging

commences. Delay between evacuation and recharging is not permitted
Recharging
26. Close the valves on the refrigerant station.
27. Close the valve on the oil charger.
28. Disconnect the yellow line from the refrigerant station.
29. Remove the cover from the oil charger.
30. Pour the correct quantity of refrigerant oil into the oil charger.
31. Install the cover to the oil charger.
32. Connect the yellow line to the refrigerant station.
33. Open the valve on the oil charger.
34. Move the pointer on the refrigerant gauge to mark the position of the refrigerant drop.
35. Slowly open the correct valve on the refrigerant to allow the vacuum to pull the
refrigerant into the system.
36. Close the valve on the refrigerant station when the correct amount of refrigerant has been
drawn into the air conditioning system.
37. Turn the main switch 'OFF'.
38. Close the valves on the connections.
39. Disconnect the high and low pressure connections.

Contaminated Refrigerant Handling
1. If contaminated refrigerant is detected DO NOT recover the refrigerant into your R-134a
OR R-12 recovery/recycling equipment. Take the follow actions:
1. Repeat the test to verify contaminated refrigerant is present.
2. Advise the customer of the contaminated A/C system and any additional cost to repair
the system. The customer may wish to return to the repair facility performing the last A/C
repair.
3. Recover the contaminated refrigerant using suitable recovery only equipment designed
for capturing and storing contaminated refrigerant. This equipment must only be used to
recover contaminated refrigerant to prevent the spread to other vehicles. As an alternative,
contact an A/C repair facility in your area with the proper equipment to perform the repair.
• On completion of the recovery of the contaminated refrigerant, it will be necessary to
carry out the A/C system flushing procedure.
Air Conditioning (A/C) System Flushing
Electronic Leak Detection
1.
WARNING: Good ventilation is necessary in the area where A/C leak testing is to
be carried out. If the surrounding air is contaminated with refrigerant gas, the leak
detector will indicate this gas all the time. Odors from other chemicals such as
antifreeze, diesel fuel, disc brake cleaner, or other cleaning solvents can cause the same
problem. A fan, even in a well ventilated area, is very helpful in removing small traces of
contamination from the air that might affect the leak detector. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in personal injury.
Attach an R-134a manifold gauge set or use a UL-approved recovery/recycling device such as
an R-134a A/C refrigerant center (which meets SAE Standard J 1991). For additional
information, refer to the manufacturers equipment instructions.
• Both gauges should indicate 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C (75°F) with the engine
off.
• If little or no pressure is indicated, carry out the air conditioning (A/C) system recovery,
evacuation and charging procedure.
2. Use an R134-a Automatic calibration halogen leak detector to leak test the refrigerant
system. For additional information, refer to the manufacturers equipment instructions.
3. If a leak is found, carry out the air conditioning (A/C) system recovery procedure.
Refrigerant Oil Adding
CAUTION: Make sure when disconnecting air conditioning (A/C) connections,
that the exposed ports are capped immediately. Make sure you do not leave the A/C
system open to the atmosphere. Failure to follow this instruction may result damage to
the vehicle.
NOTE:
A new replacement A/C compressor is pre-filled with ND8 oil.
1. Drain the oil from the old compressor and measure the quantity of oil drained.
2. Drain the oil from the new compressor into a clean container.
3.
CAUTION: If less than 30 cc of oil was drained from the old compressor, then 30
cc of oil must be refilled into the new compressor. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the vehicle.
NOTE:
Use the new compressor oil to refill to the required quantity.
Refill the new compressor with the same amount of oil which was measured from the old
compressor.
Refrigerant System Tests
1.
WARNING: Use extreme care and observe all safety precautions related to the
use of refrigerants. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
WARNING: The A/C refrigerant analyzer must be used before the recovery of
any vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts shop bulk refrigerant at risk of
contamination. If the vehicle A/C refrigerant is contaminated, refer the customer to
return to the repair facility that carried out the last A/C repair. If the customer wishes
to pay the additional cost, use the A/C recovery equipment that is designated for
recovering contaminated A/C refrigerant. All contaminated A/C refrigerant must be
disposed of as hazardous waste. For all equipment, follow the equipment manufacturers
procedures and instructions. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal
injury.
NOTE:
Jaguar Cars Ltd. supports the efficient usage, recovery and recycling of the refrigerant
used in passenger car air conditioners. Jaguar Cars Ltd. recommends the use of UL-
approved recovery/recycling device such as R-134a A/C refrigerant center (which meets
SAE Standard J 1991) during any A/C system repair and recharge procedure which
requires that the system be evacuated.
Use R-134a A/C Refrigerant Centre to evacuate and recover the A/C system.
• Follow the equipment manufactures procedures and instructions for use of equipment.
Diagnosis and testing
Climate Control System

Inspection and Verification
NOTE:
All Air Conditioning (A/C) related tests should be run in an ambient temperature of at least 10°C
(50°F).
1 . Verify the customer concern by operating the system.
2 . Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage and system integrity.
Mechanical Electrical
• Coolant level
• Refrigerant leaks (UV lamp)
• Fuse(s)
• Drive belt
• Circuit
• Compressor
• Blower motor
• Cooling fan
• Electrical connector(s)
• Control flap(s)
• Compressor
• Duct(s)
• Cooling fan
• Register(s)
• Actuators
• Cabin air filter
• Climate control assembly
• Hose(s)
• Coolant pump
3 . Listen for any unusual noises during climate control system operation.
4 . Inspect the refrigerant system with an ultraviolet (UV) lamp for traces of UV sensitive leak trace
dye.
5 . If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
6 . If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system.
412-01 : Air Distribution and Filtering
Specifications
Specifications
Torque Specifications
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in

Description and operation
Air Distribution and Filtering

COMPONENT LOCATION
NOTE:
Right-Hand Drive (RHD) shown, Left-Hand Drive (LHD) similar
Item Part Number Description
1 Windshield vents
2 Windshield and side window air duct

3 Driver side window vent
4 Driver instrument panel register
5 Driver instrument panel air duct
6 Driver footwell air duct
7 Center instrument panel register
8 Air deflector nozzle
9 Passenger footwell air duct
10 Passenger instrument panel air duct
11 Passenger instrument panel register
12 Passenger side window vent
13 Air intake
14 Water shield
15 Cabin air filter
INTRODUCTION
The air distribution and filtering system controls the distribution and quality of air supplied to the
vehicle interior. The system consists of:
• Air ducts
• Air registers and vents
• A cabin air filter
AIR DUCTS
The air ducts distribute air from the heater assembly to the various registers and vents in the
instrument panel. The windshield and side window air duct, the driver instrument panel air duct, and
the passenger instrument panel air duct all form part of the structure of the instrument panel.
AIR REGISTERS AND VENTS

The air registers allow occupants to control the flow and direction of air from the air ducts. The
instrument panel contains 4 air registers; 1 mounted at each end of the panel, and 2 mounted
centrally above the Touch Screen Display (TSD).
The air vents are fixed outlets. The instrument panel contains 4 air vents; 1 mounted at each end of
the panel, and 2 mounted along the top edge of the panel, below the windshield.
CABIN AIR FILTER
1 Filter housing
2 Cabin air filter
3 Water shield
The cabin air filter is located in a plastic housing on the passenger side of the engine compartment.
The filter removes odours and fine particles, including pollen, from air entering the blower assembly.
The filter housing also contains a shield to prevent water from contaminating the filter element and
entering the heating and ventilation system.
Air Distribution and Filtering

For additional information, refer to <<412-00.>>
Removal and installation
Center Registers (82.20.38)

Removal
1 . Remove the information and entertainment module.
For additional information, refer to Information and Entertainment Module (86.53.48)
2 . NOTE:
The Torx screws may not be fitted.
Remove the center register.
Remove the 2 Torx screws.
Carefully release the component.
Installation
1 . NOTE:
The Torx screws may not be fitted.
Carefully install the center register.
Install the Torx screws.

2 . Install the information and entertainment module.
For additional information, refer to Information and Entertainment Module (86.53.48)
Driver Side Register (82.20.39)
Removal
1 . Remove the instument panel driver's side reinforcement trim panel.
Carefully release the 4 clips.
2.
CAUTION: Care must be taken to avoid damage to the mating surfaces.
Remove the driver side register trim panel.
Installation
1 . Install the driver side register trim panel.

2 . Install the instument panel driver's side reinforcement trim panel.
Align the pegs and secure with the clips.

Passenger Side Register (82.20.40)
Removal
1 . Remove the instrument panel passenger side reinforcement trim panel.
2 . Remove the passenger side register.
Carefully release the component.
Installation
1 . Install the passenger side register.

2 . Install the instrument panel passenger side reinforcement trim panel.

Pollen Filter (76.10.09)
Removal
1 . Open the hood.
2 . Remove the air intake cover.
Remove the 3 clips.
3 . Release the pollen filter housing cover.
Release from the 2 clips.
4.
CAUTION: Remove any debris from the filter aperture.
Remove the pollen filter.

Installation
1 . Install the pollen filter.
2 . Secure the pollen filter housing cover.
3 . Install the air intake cover.
Carefully secure the clips.
4 . Close the hood.

412-02 : Heating and Ventilation
Specifications
Specifications
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in

Heating and Ventilation

COMPONENT LOCATION
NOTE:
RHD (right-hand drive) shown, LHD (left-hand drive) similar
1 Blower relay
2 Ventilation outlets (2 off)

3 Heater assembly
4 Blower motor control module
5 Blower
6 Air inlet
7 Heater coolant pump
INTRODUCTION
The heating and ventilation system controls the temperature and flow of air supplied to the vehicle
interior. The system is dual zone, and can provide different temperature settings for the Left Hand
(LH) and Right Hand (RH) side of the cabin. The system can be operated in 'Automatic' or 'Manual'
mode, with temperature settings being selected using the control switches located below the TSD.
For information on how to operate the heating and ventilation system, refer to the Owner's
Handbook.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE
Many of the features and operations of the heating and ventilation system are controlled by the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) module, which is located on the end of the air inlet duct
casing. For additional information, refer to Control Components (412-04)
AIR INLET DUCT
1 ATC module
2 Fresh/recirculated air door
3 Fresh/recirculated air door motor
5 Blower motor and fan assembly
The air inlet duct is installed behind the instrument panel on the passenger side. Inlet air passes
through the cabin filter and into the air inlet duct where it enters the blower. A servo motor
mounted on the air inlet duct allows fresh or recirculated air to be selected. Operation of the
fresh/recirculated door is controlled by the ATC module.
BLOWER
The blower is contained within the air inlet duct assembly and consists of an open hub, centrifugal
fan powered by an electric motor. Operation of the blower is controlled by the ATC module using a
relay located in the auxiliary junction box and the blower motor control module. The blower motor
control module is installed in the air inlet duct downstream of the blower, where any heat generated
during operation is dissipated by the air flow.
HEATER ASSEMBLY
1 A/C evaporator
2 Heater coolant pipes
3 Windshield distribution door motor
4 RH temperature blend motor
5 Heater core
6 LH temperature blend motor
7 Face and feet distribution door motor
The heater assembly controls the temperature of the air supplied to the air distribution ducts, as
directed by the ATC module. The heater assembly is installed on the vehicle center line, between the
instrument panel and the engine bulkhead.
The heater assembly consists of a casing which contains the Air Conditioning (A/C) evaporator, the
heater core, 2 air distribution control doors, and 2 temperature blend control doors.
The A/C evaporator is controlled as part of the A/C system. For additional information, refer to Air
Conditioning (412-03)
The heater core provides the heat source to warm the air being supplied to the cabin. The heater
core is an aluminium 2 pass, fin and tube heat exchanger, and is installed across the width of the
heater housing. Two aluminium tubes attached to the heater core extend through the engine
bulkhead and connect to the engine cooling system. When the engine is running, coolant is
constantly circulated through the heater core by the coolant pump. For additional information, refer
to Engine Cooling (303-03)
HEATER COOLANT PUMP
A heater coolant pump is mounted on the RH rear face of the radiator housing. The pump is
electrically driven and provides the necessary flow rate of engine coolant to the heater core.
Operation of the pump is controlled by the Central Junction Box (CJB) on receipt of medium speed
Controller Area Network (CAN) bus signals from the ATC module.
The pump will run when the engine is running and operates at a single speed. The CJB broadcasts
pump status over the medium speed CAN bus for use by other vehicle systems.
NOTE:
The pump can be forced to run when the engine is not running if required. For additional
information, refer to Engine Cooling (303-03)
VENTILATION OUTLETS
The ventilation outlets allow the free flow of air through the passenger compartment. The outlets are
installed in the LH and RH rear quarter panels, below the tail lamps.
Each ventilation outlet consists of a grille covered by a soft rubber flap, and is effectively a non-
return valve. The flaps open and close automatically depending on the differential between cabin
and outside air pressures.
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
Operation of the heating and ventilation system is controlled by the ATC module. For additional
information, refer to Control Components (412-04)
Heating and Ventilation

<<412-00>>
Auxiliary Coolant Flow Pump - 4.2L NA V8

- AJV8 (82.25.59)
Removal
1 . Remove the cover and disconnect the battery ground cable.
For additional information, refer to
2
. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported only by a jack. Always
support the vehicle on safety stands.
Raise and support the vehicle.
3 Drain the cooling system.

. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding - 4.2L NA V8
- AJV8
4 . Remove the engine cover.

For additional information, refer to Engine Cover (76.11.35)
5 . Remove the radiator top hose.
Release the 2 clips.
Disconnect the quick release connector.

6 . Remove the auxiliary coolant flow pump.
Release the clips and disconnect the 2 coolant hoses.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
Installation
1 . Install the auxiliary coolant flow pump.
Connect the electrical connector.
Connect the coolant hoses and secure with the clips.
2 . Install the radiator top hose.

Secure with the clips.
Connect the quick release connector.
3 . Install the engine cover.

4 . Connect the battery ground cable and install the cover.

5 Refill the cooling system.

- AJV8
Auxiliary Coolant Flow Pump - 4.2L SC V8
- AJV8 (82.25.59)
Removal
For additional information, refer to Specifications
2
3 Drain the cooling system.

. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding - 4.2L SC V8
- AJV8
4 . Remove the intake air resonator.

For additional information, refer to Intake Air Resonator
5 . Remove the radiator top hose.
Disconnect the quick release connector.

6 . Remove the auxiliary coolant flow pump.
Release the clips and disconnect the 2 coolant hoses.
Installation
1 . Install the auxiliary coolant flow pump.
Connect the coolant hoses and secure with the clips.
2 . Install the radiator top hose.

Connect the quick release connector.
3 . Install the intake air resonator.


5 Refill the cooling system.

- AJV8
Blower Motor (82.25.66)
Removal
1
. CAUTION: Removal of the clips is a delicate procedure, damage will occur if any
force is used.
Remove the passenger side footwell trim panel.
Remove the 3 clips.
2 . Remove the blower motor.
Remove the 3 screws.

Installation
1 . Install the blower motor.
2 . Install the passenger side footwell trim panel.

Heater Core (80.20.29)
Removal
1

3 . Remove the heater and evaporator core housing.

For additional information, refer to Heater Core and Evaporator Core Housing (82.25.21)
4 . Remove the RH side footwell heater duct.
5 . Remove the heater core.
Remove the coolant pipe clamp.
Remove the screw.
Remove the heater core retaining bracket.

Remove the screw.
Position the RH footwell duct mounting bracket aside for access.
Loosen the screw.
6 . NOTE:
Do not disassemble further if the component is removed for access only.
NOTE:
Note the fitted position.
Remove the heater core, inlet and outlet pipes.
Release the 2 clamps.
Remove and discard both O-ring seals.

Installation
1 . NOTE:
Lubricate the seals with coolant.
Install the heater core, inlet and outlet pipes.
Install new O-ring seals.
Install the clamps and tighten the screws.
2 . Install the heater core.
Secure the heater core retaining bracket.
Install the screw.
Install the coolant pipe clamp.
Install the screw.
Align the footwell duct mounting bracket and tighten the screw.
3 . Install the RH side footwell heater duct.
Install the screws.

4 . Install the heater and evaporator core housing.

Heater Core and Evaporator Core Housing
(82.25.21)
Removal
All vehicles
1

3 . Remove the instrument panel.

For additional information, refer to Instrument Panel (76.46.01)
4 . Recover the A/C refrigerant.
Vehicles without supercharger

5 Drain the coolant.
- AJV8
Vehicles with supercharger

6 Drain the coolant.
- AJV8
All vehicles
7.
CAUTION: Always plug any open connections to prevent contamination.
Disconnect the heater supply and return hoses.
Position a container to collect the fluid.
Carefully release the clips.
8
. CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing the components, ensure the area
around the joint faces and connections are clean and dry. Plug open connections to prevent
contamination.
Disconnect the A/C lines.
Remove the bolt.
Remove and discard both O-ring seals.

Position the carpet aside for access.
Release both footwell lamp holders.
Disconnect the 2 electrical connectors.
Remove the 5 nuts.
Remove the bolt.
Installation
All vehicles
2 . NOTE:
Lubricate the O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil.
Connect the A/C lines.
Install new O-ring seals.
Tighten the bolt to 6 Nm (4 lb.ft).
3 . Connect the heater supply and return hoses.

Secure the clips.
4 . Install the instrument panel.



6 Refill and bleed the cooling system.
- AJV8

7 Refill and bleed the cooling system.
- AJV8
All vehicles
8 . Fill the A/C system.
412-03 : Air conditionning
Specifications
Specifications
General Specification
Item Specification
Compressor Clutchless, belt driven from engine with electronically controlled outputs
make Denso
type 7SEU17
Lubricants, Fluids, Sealers and Adhesives
Specifications
Refrigerant R134A
Compressor oil JLM 12260
Capacities
Item Specification
Refrigerant charge weight 700g ± 25g
Compressor oil capacity 130 ml
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in

Compressor to mounting bracket - bolt 25 18 -
Compressor mounting bracket to engine - bolt 25 18 -
Condenser core to bracket - bolt 10 7 88
Pressure cutoff switch to refrigerant pipe 10 7 88
Refrigerant pipes to compressor - bolt 9 7 80
Refrigerant pipes to condenser - nut 10 7 88
Thermostatic expansion valve to evaporator - bolt 6 4 53
Air Conditioning
COMPONENT LOCATION
1 Evaporator
2 Thermostatic expansion valve
3 High pressure line
4 Low pressure line

5 Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor
6 Receiver/Drier
7 Condenser
8 Refrigerant pressure sensor
9 High pressure servicing connection
10 Low pressure servicing connection
INTRODUCTION
The A/C system transfers heat from the vehicle interior to the outside atmosphere to provide the
heater assembly with dehumidified cool air. The A/C system is a sealed, closed loop system, filled
with a charge weight of R134a refrigerant as the heat transfer medium. Oil is added to the refrigerant
to lubricate the internal components of the A/C compressor.
Operation of the A/C system is controlled by the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) module. For
additional information, refer to Control Components (412-04)
A/C COMPRESSOR

1 Pressure relief valve
2 Outlet port
3 Inlet port
4 Solenoid valve
5 Electrical connector
6 Pulley
The A/C compressor circulates refrigerant around the system by compressing low pressure, low
temperature vapour from the evaporator and discharging the resultant high pressure, high
temperature vapour to the condenser.
The A/C compressor is a permanently engaged variable displacement unit which is driven by the
engine accessory drive belt. To protect the system from excessive pressure, a pressure relief valve is
installed in the outlet side of the A/C compressor. The pressure relief valve vents excess pressure into
the engine compartment.
CONDENSER
1 Right Hand (RH) end tank

2 Condenser core
3 Left Hand (LH) end tank
4 Mounting brackets (4 off)
5 Low pressure line connector block
6 High pressure line connector block
7 Receiver drier outlet pipe
8 Receiver drier inlet pipe
9 Receiver drier
The condenser transfers heat from the refrigerant to the surrounding air to convert the high pressure
vapour from the compressor into a liquid. The condenser is installed immediately in front of the
radiator. Two brackets on each end tank attach the condenser to the end tanks of the radiator.
The condenser is classified as a sub-cooling condenser and consists of a fin and tube heat exchanger
core installed between 2 end tanks. Divisions in the end tanks separate the heat exchanger into a 4
pass upper (condenser) section and a 2 pass lower (sub-cooler) section.
The LH end tank provides the connections to the high pressure line from the A/C compressor and the
low pressure line to the evaporator.
The RH end tank provides the connections to the receiver drier.
RECEIVER DRIER
The receiver drier is mounted on the condenser RH end tank and removes solid impurities and
moisture from the refrigerant. It also provides a reservoir for liquid refrigerant to accommodate
changes of heat load at the evaporator.
NOTE:
The receiver drier is part of the condenser assembly and is not serviceable separately.
Refrigerant entering the receiver drier passes through a filter and a desiccant pack, then collects in
the base of the unit before flowing through the outlet pipe back to the condenser.
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
The refrigerant pressure sensor is located in the high pressure/temperature refrigerant line between
the condenser and the thermostatic expansion valve. For additional information, refer to Control
Components (412-04)
THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE
1 Metering valve
2 Housing
3 Diaphragm
4 Temperature sensor
5 Outlet passage from evaporator
6 Inlet passage to evaporator
The thermostatic expansion valve meters the flow of refrigerant into the evaporator, to match the
refrigerant flow with the heat load of the air passing through the evaporator.
The thermostatic expansion valve is a block type valve located behind the heater assembly, and
attached to the inlet and outlet ports of the evaporator. The thermostatic expansion valve consists of
an aluminium housing containing inlet and outlet passages. A ball and spring metering valve is
installed in the inlet passage and a temperature sensor is installed in the outlet passage. The
temperature sensor consists of a temperature sensitive tube connected to a diaphragm. The bottom
end of the temperature sensitive tube acts on the ball of the metering valve. Pressure on top of the
diaphragm is controlled by the evaporator outlet temperature conducted through the temperature
sensitive tube. The bottom of the diaphragm senses evaporator outlet pressure.
Liquid refrigerant flows through the metering valve into the evaporator. The restriction across the
metering valve reduces the pressure and temperature of the refrigerant. The restriction also changes
the liquid stream of refrigerant into a fine spray, to improve the evaporation process. As the
refrigerant passes through the evaporator, it absorbs heat from the air flowing through the
evaporator. The increase in temperature causes the refrigerant to vaporise and increase in pressure.
The temperature and pressure of the refrigerant leaving the evaporator acts on the diaphragm and
temperature sensitive tube, which regulate the metering valve opening and so control the volume of
refrigerant flowing through the evaporator. The warmer the air flowing through the evaporator, the
more heat available to evaporate refrigerant and thus the greater volume of refrigerant allowed
through the metering valve.
EVAPORATOR
The evaporator is installed in the heater assembly, between the blower and the heater matrix, to
absorb heat from the exterior or recirculated air. Low pressure, low temperature refrigerant changes
from liquid to vapour in the evaporator, absorbing large quantities of heat as it changes state.
Most of the moisture in the air passing through the evaporator condenses into water, which drains
out of the vehicle by passing through a drain tube to the underside of the vehicle.
REFRIGERANT LINES
To maintain similar flow velocities around the A/C system, the diameter of the refrigerant lines varies
to suit the 2 pressure/temperature regimes. Larger diameter pipes are installed in the low
pressure/temperature regime and smaller diameter pipes are installed in the high
pressure/temperature regime.
Low and high pressure charging connections are incorporated into the refrigerant lines for system
servicing.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE:
A = Refrigerant liquid; B = Refrigerant vapour; C = Air flow
1 Evaporator
2 Thermostatic expansion valve
3 High pressure servicing connection
5 Engine cooling fan

6 Condenser
7 Receiver/Drier
8 Variable displacement A/C compressor
9 Low pressure servicing connection
10 Blower
To accomplish the transfer of heat, the refrigerant is circulated around the system, where it passes
through 2 pressure/temperature regimes. In each of the regimes the refrigerant changes state,
during which process maximum heat absorption or dissipation occurs.
The low pressure/temperature regime is from the thermostatic expansion valve, through the
evaporator to the compressor. The refrigerant decreases in pressure and temperature at the
thermostatic expansion valve then changes state from a liquid to a vapour in the evaporator to
absorb heat.
The high pressure/temperature regime is from the compressor, through the condenser and receiver
drier assembly to the thermostatic expansion valve. The refrigerant increases in pressure and
temperature as it passes through the compressor, then releases heat and changes state from a
vapour to a liquid in the condenser.
Operation of the A/C system is controlled by the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) module. For
additional information, refer to Control Components (412-04)
The A/C system works in conjunction with the heating and ventilation system, and the air distribution
and filtering system. For additional information, refer to Heating and Ventilation (412-02)
For additional information, refer to Air Distribution and Filtering (412-01)
Air Conditioning
For additional information refer to<<412-00>>
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor - 4.2L

NA V8 - AJV8 (82.10.20)
Special Service Tools
Engine support bracket

303-021
Engine lifting brackets

303-749
Removal
2 . Raise and support the vehicle.
4 . Release the throttle body.

For additional information, refer to Throttle Body (19.70.04)
5 Release the accessory drive belt.

.
Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner counter-clockwise, using a 3/8 "
drive wrench.
6.
CAUTION: Protect the paintwork during this operation.
Using the special tools, support the engine.
7 . Remove the LH heated oxygen sensor (HO2S).

For additional information, refer to Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
8 . Remove the LH engine mount.

For additional information, refer to Engine Mount LH (12.45.01)
9 . With assistance, remove the A-frame.
Remove the 6 bolts.

10 . Release the A/C compressor.
Remove the 3 bolts.
11
. CAUTION: Immediately cap all refrigerant lines to prevent ingress of dirt and
moisture.
Disconnect the refrigerant lines from the A/C compressor.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove and discard the 2 O-ring seals.

12 . Remove the A/C compressor.
Installation
1 . Install the A/C compressor.
Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
2.
CAUTION: Lubricate the new seals with clean refrigerant oil.
Connect the refrigerant lines.
Clean the component mating faces.

Install the new O-ring seals.
3 . With assistance, install the A-frame.
4 . Install the LH engine mount.

5 . Install the HO2S.

6 . Remove the special tools.
7 . Install the accessory drive belt.
8 . Install the throttle body.

For additional information, refer to Throttle Body (19.70.04)
10 . Recharge the A/C system.

Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor - 4.2L
SC V8 - AJV8 (82.10.20)
Special Service Tools
Engine support bracket

303-021
Engine lifting brackets

303-749
Removal
2 . Raise and support the vehicle.
3 . Remove the accessory drive belt.

For additional information, refer to Accessory Drive Belt - 4.2L SC V8 - AJV8 (12.10.40)
5.
CAUTION: Protect the paintwork during this operation.
Using the special tools, support the engine.

6 . Remove the LH heated oxygen sensor (HO2S).
7 . Remove the LH engine mount.

8 . With assistance, remove the A-frame.
Remove the 6 bolts.
9 . Release the A/C compressor.
Remove the 3 bolts.

10
. CAUTION: Immediately cap all refrigerant lines to prevent ingress of dirt and
moisture.
Disconnect the refrigerant lines from the A/C compressor.
Remove the 2 bolts.
11 . Remove the A/C compressor.

Installation
1 . Install the A/C compressor.
2.
Connect the refrigerant lines.
Clean the component mating faces.
3 . With assistance, install the A-frame.
4 . Install the LH engine mount.

5 . Install the HO2S.
6 . Remove the special tools.



Blower Motor Resistor
Removal
1
force is used.
Remove the 3 clips.
2 . Remove the blower motor resistor.

Installation
1 . Install the blower motor resistor.
Install the screws.

Condenser Core - 4.2L NA V8 - AJV8
(82.15.07)
Removal
1 . Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2
3 . Remove the radiator splash shield.

For additional information, refer to Radiator Splash Shield (76.22.90)
4 . Remove the front bumper air ducting.
Remove the 7 clips.

6 . Disconnect the A/C pipes.
Remove the 2 nuts.
Discard the O-ring seals.
Install blanking caps to the exposed ports.
7 . Remove the condenser core.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1 . Install the condenser core.
Secure in the clips.

2 . Connect the A/C pipes.
Remove the blanking caps from the ports.
Install a new O-ring seal.
Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
4 . Install the front bumper air ducting.
Install the clips.
Secure the clips.
5 . Install the radiator splash shield.

6 . Connect the battery ground cable.

Condenser Core - 4.2L SC V8 - AJV8
(82.15.07)
Removal
1
2 . Remove the supercharger radiator.

For additional information, refer to Radiator
4 . Disconnect the A/C pipes.
Remove the 2 nuts.
Discard the O-ring seals.
Install blanking caps to the exposed ports.
5 . Remove the condenser core.

Installation
1 . Install the condenser core.
2 . Connect the A/C pipes.
Remove the blanking caps from the ports.
3 . Install the supercharger radiator.

For additional information, refer to Radiator

Evaporator Core (82.25.20)
Removal
2
3 . Remove the TXV assembly.

For additional information, refer to Thermostatic Expansion Valve (82.25.01)
4.
Remove the A/C pipes.
Release the clamp.
Release the clip.
Release the foam pad and the upper section of the clamp.
5 . Remove the coolant pipe clamp.
Remove the screw.
6 . Carefully separate the evaporator housing.
Remove the 10 clips.
Release the blower motor harness clip.
Release the 2 evaporator housing clips.

7 . Remove the evaporator core.
Carefully remove the evaporator core temperature sensor.
Installation
1 . NOTE:
Make sure all components are clean.

Install the evaporator core.
Carefully install the evaporator core temperature sensor.
2
. CAUTION: Make sure the evaporator temperature sensor harness does not become
trapped.
Install the evaporator housing cover.
Install the clips.
Install the screws.
3 . Install the coolant pipe clamp.
Install the screw.
4 . Install the A/C pipes.
Install the foam pad.
Install the clamp.
Install the screws.
5 . Install the TXV assembly.

For additional information, refer to Thermostatic Expansion Valve (82.25.01)

Pressure Cutoff Switch (82.10.32)
Removal

4 . Remove the air intake duct.
Remove the bolt.
5
. CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing components, ensure the area around
the joint faces and connections are clean. Plug open connections to prevent contamination.
Remove the pressure cutoff switch.
Remove and discard the O-ring seal.

Installation
1 . NOTE:
Lubricate the O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil.
Install the pressure cutoff switch.
Clean the components.
Tighten the cutoff switch to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
2 . Install the air intake duct.
Tighten the clips.

Thermostatic Expansion Valve (82.25.01)
Removal
2

4.
Remove the TXV assembly.
Carefully cut and release the insulation for access.
Remove the 2 Allen bolts.

Installation
1.
NOTE:
Make sure all component mating faces are clean.
Install the TXV assembly.
Install and tighten the Allen bolts to 6 Nm (4 lb.ft).
Replace the TXV insulation.

412-04 : Control Componements
Specifications
Specifications
lb- lb-
Item Nm
ft in
Climate control module and audio/cd module assembly to instrument panel -
3 - 27
bolt
Climate control and audio/cd modules to assembly bracket - bolt 3 - 27
Climate control and audio/cd modules to assembly bracket - screw 2.5 - 22
Control Components
COMPONENT LOCATION
1 Pollution sensor (if fitted)

3 Sunload/Light sensor
4 Windshield distribution (defrost) stepper motor
5 Right-Hand (RH) temperature blend stepper motor
6 Cabin humidity and temperature sensor
7 Evaporator temperature sensor
8 Control switches
9 Left-Hand (LH) temperature blend stepper motor
10 Face/feet distribution stepper motor
12 Blower motor
13 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) module
14 Ambient air temperature sensor
15 Air intake servo motor
16 Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor solenoid valve
INTRODUCTION
The ATC (automatic temperature control) module controls the A/C (air conditioning) system and the
heating and ventilation system to regulate the temperature, volume, and distribution of air into the
cabin.
The system is a fully automatic dual zone system capable of maintaining individual temperature
levels selected for the LH (left-hand) and RH (right-hand) sides of the cabin. Manual overrides for the
system include intake air source, blower speed and air distribution. These selections can be made
using either the Touch Screen Display (TSD) or the control switches located below the TSD.
For information on how to operate the A/C (air conditioning) system and the heating and ventilation
system, refer to the Owner's Handbook.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE
The ATC (automatic temperature control) module is mounted on the end of the blower motor casing,
behind the instrument panel. The ATC (automatic temperature control) module processes inputs
from the TSD, the control switches located below the TSD, and the system sensors. In response to
these inputs, the ATC (automatic temperature control) module outputs control signals to the A/C (air
conditioning) system and the heating and ventilation system.
In addition to controlling the A/C (air conditioning) system and the heating and ventilation system,
the ATC (automatic temperature control) module also controls the following:
• The seat heaters. For additional information, refer to Seats (501-10 Seating)
• The rear window heater. For additional information, refer to Glass, Frames and
Mechanisms (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms)
• The windshield heater. For additional information, refer to Glass, Frames and
Mechanisms (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms)
• The exterior mirror heaters. For additional information, refer to Rear View Mirrors (501-09
Rear View Mirrors)
• The steering wheel heater (if fitted). For additional information, refer to Steering Column
Switches (211-05 Steering Column Switches)
Two electrical connectors provide the interface between the ATC (automatic temperature control)
module, and the vehicle wiring. The ATC (automatic temperature control) module uses hardwired
inputs from the system sensors, the LIN (local interconnect network) bus to communicate with the
stepper motors and the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus to communicate with
other control modules on the vehicle.
AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR SOLENOID VALVE

The A/C (air conditioning) compressor solenoid valve is integral with the A/C (air conditioning)
compressor. Operation of the solenoid valve is controlled by the ATC (automatic temperature
control) module using a hardwired drive current of differing values. By controlling the flow of
refrigerant through the compressor, the solenoid valve can control the A/C (air conditioning) system
pressure and the evaporator operating temperature.
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
The refrigerant pressure sensor provides the ATC (automatic temperature control) module with a
pressure input from the high pressure side of the refrigerant system. The refrigerant pressure sensor
is located in the refrigerant line between the condenser and the thermostatic expansion valve.
The ATC (automatic temperature control) module supplies a 5 V reference voltage to the refrigerant
pressure sensor and receives a return signal voltage, between 0 V and 5 V, related to system
pressure.
The ATC (automatic temperature control) module uses the signal from the pressure sensor to protect
the refrigerant system from extremes of pressure. The ATC (automatic temperature control) module
transmits the A/C (air conditioning) pressure, along with the compressor drive current value, to the
instrument cluster on the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus. These signals are
broadcast to the ECM (engine control module) on the high speed CAN (controller area network) bus
to allow it to calculate the torque being applied to the engine by the compressor.
To protect the system from extremes of pressure, the ATC (automatic temperature control) module
sets the A/C (air conditioning) compressor to the minimum flow position if the pressure:
• Decreases to 2.1 ± 0.2 bar (31.5 ± 3 lbf/in²); the ATC (automatic temperature control) module
loads the A/C (air conditioning) compressor again when the pressure increases to 2.3 ± 0.2
bar (33.4 ± 3 lbf/in²)
• Increases to 31 ± 1 bar (450 ± 14.5 lbf/in²); the ATC (automatic temperature control) module
loads the A/C (air conditioning) compressor again when the pressure decreases to 26 ± 1 bar
(377 ± 14.5 lbf/in²)
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The evaporator temperature sensor is a NTC (negative temperature coefficient) thermistor that
provides the ATC (automatic temperature control) module with a temperature signal from the
downstream side of the evaporator. The evaporator temperature sensor is mounted directly onto
the evaporator matrix fins.
The ATC (automatic temperature control) module uses the input from the evaporator temperature
sensor to control the load of the A/C (air conditioning) compressor and thus the operating
temperature of the evaporator.
CABIN HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The cabin humidity and temperature sensor is installed behind a grill on the drivers side of the
instrument panel. The temperature inside the cabin is measured by a NTC (negative temperature
coefficient) thermistor. A motor within the sensor assembly draws cabin air in through the grill and
over the thermistor. The motor is provided a battery voltage feed by a relay located within the CJB
(central junction box) .
Humidity inside the cabin is measured by a sensor element made up of film capacitors on different
substrates. The dielectric is a polymer which absorbs or releases water proportional to the relative
humidity of the air being drawn through the sensor and thus changes the capacitance of the
capacitor. For protection, the sensor element is contained in a nylon mesh cover.
Humidity within the cabin is controlled by raising and lowering the evaporator temperature. An
increase in evaporator temperature increases the moisture content in the air entering the cabin.
Lowering the evaporator temperature reduces the moisture content in the air entering the cabin.
AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The ambient air temperature sensor is a NTC (negative temperature coefficient) thermistor that
provides the ATC (automatic temperature control) module with an input of external air temperature.
The sensor is hard wired to the ECM (engine control module) and its signal is transmitted to the
instrument cluster on the high speed CAN (controller area network) bus. The instrument cluster acts
as a gateway and transmits the ambient air temperature signal to the ATC (automatic temperature
control) module on the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus. The sensor is mounted on
the vehicle center line behind the lower front grill, and can be accessed from underneath the vehicle.
SUNLOAD/LIGHT SENSOR
The sunload/light sensor consists of 2 photoelectric cells that provide the ATC (automatic
temperature control) module with inputs of light intensity; one as sensed coming from the left of the
vehicle and one as sensed coming from the right. The inputs are a measure of the solar heating effect
on vehicle occupants, and are used by the ATC (automatic temperature control) module to adjust
blower speed, temperature and distribution to improve comfort.
NOTE:
The solar sensor is also used as part of the Autolamp feature and also contains the active anti-
theft alarm indicator LED (light emitting diode) . For additional information, refer to Exterior
Lighting (417-01 Exterior Lighting)
For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft - Active (419-01 Anti-Theft - Active)
The sensor is installed in the center of the instrument panel upper surface and is powered by a 5 V
feed from the instrument cluster.
POLLUTION SENSOR
Up to 2009 MY, a pollution sensor was installed only on Japanese specification vehicles. From 2009
MY, the pollution sensor is a standard fit in all markets.
The pollution sensor allows the ATC (automatic temperature control) module to monitor the ambient
air for the level of hydrocarbons and oxidised gases such as nitrous oxides, sulphur oxides and carbon
monoxide. The sensor is mounted in the RH (right-hand) front corner of the engine compartment.
The pollution sensor is powered by an ignition controlled voltage feed from the CJB (central junction
box) and provides the ATC (automatic temperature control) module with separate signals of
hydrocarbon and oxidised gases. With a pollution sensor fitted, the ATC (automatic temperature
control) module can control the air intake source to reduce the amount of contaminants entering the
cabin. This function is fully automatic, but can be overridden by manual selection of the air source
using the recirculation control switch below the TSD.
If there is a fault with the sensor, the ATC (automatic temperature control) module disables
automatic operation of the recirculation door.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE:
A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus; N = Medium speed CAN
(controller area network) bus; O = LIN (local interconnect network) bus
1 Battery
2 Control switches
4 Ambient air temperature sensor

5 Pollution sensor
6 Engine Control Module (ECM)
7 Instrument cluster
8 Cabin humidity and temperature sensor
9 A/C compressor solenoid
10 RH temperature blend stepper motor
11 Windshield distribution (defrost) stepper motor
12 Face/feet distribution stepper motor
13 LH temperature blend stepper motor
14 Air intake servo motor
15 Blower motor
17 Evaporator temperature sensor
18 ATC module
19 CJB
20 Sunload/Light sensor
21 Megafuse (175A)
Air Intake Control

The source of intake air is automatically controlled unless overridden by pressing the air recirculation
switch located below the TSD. Under automatic control, the ATC (automatic temperature control)
module determines the required position of the recirculation door from its 'comfort' algorithm and, if
fitted, the pollution sensor.
The recirculation door is operated by an electric motor. The ATC (automatic temperature control)
module provides analogue signals to the motor along a hardwired connection. A potentiometer in
the motor supplies the ATC (automatic temperature control) module with a position feedback signal
for closed loop control.
Air Temperature Control

Cooled air from the evaporator enters the heater assembly, where temperature blend doors direct a
proportion of the air through the heater core to produce the required output air temperature.
The 2 temperature blend doors operate independently to enable individual temperature settings for
the left and right sides of the cabin. The temperature blend doors are operated by stepper motors,
which are controlled by the ATC (automatic temperature control) module using LIN (local
interconnect network) bus messages.
The ATC (automatic temperature control) module calculates the temperature blend stepper motor
positions required to achieve the selected temperature and compares it against the current position.
If there is any difference, the ATC (automatic temperature control) module signals the stepper
motors to adopt the new position.
Air temperature is controlled automatically unless maximum heating (HI) or maximum cooling (LO) is
selected. When maximum heating or cooling is selected, a 'comfort' algorithm in the ATC (automatic
temperature control) module adopts an appropriate strategy for air distribution, blower speed, and
air source.
Temperature control of one side of the cabin can be compromised by the other side of the cabin
being set to a high level of heating or cooling. True maximum heating or cooling (displayed as 'HI' or
'LO' on the TSD) can only be selected from the driver's side temperature control button. If 'HI' or 'LO'
is selected from the driver's side, the passenger side temperature will be automatically set to match
the driver's side.
When economy mode is selected by pressing the 'Econ' TSD soft button, no cooling of the intake air
will take place. The minimum output air temperature from the system will be ambient air
temperature plus any heat pick up in the air intake path.
Blower Motor Control

Operation of the blower motor is controlled by the ATC (automatic temperature control) module.
The ATC (automatic temperature control) module monitors a feedback voltage from the blower
motor control module. In response to the feedback voltage, the ATC (automatic temperature control)
module provides a drive signal back to the blower motor control module which is used to regulate
the voltage flow across the blower motor and hence regulate blower speed. The blower motor is
provided with a battery voltage feed from the blower motor relay, which is located within the
auxiliary junction box.
When the A/C (air conditioning) system is in automatic mode, the ATC (automatic temperature
control) module determines the blower speed required from its 'comfort' algorithm. When the A/C
(air conditioning) system is in manual mode, the ATC (automatic temperature control) module
operates the blower at the speed selected using either the rotary control switch or the '+/-' soft
buttons on the TSD.
The ATC (automatic temperature control) module also controls blower motor speed to compensate
for the ram effect on intake air produced by forward movement of the vehicle. As vehicle speed, and
consequently the ram effect increases, blower motor speed is reduced.
Air Distribution Control

Two air distribution doors are used to direct air into the cabin. The doors are operated by stepper
motors, which are controlled by the ATC (automatic temperature control) module using LIN (local
interconnect network) bus messages.
When the A/C (air conditioning) system is in automatic mode, the ATC (automatic temperature
control) module automatically controls air distribution into the cabin in line with its 'comfort'
algorithm. Automatic control is overridden if any of the TSD air distribution soft buttons are selected.
Air distribution in the cabin will remain as selected until the 'Auto' switch is pressed or a different
manual selection is made.
Programmed Defrost
When the 'DEF' button is pressed, the ATC (automatic temperature control) module instigates the
programmed defrost function. When selected, the ATC (automatic temperature control) module
configures the system as follows:
• Automatic mode off

• Selected temperature unchanged
• Air inlet set to fresh air
• Air distribution set to windshield
• Blower speed set to level 6
• Windshield and rear screen heaters on.
The programmed defrost function can be cancelled by one of the following:
• Selecting any air distribution switch on the TSD

• Pressing the 'AUTO' switch below the TSD
• A second press of the 'DEF' button
• Switching the ignition OFF
NOTE:
The blower speed can be adjusted without terminating the programmed defrost function.
A/C Compressor Control

When A/C (air conditioning) is selected ('Econ' off) the ATC (automatic temperature control) module
maintains the evaporator at an operating temperature that varies with the cabin cooling
requirements. If the requirement for cooled air decreases, the ATC (automatic temperature control)
module raises the evaporator operating temperature by reducing the flow of refrigerant provided by
the A/C (air conditioning) compressor.
NOTE:
The ATC (automatic temperature control) module closely controls the rate of temperature
increase to avoid introducing moisture into the cabin.
If the requirement for cooled air increases, the ATC (automatic temperature control) module lowers
the evaporator operating temperature by increasing the flow of refrigerant provided by the A/C (air
conditioning) compressor.
When economy mode is selected by pressing the 'Econ' TSD soft button, the compressor current
signal supplied by the ATC (automatic temperature control) module holds the A/C (air conditioning)
compressor solenoid valve in the minimum flow position, effectively switching off the A/C (air
conditioning) function.
The ATC (automatic temperature control) module incorporates limits for the operating pressure of
the refrigerant system. When the system approaches the high pressure limit the compressor current
signal is progressively reduced until the system pressure decreases. When the system pressure falls
below the low pressure limit the compressor current signal is held at its lowest setting so that the
A/C (air conditioning) compressor is maintained at its minimum stroke. This avoids depletion of the
lubricant from the A/C (air conditioning) compressor.
A/C Compressor Torque

The ATC (automatic temperature control) module transmits refrigerant pressure and A/C (air
conditioning) compressor current values to the ECM (engine control module) over the medium speed
then high speed CAN (controller area network) bus, using the instrument cluster as a gateway. The
ECM (engine control module) uses these values to calculate the torque being used to drive the A/C
(air conditioning) compressor. The ECM (engine control module) compares the calculated value with
its allowable value and if necessary forces the ATC (automatic temperature control) module to inhibit
the A/C (air conditioning) compressor by transmitting the 'ACClutchInhibit' CAN (controller area
network) message. This forces the ATC (automatic temperature control) module to reduce the drive
current to the A/C (air conditioning) compressor solenoid valve, which reduces refrigerant flow. This
in turn reduces the torque required to drive the A/C (air conditioning) compressor.
By reducing the maximum A/C (air conditioning) compressor torque, the ECM (engine control
module) is able to reduce the load on the engine when it needs to maintain vehicle performance or
cooling system integrity.
Cooling Fan Control

The ATC (automatic temperature control) module determines the amount of condenser cooling
required from the refrigerant pressure sensor, since there is a direct relationship between the
temperature and pressure of the refrigerant. The cooling requirement is broadcast to the ECM
(engine control module) on the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus. The ECM (engine
control module) then controls the temperature of the condenser using the cooling fan. For additional
information, refer to Electronic Engine Controls (303-14 Electronic Engine Controls - Vehicles
Without: Supercharger)
Windshield Heater
The ATC (automatic temperature control) module controls operation of the windshield heater using 2
relays in the power distribution box. When a request is made for windshield heater operation, the
ATC (automatic temperature control) module broadcasts a message to the CJB (central junction box)
on the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus. On receipt of this message, the CJB (central
junction box) energises the relays by providing a ground path for both relay coils. This allows a
battery feed to flow across the relays to power the left and right heater elements.
NOTE:
Windshield heater operation is only enabled when the engine is running.
There are 2 modes of windshield heater operation; manual and automatic.
Manual operation is activated by pressing the windshield heater control switch. When the switch is
pressed, the ATC (automatic temperature control) module illuminates a LED (light emitting diode) in
the switch and powers the heater elements for 6.5 minutes.
The switch LED (light emitting diode) remains illuminated until the windshield heater switch is
pressed a second time (to switch the system off), the heating phase is completed, or the engine
stops. If the engine is re-started within 30 seconds the windshield heater resumes the previous
heating phase.
There are 2 variants of automatic operation; automatic operation at the start of a journey and
automatic operation during a journey.
Automatic operation at the start of a journey is initiated if the ambient air temperature is below 5 °C
(41 °F) at the start of a journey. In this instance, the ATC (automatic temperature control) module will
automatically power the windshield heater elements and illuminate the switch LED (light emitting
diode) for 6.5 minutes. The windshield heater can be switched off during this period by pressing the
control switch or stopping the engine.
Automatic operation during a journey is initiated when low ambient air temperatures are
experienced and the vehicle has been travelling for a set period of time above a threshold speed. In
this instance, no feedback is given to the driver to inform him the windshield heater is operational
(the switch LED (light emitting diode) is not illuminated) and the duration of operation is variable
depending upon the ambient air temperature, vehicle speed and the amount of time the vehicle has
been travelling.
Rear Window Heater
The ATC (automatic temperature control) module controls operation of the rear window heater using
a relay in the auxiliary junction box. When a request is made for rear window heater operation, the
ATC (automatic temperature control) module broadcasts a message to the auxiliary junction box on
the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus. On receipt of this message, the auxiliary
junction box energises the relay by providing a ground path for the relay coil. This allows a battery
feed to flow across the relay to power the rear window heater element.
NOTE:
Rear window heater operation is only enabled when the engine is running.
There are 2 modes of rear window heater operation; manual and automatic.
Manual operation is activated by pressing the rear window heater control switch. When the switch is
pressed, the ATC (automatic temperature control) module illuminates a LED (light emitting diode) in
the switch and powers the heater element for 21 minutes.
The switch LED (light emitting diode) remains illuminated until the rear window heater switch is
pressed a second time (to switch the system off), the heating phase is completed, or the engine
stops. If the engine is re-started within 30 seconds the rear window heater resumes the previous
heating phase.
There are 2 variants of automatic operation; automatic operation at the start of a journey and
automatic operation during a journey.
Automatic operation at the start of a journey is initiated if the ambient air temperature is below 5 °C
(41 °F) at the start of a journey. In this instance, the ATC (automatic temperature control) module will
automatically power the rear window heater element and illuminate the switch LED (light emitting
diode) for 21 minutes. The rear window heater can be switched off during this period by pressing the
control switch or stopping the engine.
Automatic operation during a journey is initiated when low ambient air temperatures are
experienced and the vehicle has been travelling for a set period of time above a threshold speed. In
this instance, no feedback is given to the driver to inform him the rear window heater is operational
(the switch LED (light emitting diode) is not illuminated) and the duration of operation is variable
depending upon the ambient air temperature, vehicle speed and the amount of time the vehicle has
been travelling.
Exterior Mirror Heaters

Exterior mirror heater operation is determined by ambient air temperature and windshield wiper
status. When ambient air temperature reaches a pre-determined level, the ATC (automatic
temperature control) module broadcasts an exterior mirror heating request to the door modules
over the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus. On receipt of this message, the door
modules provide feed and ground connections to both exterior mirror heater elements.
NOTE:
Operation of the exterior mirror heaters is fully automatic and not controllable by the driver.
The amount of time the exterior mirror heaters are operational increases if the windshield wipers are
switched on. This ensures the mirrors remain mist free in damp and wet conditions, where there is
an increased risk of misting.
Seat Heaters
There are 4 seat heater settings available; Off, 1, 2 or 3, which can be set through the TSD. The heat
setting is relayed to the vehicle occupants through a graduated display on the TSD.
Operation of the heated seats is controlled by the ATC (automatic temperature control) module.
When the ATC (automatic temperature control) module receives a heating request from the TSD, it
broadcasts a message to the CJB (central junction box) over the medium speed CAN (controller area
network) bus. The CJB (central junction box) then provides a hardwired 12 V supply to the 3 heater
elements contained within each seat. The 3 heater elements, 2 in the seat cushion and 1 in the seat
squab, are wired in series.
The ATC (automatic temperature control) module monitors seat temperature using a temperature
sensor located in each seat cushion. The CJB (central junction box) provides the temperature sensors
with a 5 V supply. The level of the returned voltage back to the CJB (central junction box) is
proportional to the seat temperature. The value of the return signal is broadcast to the ATC
(automatic temperature control) module over the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus
which it then converts into a temperature value to allow it to control seat temperature to the
required level.
The ATC (automatic temperature control) module will suspend or disable operation of the seat
heaters if any of the following occur:
• Battery voltage exceeds 16.5 ± 0.3 V for more than 5 seconds. Seat heating is re-enabled
when battery voltage decreases to 16.2 ± 0.3 V
• If a short or open circuit is detected
• If the seat heat temperature rises significantly above the target temperature setting.
The graduated display on the TSD remains illuminated until the seat heaters are turned off or the
engine stops. If the engine is restarted within 30 seconds the seat heater resumes the previous
heating level.
Steering Wheel Heater

The steering wheel heater has 1 heat setting and can be turned on and off by pressing the soft
button located on the seat heater TSD screen. The on/off status of the steering wheel heater is
relayed to the vehicle occupants through the TSD. When the ignition is switched off, the heater will
reset to off.
Power for the heater element is supplied by the CJB (central junction box) on receipt of a request
from the ATC (automatic temperature control) module over the medium speed CAN (controller area
network) bus. Temperature control for the heater element is provided by the steering wheel heater
control module which receives a temperature feedback signal from a NTC (negative temperature
coefficient) thermistor located within the steering wheel.
Control Components
Principle of Operation
For a detailed description of the climate control system, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section in the workshop manual.

1 . Verify the customer concern.
• Fuse(s)
• Refrigerant
• Harness
• Heater control flaps
• Electrical connectors
• Ducting
• Switch(s)
4 . If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC
Index.
DTC Index
CAUTION: When probing connectors to take measurements in the course of the pinpoint
tests, use the adaptor kit, part number 3548-1358-00
NOTE:
If the control module is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to
the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval
programme is in operation, prior to the installation of a new module.
NOTE:
Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only five digit codes. Match the
five digits from the scan tool to the first five digits of the seven digit code listed to identify the
fault (the last two digits give extra information read by the manufacturer-approved diagnostic
system).
NOTE:
When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter (DMM) accurate to
three decimal places and with a current calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always
take the resistance of the DMM leads into account.
NOTE:
Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests.
NOTE:
If DTCs are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests, a fault is not present, an
intermittent concern may be the cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded
terminals.
DTC Description Possible Cause Action
Carry out any pinpoint tests

• Aspirator fan circuit - short to
associated with this DTC using
B105A01 Aspirator fan fault ground, open circuit
• Aspirator fan component fault the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
Recirculation servo Carry out any pinpoint tests

motor actuator - • Sensor 5 volt supply - short to associated with this DTC using
B1A5911
sensor 5 volt ground the manufacturer approved
supply diagnostic system
Air conditioning Refer to electrical circuit

• Air conditioning pressure
pressure sensor - diagrams and test air
B1A5913 sensor 5 volt supply - open
sensor 5 volt circuit conditioning pressure sensor
supply circuit for open circuit
In car temperature Carry out any pinpoint tests

• In car temperature sensor
B1A6111 sensor circuit - associated with this DTC using
circuit - short to ground
short to ground the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
In car temperature Carry out any pinpoint tests

• In car temperature sensor
sensor circuit - associated with this DTC using
B1A6115 circuit - short to power, open
short to power, circuit the manufacturer approved
open circuit diagnostic system

Air conditioning
• Air conditioning pressure associated with this DTC using
B1A6211 pressure sensor - sensor circuit - short to ground the manufacturer approved
short to ground
diagnostic system
Air conditioning Carry out any pinpoint tests

• Air conditioning pressure
pressure sensor - associated with this DTC using
B1A6215 sensor circuit - short to power,
short to power, open circuit the manufacturer approved

Right hand sun
• Right hand sun load sensor associated with this DTC using
B1A6311 load sensor - short circuit - short to ground the manufacturer approved
to ground
diagnostic system

Left hand sun load
• Left hand sun load sensor associated with this DTC using
B1A6411 sensor - short to
circuit - short to ground the manufacturer approved
ground
diagnostic system
Refer to electrical circuit

Vehicle sensor
• Vehicle sensor ground - open diagrams and test vehicle
B1A6713 ground - open circuit sensor ground circuit for open
circuit
circuit

• Humidity sensor circuit - short
Humidity sensor associated with this DTC using
B1A6901 to power, ground, open circuit
fault • Sensor component fault the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

B1A7001 Compressor fault • Over current detection
the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
Stepper motor Refer to electrical circuit

B1A9815 actuator LIN Bus • No response from ALL
diagrams and test stepper
steppers for 20 seconds - LIN
fault, or power motor actuator LIN Bus for
supply - open network fault open circuit
circuit
Recirculation servo
motor actuator - • Sensor 5 volt supply - open
B1B6013 diagrams and test sensor 5
sensor 5 volt circuit
volt supply for open circuit
supply

Pollution sensor HC
• Pollution sensor HC input - associated with this DTC using
B1B6111 input - short to
short to ground the manufacturer approved
ground
diagnostic system

Pollution sensor
• Pollution sensor Nox input - associated with this DTC using
B1B6211 Nox input - short to short to ground the manufacturer approved
ground
diagnostic system

Recirculation servo diagrams and test
• Recirculation servo motor
B1B6313 motor actuator - recirculation servo motor
actuator ground - open circuit
ground circuit actuator ground for open
circuit

Recirculation servo • Recirculation servo
B1B6711 potentiometer - potentiometer circuit - short
to ground the manufacturer approved
short to ground
diagnostic system
Recirculation servo Carry out any pinpoint tests

• Recirculation servo
potentiometer - associated with this DTC using
B1B6715 potentiometer circuit - short
short to power, to power, open circuit the manufacturer approved
• Recirculation servo Carry out any pinpoint tests

potentiometer circuit - short
Recirculation servo associated with this DTC using
B1B6801 to power, ground, open circuit
motor fault • Recirculation door/linkage the manufacturer approved
broken diagnostic system
Evaporator Carry out any pinpoint tests

temperature • Evaporator temperature associated with this DTC using
B1B7111
sensor - short to sensor circuit - short to ground the manufacturer approved
ground diagnostic system
Evaporator Carry out any pinpoint tests
• Evaporator temperature
temperature associated with this DTC using
B1B7115 sensor circuit - short to power,
sensor - short to open circuit the manufacturer approved
power, open circuit diagnostic system
Stepper motor Refer to electrical circuit

• Stepper motor actuator LIN
actuator LIN Bus diagrams and test stepper
B1B7211 Bus power supply - short to
power supply - ground motor actuator LIN Bus power
short to ground supply for short to ground

Defrost stepper
• Internal or external fault - associated with this DTC using
B1B7400 motor actuator under/over voltage the manufacturer approved
fault
diagnostic system

Defrost stepper
• Internal electronic fault - associated with this DTC using
B1B7449 motor actuator
motor over temperature the manufacturer approved
fault
diagnostic system

Panel/foot stepper
B1B7500 motor actuator under/over voltage the manufacturer approved
fault
diagnostic system

Panel/foot stepper
B1B7549 motor actuator
fault
diagnostic system

Front left air blend
B1B7600 stepper motor under/over voltage the manufacturer approved
actuator fault
diagnostic system

Front left air blend
B1B7649 stepper motor
actuator fault
diagnostic system
Front right air Carry out any pinpoint tests

blend stepper • Internal or external fault - associated with this DTC using
B1B7700
motor actuator under/over voltage the manufacturer approved
fault diagnostic system
Front right air Carry out any pinpoint tests
blend stepper • Internal electronic fault - associated with this DTC using
B1B7749
motor actuator motor over temperature the manufacturer approved
fault diagnostic system

• Signal below allowable range
Air conditioning the manufacturer approved
• System leak
B1B7884 system under diagnostic system. Check
• Incorrect refrigerant charge
pressure weight system for leaks. Charge
system with correct weight of
refrigerant

Air conditioning
B1B7885 system over • Signal above allowable range
pressure
diagnostic system

Medium speed
U001088 CAN • Bus off
communication
diagnostic system
Re-configure the RJB using the

manufacturer approved
diagnostic system. Clear the
Internal control DTC and retest. If the DTC is
• Invalid configuration message
U030000 module software still logged suspect the
is received
incompatibility climate control module, refer
to the new module
installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
Install a new climate control

Failed to initialise module, refer to the new
U1A1449 • Internal electronic failure
CAN module installation note at
the top of the DTC Index

Stored vehicle diagnostic system. Clear DTC
• Incorrect car configuration
U300055 configuration data data received and re-test. If the DTC
does not match remains suspect the climate
control module, refer to the
new module installation note
at the top of the DTC Index

diagnostic system. Check
climate control module for
U300087 Control Module • Missing message DTCs and refer to the DTC
Index. Check CAN network
integrity using the
diagnostic system
• Vehicle/component mis-
Vehicle match. Corrupt VIN data being Install original module, check
U300281 Identification transmitted, module for DTCs and refer to relevant
Number (VIN) previously installed to other DTC Index
vehicle
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor

(82.20.02)
Removal
1

3 . Remove the ambient air temperature sensor.
Carefully release the clip.
Installation
1 . Install the ambient air temperature sensor.
Secure the clip.
2 . Install the radiator splash shield.

Removal

3 . NOTE:
Note the relationship between the servo motor drive and the vent flap.
Remove the servo motor assembly.
Installation
1 . Install the servo motor assembly.
Align the servo motor drive.
Install the screws.


Defrost Vent/Register Blend Door Actuator
RH
Removal

3 . NOTE:
Installation
Install the screws.



Footwell Vent/Duct Blend Door Actuator
LH
Removal

3 . Remove the LH side footwell heater duct.
Release the lampholder.
4 . Remove the support bracket.
Remove the screw.

5 . NOTE:
Installation
Install the screws.

2 . Install the support bracket.
Install the screw.
3 . Install the LH side footwell heater duct.
Install the screws.


In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor (82.20.03)
Removal
1 . Remove the instrument panel, lower trim panel.
For additional information, refer to Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel (76.46.11)
2 . Remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor.
Remove the Torx screw.
Installation
1 . Install the in-vehicle temperature sensor.
Position the electrical harness.
Connect and secure the electrical connector.
Install the Torx screw.
2 . Install the instrument panel, lower trim panel.

For additional information, refer to Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel (76.46.11)
Recirculation Blend Door Actuator
(82.20.67)
Removal

3 . NOTE:
Installation
Install the screws.



Sunload Sensor (82.20.70)
Removal
1
. CAUTION: Protect the surrounding trim from damage when changing the
component.
Remove the center speaker grille.
2 . Remove the sunload sensor.

Installation
1 . Install the sunload sensor.
Install the screws.
2 . Install the center speaker grille.
Secure the clips.

Climate Control Module
Removal

3 . Remove the A/C control module.
Installation
1 . Install the A/C control module.

4 . Connect WDS to the vehicle and configure a new module.

Climate Control Assembly (82.20.07)
Removal
NOTE:
Removal of this component is part of the audio removal procedure.
2 . Remove the audio unit.

For additional information, refer to Audio Unit (86.50.03)
Installation
1 . Install the audio unit.
For additional information, refer to Audio Unit (86.50.03)

413 : Instrumentation and Warning Systems
413-00 : Instrumentation Cluster and Panel

Illumination
Instrument Cluster and Panel Illumination

COMPONENT LOCATION

1 Accessory power socket
2 Overhead console
4 Illumination switch
5 Right-Hand (RH) steering column multifunction switch
6 Left-Hand (LH) steering column multifunction switch
7 Start/stop switch
8 Gear shift module
9 Automatic speed limiter switch
10 Central Junction Box (CJB)
INTRODUCTION
Instrument cluster and panel illumination is achieved through a series of Light Emitting Diodes (LED's)
located throughout the interior of the vehicle. The intensity of illumination can be controlled by the
driver through a rotary control located on the lower drivers side of the instrument panel. The rotary
control is integral with the auxiliary lighting switch.
The rotary control is a variable resistor which is used as a potential divider to provide a high or low
voltage according to its set position. The voltage returned to the instrument cluster is converted into
a dimmer control positional message and transmitted to the CJB over the medium speed Controller
Area Network (CAN) bus. The CJB converts the illumination intensity message into a Pulse Width
Modulation (PWM) signal which it supplies to the instrument panel and switch illumination LED.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE:
A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN bus

1 Megafuse (175A)
2 CJB
3 Gear shift module
4 Automatic speed limiter switch

5 Start/stop switch
6 Accessory power socket
7 Steering column multifunction switches
8 Overhead console
10 Illumination switch

For a detailed description of the Instrument Cluster and Panel Illumination, refer to the relevant
Description and Operation section in the workshop manual.

2 . Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
• Bulbs(s)
• Fuse(s)
• Wiring harness
• Fluid level(s) • Engine compartment components
• Accessory installations • Underbody components
• Instrument cluster
• Dimmer switch
• Headlamp switch
• Autolamp sensor
diagnostic system.
413-01 Instrumenation Cluster
Specifications
Specifications
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in

Instrument cluster surround - screw 1 - 9
Instrument cluster - screw 1.5 - 13
Instrument Cluster
COMPONENT LOCATION
1 Speedometer
2 Message center
3 Tachometer
INTRODUCTION
The instrument cluster is located in the instrument panel, above the steering column. The instrument
cluster comprises analogue gauges, an Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) message center to provide vehicle
operation details to the driver and a number of indicator lamps to display system status.
The message center is a LCD located in a central position in the cluster. The message center displays
system status information including fuel quantity remaining.
The instrument cluster also functions as an intelligent controller for a number of other vehicle
systems, for example column adjust positions, steering column multifunction switch inputs, steering
Servotronic control.
The instrument cluster is the gateway for the high speed and medium speed Controller Area Network
(CAN) and is also connected to the Local Interconnect Network (LIN) bus to the start control unit and
the steering wheel module.
ANALOGUE GAGES
Speedometer
The speedometer is located on the Left Hand (LH) side of the cluster and is available in three market
variants:
• major scale Miles Per Hour (MPH), minor scale kilometers per hour (km/h)
• major scale km/h, minor scale MPH
• major scale km/h only.
The speedometer is driven by high speed CAN signals transmitted by the Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) module. The wheel speeds are measured by sensors reading the rotational speed of the rear
wheels from toothed targets on the hubs. An average of the two wheel speeds are passed from the
sensors to the ABS module in the form of pulsed signals. The ABS module converts these signals into
a speed output on the high speed CAN to the instrument cluster.
The same speed outputs from the wheel speed sensors are also used to calculate the distance the
vehicle has travelled.
Tachometer
The tachometer is located on the Right Hand (RH) side of the instrument cluster and displays engine
speeds up to 8000 Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) on naturally aspirated models and 7000 RPM on
supercharged models.
The tachometer is driven by an engine speed signal transmitted on the high speed CAN from the
Engine Control Module (ECM). The signal is derived from the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor. The
signal is received by the instrument cluster microprocessor and the output from the microprocessor
drives the tachometer.
LCD DISPLAY
In the area above and below the message center is a LCD display. The area below the message center
displays a linear fuel gage, odometer, trip distance and trip computer readouts. The area above the
message center displays the transmission gear position information and speed control related
information.
NOTE:
There is no engine coolant temperature gage displayed. If the engine coolant temperature
increases to above a predetermined threshold, a warning message is displayed in the message
center. The message is sent from the ECM in a high speed CAN message to the instrument
cluster.
Fuel Gage
The linear fuel gage has a colored bar which moves left or right depending on the tank contents. As
the bar moves to the left the fuel tank contents displayed is decreasing. A warning message is
displayed in the message center when the fuel tank contents fall to below the reserve level.
The fuel gage is controlled by CAN messages from the Auxiliary Junction Box (AJB). The AJB reads the
values output by the fuel level sensors every 131 ms and transmits a fuel tank contents value,
corrected for battery voltage, in a CAN message to the instrument cluster.
A fuel pump symbol is displayed to the left of the linear gage. An arrow above the symbol shows the
driver on which side of the vehicle the fuel filler cap is located.
Above the linear fuel gage, is a LCD area which displays odometer and trip readouts. When a trip
computer function is selected, these are replaced by a trip computer display for the trip function
selected.
Transmission Gear Position Display

The gear position display shows selector lever position or selected gear when using the 'Jaguar
Sequential Shift'.
The gear selector module transmits a CAN message to the instrument cluster for gear selector lever
position. The module also outputs a 'not in park' signal to the instrument cluster.
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) transmits a high speed CAN message to the instrument
cluster with data containing the selected gear when in Jaguar Sequential Shift mode.
Message Center
The message center displays system status and warning messages to the driver. For additional
information, refer to Information and Message Center (413-08 Information and Message Center)
WARNING INDICATORS
1 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) indicator (USA only)
2 ABS indicator - (Canada/Mexico)
3 ABS indicator - (Rest of World (ROW))
4 Adaptive speed control indicator
5 Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) indicator
6 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
7 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator
8 Airbag indicator
9 Front fog lamp indicator
10 RH turn signal indicator
11 Rear fog lamp indicator
12 Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) indicator
13 High beam indicator
14 Side lamp indicator
15 Seat belt indicator

16 Message center
17 Automatic speed limiter
18 Forward alert indicator
19 Brake indicator (USA only)
20 Brake indicator (ROW)
21 LH turn signal indicator
The warning indicators are located in various positions in the instrument cluster. The indicators can
be split into two groups; instrument cluster controlled and externally controlled.
Instrument cluster controlled warning indicators are dependant on software logic within the
instrument cluster for activation. The cluster software controls the indicator illumination check at
ignition on.
Externally controlled indicators are supplied with current from another vehicle system control
module or illuminated by the instrument cluster software on receipt of a bus message from another
vehicle sub-system. The indicator illumination check at ignition on is also controlled by the sub-
system module on these indicators.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE:
A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus; N = Medium speed CAN bus; O = LIN bus
1 Battery
2 Megafuse (175 A)
4 Ignition relay
5 Power distribution box
6 High speed CAN bus to other vehicle systems
7 Medium speed CAN bus to other vehicle systems
8 LIN bus to start control module and steering wheel module
9 Gear selector module
10 Column adjustment switch
11 Column reach and rake adjustment motors
12 Column position potentiometer
13 Oil pressure sensor
14 Steering gear Servotronic valve
15 Steering column RH multifunction switch
16 Steering column LH multifunction switch
17 Auxiliary lighting switch
19 Light sensor (with integral alarm Light Emitting Diode (LED))

Warning Indicator Functionality
1 LH turn signal
2 RH turn signal
3 Brake warning
4 Forward alert
5 Automatic speed limiter
6 Adaptive speed control
7 ABS warning
8 AFS warning
9 MIL
10 TPMS warning
11 Airbag warning
12 Front fog lamps
13 DSC warning
14 Seat belt warning

15 Side lamp warning
16 High beam
17 Rear fog lamps
The functionality for each of the above warning indicators is described in the following section.
1 and 2. Turn Signal Indicators

The turn signal indicators are controlled by the Central Junction Box (CJB) on receipt of medium
speed CAN signals from the instrument cluster.
The instrument cluster outputs a voltage to the turn signal indicator switch. The switch contains
resistors of different values. When the switch is operated in either the LH or RH direction, the voltage
is passed to a ground connection in the instrument cluster which detects the reduced voltage
supplied via the resistors. When the turn signal indicator switch is operated in the LH or RH direction,
the instrument cluster detects the ground voltage and determines whether a LH or RH selection is
made.
The instrument cluster transmits a medium speed CAN message to the CJB for operation of the
applicable turn signal indicators. The message can contain a number of states for each possible
switch position and also an out of range low and high state for circuit faults and an initial value for
the switch neutral position. The turn signal indicators are not subject to the 3 second indicator check
when the ignition is switched on.
The AJB software controls the flash rate of the warning indicator which sends 'ON' and 'OFF' signals
to the instrument cluster which flashes the indicators in a green color. During normal operation, the
warning indicator flashes slowly, accompanied simultaneously by a sound from the instrument
cluster sounder. If a fault exists, the CJB transmits a message to the instrument cluster which
responds by flashing the warning indicator and operating the sounder at double speed to indicate a
bulb failure and also displays an appropriate message and vehicle graphic in the message center.
The hazard warning indicators are controlled by the CJB on receipt of a completed ground path from
the hazard warning indicator switch. The CJB outputs a medium speed CAN message to the
instrument cluster which operates both the LH and RH turn signal indicators simultaneously. The
hazard warning indicators can operate with the ignition switched off, therefore the CAN message
from the CJB will also carry a 'wake-up' message for the instrument cluster.
3. Brake Warning Indicator

This warning indicator is displayed in a red or amber color (dependant on market) as a brake symbol
in all markets except USA which have the word 'BRAKE' in addition to the symbol. The indicator is
controlled by high speed CAN messages from the ABS module and the parking brake control module.
The indicator is illuminated in a red color for a 3 second indicator check when the ignition is switched
on.
The ABS module monitors the fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir using a level switch. If the fluid
level falls to below a determined level, the switch contact is broken and the ABS module detects the
low fluid level condition. The ABS module issues a CAN message which is received by the instrument
cluster which illuminates the warning indicator and displays the message 'BRAKE FLUID LOW' in the
message center. The warning indicator can also be illuminated by the ABS module if an Electronic
Brake Distribution (EBD) fault is detected.
NOTE:
If both the brake warning indicator and the ABS warning indicator illuminate simultaneously, a
major fault in the brake system will have occurred.
The warning indicator also displays parking brake status. When the parking brake is applied, the
warning indicator will be illuminated by the instrument cluster and, if the vehicle is moving, the
message 'PARK BRAKE APPLIED' will be also displayed in the message center in response to a CAN
message from the parking brake control module.
If a condition exists where the parking brake cannot be applied, the parking brake control module
issues a CAN message to the instrument cluster which illuminates or flashes (dependant on market)
the warning lamp on and off and is accompanied with a message 'CANNOT APPLY PARK BRAKE'. If a
fault occurs in the parking brake system, the parking brake control module issues a CAN message to
the instrument cluster which illuminates the warning indicator and displays the message 'PARK
BRAKE FAULT' in the message center.
4. Forward Alert Indicator

The forward alert system uses the components of the adaptive speed control system to alert the
driver of the presence of a vehicle ahead. The system can be turned on and off using a switch located
in the auxiliary lighting switch when the adaptive speed control system is off. The indicator is
illuminated in an amber color for a 3 second indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
The forward alert system is controlled by the adaptive speed control module. When the switch is
pressed, the forward alert system is activated and the adaptive speed control module issues a
forward alert active message on the high speed CAN bus to the instrument cluster. The forward alert
icon in the instrument cluster will illuminate in an amber color and a 'FORWARD ALERT' message will
be displayed in the message center. When the button is pressed a second time, the module issues a
forward alert off CAN message. The forward alert system will be deactivated, the forward alert icon
will go off and a message 'FORWARD ALERT OFF' will be displayed in the message center.
5. Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL) Indicator

The ASL is controlled by the ECM. An ASL switch is located in the floor console, adjacent to the gear
selector lever. When the ASL switch is pressed, this is sensed by the ECM which issues a high speed
CAN message to the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster illuminates the ASL warning indicator
in an amber color to show the driver that ASL is active. The driver sets the required speed using the
speed control SET +/- switches on the steering wheel. The selected speed is shown by the message '
LIMITER SET XXX MPH / K/MH' in the message center. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color
for a 3 second indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
ASL can be deselected by pressing the ASL switch, by depressing the throttle pedal initiating kick-
down or by pressing the 'cancel' switch on the steering wheel. The ASL indicator will go off and the
message center will display the message 'limiter cancelled' for 4 seconds.
If a fault occurs in the ASL system, the ECM will send a message to the instrument cluster to
illuminate the ASL indicator and display the message 'LIMITER NOT AVAILABLE'.
6. Adaptive Speed Control Indicator

The adaptive speed control system is controlled by the adaptive speed control module. Operation of
the SET +/- switches on the steering wheel will activate the system. Operation of the switches is
detected by the adaptive speed control module. The module issues a high speed CAN message to the
instrument cluster which illuminates the adaptive speed control indicator, when the system is in
'follow mode', in an amber color and displays a 'SETSPEED XXX MPH / KM/H' message in the message
center. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for a 3 second indicator check when the
ignition is switched on.
7. Anti-lock Braking system (ABS) Warning Indicator

The ABS warning indicator is controlled by the ABS module. If a fault in the ABS system is detected by
the ABS module, the module issues a high speed CAN message to the instrument cluster to illuminate
the ABS warning indicator in an amber color and display the message 'ABS FAULT' in the instrument
cluster. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for a 3 second indicator check when the
ignition is switched on. If a fault is present when the ignition is on the bulb will remain illuminated
after the 3 second indicator check period.
NOTE:
The 'ABS FAULT' message is not displayed in NAS markets.
NOTE:
If both the ABS warning indicator and the brake warning indicator illuminate simultaneously, a
major fault in the brake system will have occurred.
On all vehicles except NAS, the ABS warning indicator is also used for parking brake faults. The
indicator in these markets illuminates in an amber color and displays a brake symbol without the text
'ABS' in the icon.
On NAS vehicles, the ABS warning indicator is only used for ABS. The warning indicator has 'ABS' on
the icon and will illuminate in a amber color for ABS faults only.
8. Adaptive Front light System (AFS) Warning Indicator
The AFS warning indicator is controlled by the AFS control module. The AFS warning indicator
illuminates in an amber color if a fault in the AFS system is detected by the control module. If a fault
in another system occurs which prevents AFS operation, the warning indicator will flash. The
indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster on receipt of a high speed CAN message from the
AFS control module. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for a 3 second indicator check
when the ignition is switched on.
9. Engine Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)

The MIL warning indicator is controlled by the ECM and illuminated by the instrument cluster on
receipt of a message on the high speed CAN bus from the Engine Control Module (ECM). The
indicator is illuminated in an amber color for a 3 second indicator check when the ignition is switched
on.
If the MIL remains illuminated after the engine is started or illuminates when driving, a fault is
present and must be investigated at the earliest opportunity. Illumination of the MIL warning
indicator alerts the driver to an On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) fault which will cause excessive emissions
output. This may relate to either an engine management system fault or a transmission fault.
10. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Indicator

The TPMS warning indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster on receipt of a medium speed
CAN message from the TPMS module. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for a 3 second
indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
If the indicator illuminates and is accompanied by the message 'TYRE PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT' in
the message center, then a TPMS fault has occurred. If the indicator illuminates and accompanied by
a different message, then a low tire pressure has been detected, a spare wheel has been fitted or a
TPMS sensor has failed.
11. Airbag Warning Indicator

The airbag warning indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster. The indicator is illuminated in an
amber color for the 3 second indicator check when the ignition is switched on. The indicator remains
illuminated after the 3 second period has expired until the instrument cluster receives a turn off
message on the high speed CAN bus from the Restraints Control Module (RCM).
12. Front Fog Lamp Indicator

The green colored front fog lamp indicator is controlled by the CJB and illuminated by the instrument
cluster on receipt of a front fog lamp on message on the medium speed CAN bus from the CJB. The
indicator is illuminated for as long as the front fog lamps are active. The front fog lamp indicator is
not subject to the 3 second indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
13. Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) Indicator

The DSC warning lamp is controlled by the ABS module and illuminated by the instrument cluster in
response to messages received on the high speed CAN bus. The indicator is illuminated in an amber
color for the 3 second indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
The DSC warning indicator, are permanently illuminated in an amber color if the instrument cluster
receives a high speed CAN message from the ABS module relating to one of the following faults:
• Traction control fault

• Yaw control fault
• Engine drag torque control fault
• Panic Brake Assist (PBA) fault
• Signal missing relating to either traction control active, yaw control active or DSC switch
input.
The above faults will also generate an applicable DSC and ABS warning message in the message
center.
The DSC warning indicator will flash at 2 Hz for if the traction control or yaw control is active when
the DSC system is enabled.
If the DSC system is switched off, the warning indicator will be permanently illuminated until the DSC
system is subsequently re-activated.
14. Safety Belt Warning Indicator

The safety belt warning indicator operates for both the driver and passenger safety belts. The
warning indicator is controlled by the RCM and illuminated by the instrument cluster on receipt of
high speed CAN bus messages. The safety belt warning indicator is not subject to the 3 second
indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
The operation of the passenger seat buckle switch is as described below with the exception that the
instrument cluster must receive a hardwired signal from the belt minder control module to indicate
that a passenger is occupying the seat.
The safety belt warning indicator is subject to a timer. The warning indicator is activated when the
following conditions exist:
• Ignition is switched on
• One of the front seat belts is unbuckled
• USA market only - 75 seconds has elapsed after ignition on mode is selected
• Vehicle is not in reverse gear
• Vehicle speed is more than 8 km/h (5 mph).
Once the above parameters are met, the instrument cluster flashes the warning indicator at 2 Hz for
10 seconds accompanied by a simultaneous chime. After 10 seconds the chime ceases and the
warning indicator is permanently illuminated for 20 seconds. This sequence is repeated every 30
seconds until one of the following events occurs:
• 300 seconds has elapsed

• The safety belt of the occupied front seats is fastened
• The ignition is switched to off mode
• The vehicle speed decreases to below 5 km/h (3 mph).
NOTE:
On USA market vehicles, the warning indicator is not permanently illuminated.
In certain markets the belt minder function can be enabled and disabled using the driver safety belt
switch. For additional information, refer to Safety Belt System (501-20A Safety Belt System)
15. Side Lamp Indicator

The instrument cluster controls the green colored side lamp indicator on receipt of a side lamp status
message on the medium speed CAN bus from the CJB and the AJB. The lighting switch on the Left
Hand (LH) steering column multifunction switch is connected to the instrument cluster. Selections
using this switch are detected by the cluster which requests the side or headlamp operation via a
CAN message to the CJB and the AJB. The CJB and the AJB responds with a side lamp active message
and the cluster illuminates the side lamp indicator. The side lamp indicator is not subject to the 3
second indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
16. High Beam Indicator

The instrument cluster controls the blue colored high beam indicator on receipt of a high beam
status message on the medium speed CAN bus from the CJB. The lighting switch on the Left Hand
(LH) steering column multifunction switch is connected to the instrument cluster. High beam or flash
selections using this switch are detected by the cluster which requests the light operation via a CAN
message to the CJB. The CJB responds with a high beam active message and the cluster illuminates
the high beam indicator. The high beam indicator is not subject to the 3 second indicator check when
the ignition is switched on.
17. Rear Fog Lamp Indicator

The amber colored rear fog lamp indicator is controlled by the AJB and illuminated by the instrument
cluster on receipt of a rear fog lamp on message on the medium speed CAN bus from the AJB. The
indicator is illuminated for as long as the rear fog lamps are active. The rear fog lamp indicator is not
subject to the 3 second indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
Instrument Cluster
For a detailed description of the instrument cluster, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section in the workshop manual.
Instrument Cluster

• Fuse(s)
• Wiring harness
• Fluid level(s) • Instrument cluster
• Accessory installations • Central Junction Box (CJB)
• Engine Junction Box (EJB)
• Driver Door Module (DDM)
• Engine Control Module (ECM)
4 . If the cause is not visually evident, check for DTCs and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
NOTE:
If the control module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer
warranty, refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if
any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation of a new
module/component.
NOTE:
system).
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
terminals.

Wiper mode associated with this DTC using
B100811 • Circuit short to ground
switch the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

Wiper mode • Circuit short to battery or associated with this DTC using
B100815
switch open the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
Check ignition, power and

• Faulty instrument cluster ground supplies to CJB and
Ignition • Target SID re-synchronisation instrument cluster. Re-
B100951
authorisation error following programming
synchronize ID by re-configuring
• CAN fault
the instrument cluster as a new
module. Check CAN
communications between
instrument cluster and tester
Check CAN communications

• Low speed CAN fault between CJB and instrument
• CJB fault cluster. Check ignition, power
Ignition • Instrument cluster fault and ground supplies to CJB and
• Incorrect module installed
authorisation instrument cluster. Confirm
B100962 (CJB/Instrument cluster)
signal compare • Target SID synchronisation correct module is installed. Re-
failure error following re- synchronise ID by re-configuring
programming the instrument cluster as a new
• Noise/EMC related error module. Check CAN network for
interference/EMC related issues
Check power and ground

supplies to CJB and instrument
• CJB fault cluster. Check CAN network
Ignition • Low speed CAN fault between CJB and instrument
B100987 • Instrument cluster fault
authorisation cluster. Check battery is fully
• Low battery voltage <9V charged and in serviceable
condition, refer to the battery
care manual

Front fog lamp associated with this DTC using
control switch the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

Front fog lamp • Circuit short to battery or associated with this DTC using
B104615
control switch open the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

• Low speed CAN fault between RJB and instrument
• RJB fault cluster. Check power and
Fuel pump • Instrument cluster fault ground supplies to RJB and
B100A62 (RJB/Instrument cluster)
signal compare • Write target SID correct module installed. Re-
failure synchronisation error synchronise ID by re-configuring
following re-programming the RJB as a new module. Check
• Noise/EMC related error CAN network for
Re-synchronise ID by re-
• Write target SID configuring the RJB as a new
synchronisation error module. Check ignition, power
Fuel Pump
B100A64 following re-programming and ground supplies to RJB and
authorisation • RJB fault instrument cluster. Check CAN
• Low speed CAN fault network between RJB and
instrument cluster

supplies to RJB and instrument
• RJB fault cluster. Check CAN network
Fuel pump • Low speed CAN fault between RJB and instrument
B100A87
authorisation • Instrument cluster fault cluster. Check battery is fully
• Low battery voltage < 9 volts charged and in serviceable
care manual
• Instrument cluster fault

• Low speed CAN fault
• RJB fault Check power and ground
• Vehicle speed present when supplies to RJB and instrument
attempting to power steering
Column lock cluster. Check CAN network
column lock
B100B67 ground between RJB and instrument
• Engine speed present when
authorisation attempting to power steering cluster. Check ABS, ECM and CJB
column lock for DTCs and refer to the
• Power mode status > four relevant DTC Index
when attempting to perform
lock action

Column lock • Instrument cluster fault supplies to RJB and instrument
B100B87 ground • Low speed CAN fault cluster. Check CAN network
authorisation • RJB fault between RJB and instrument
cluster

• Low speed CAN fault Check power and ground
• CJB fault supplies to CJB and instrument
• Vehicle speed present when
Column lock cluster. Check CAN network
attempting to power steering
B100C67 supply between CJB and instrument
column lock
authorisation • Engine speed present when cluster. Check ABS, ECM and CJB
attempting to power steering for DTCs and refer to the
column lock relevant DTC Index
• Power mode status > four
when attempting to perform
lock action

Column lock • Instrument cluster fault supplies to CJB and instrument
B100C87 supply • Low speed CAN fault cluster. Check CAN network
authorisation • CJB fault between CJB and instrument
cluster
Check CAN network between

• CAN fault steering column lock and
• Steering column lock fault instrument cluster. Check power
• Instrument cluster fault and ground supplies to steering
Column lock • Incorrect module installed
column lock and instrument
authorisation - (Steering column
B100D62 cluster. Confirm the correct
signal compare lock/Instrument cluster)
• Target ID synchronisation modules are installed. Re-
failure
error following re- synchronize ID by re-configuring
programming the steering column lock as
• Noise/EMC related error new. Check CAN network for
Check CAN network to steering

Column lock
• CAN fault column lock. Check power and
authorisation -
B100D64 • Steering column lock fault ground supplies to steering
signal plausibility • Instrument cluster fault column lock and instrument
failure
cluster

Column lock • Steering column lock fault
instrument cluster. Check power
B100D87 authorisation - • Instrument cluster fault
• Low voltage at steering and ground supplies to steering
missing message
column lock < 8V column lock and instrument
cluster

• Steering column lock fault instrument cluster. Check power
Column lock and ground supplies to steering
B100D96 • Low temperature < -30 °
authorisation • Low voltage at steering column lock and instrument
column lock < 8 volts cluster. Check there is no torque
• Restricted bolt movement applied to the steering
column/wheel
Wiper/washer Carry out any pinpoint tests

B10A011 • Circuit short to ground
switch associated with this DTC using
diagnostic system

Wiper/washer • Circuit short to battery or associated with this DTC using
B10A015
switch open the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

B10A611 Main light switch • Circuit short to ground
diagnostic system

• Circuit short to battery or associated with this DTC using
B10A615 Main light switch
open the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
Transfer fuel For fuel system tests.

B115C7A • Fluid leak or seal failure
pump Fuel Tank and Lines

Ambient light associated with this DTC using
B1A8511 • Circuit short to ground
sensor the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

Ambient light • Circuit short to battery or associated with this DTC using
B1A8515
sensor open the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
• Operator only cycles one key

during programming Ensure all keys to be
Key transponder - • Instrument cluster, start programmed are available.
control unit or key loses
number of keys Check power and ground
power or circuit failure during
B1B0100 stored below programming
supplies to all relevant modules.
minimum number • Faulty key Replace faulty key. Check CAN
required • Unable to programme key network for noise/EMC related
due to noise/EMC related issues
issues
Key transponder - • Error following start control Re-synchronize ID by re-

unit replacement configuring the start control
start control unit
B1B0105 • Start control unit fault
already unit as new module. Check
• LIN fault
programmed • Instrument cluster fault power and ground supplies to
start control unit and
instrument cluster. Check LIN
circuit between start control
unit and instrument cluster
Check LIN circuit between start

• LIN fault control unit and instrument
Key transponder - • Instrument cluster fault
cluster. Check power and
start control unit • Faulty key
B1B0151 ground supplies to start control
programming • Start control unit fault
• Attempted to programme a unit and instrument cluster.
error
non-default key Ensure new keys are from a
known good source
• Un-programmed key inserted

Key transponder -
in start control unit Confirm correct keys are being
B1B0155 transponder not
• Non-default key inserted used
programmed during key programming

• Start control unit fault diagnostic system. Check power
Key transponder - • Incorrect module installed and ground supplies to start
start control unit (instrument cluster/start control unit and instrument
B1B0162
challenge control unit) cluster. Check correct modules
response error • Error during or following the are installed. Re-synchronize ID
write target SID routine
by re-configuring the start
• Noise/EMC related issues
control unit as a new module.
Check CAN network for

• LIN fault diagnostic system. Check LIN
Key transponder - • Instrument cluster fault
circuit between start control
transponder • Key fault
B1B0164 unit and instrument cluster.
challenge • Start control unit fault
• Error occurred during key Check power and ground
response error
programming supplies to start control unit
and instrument cluster. Confirm
correct key operation. Re-run
key programming
• LIN fault Carry out any pinpoint tests

B1B0167 Key transponder - • Instrument cluster fault
start control unit • Key fault
• Start control unit fault
invalid response • Another key in close proximity diagnostic system. Check LIN
• Attempted to programme a circuit between start control
non default key unit and instrument cluster.
• IPK Cold initialisation whilst in
Ignition On state, without key
being present in the SCU ground supplies to start control
• Race condition caused by unit and instrument cluster.
closing driver door and Confirm correct key operation.
pressing start button within a Confirm single key operation.
small time window Ensure new keys are from a
• Passive Key search function known good source. Check for
from last door closed and key
intermittent power and ground
inserted in the SCU
at instrument cluster. Design
condition - advise customer of
correct starting sequence.
Design condition - determine
customer transponder key
usage

• LIN fault diagnostic system. Check LIN
Key transponder -
B1B0187 • Instrument cluster fault circuit between start control
timer expired • Start control unit fault unit and instrument cluster.
supplies to start control unit
and instrument cluster

• CAN fault ECM and instrument cluster.
Target I.D.
• ECM fault Check ignition, power and
transfer - system
B1B3305 • Instrument cluster fault grounds to ECM and instrument
programming • ECM or instrument cluster cluster. Re-synchronise ID by re-
failures incorrectly configured configuring the instrument
cluster as a new module

• CAN fault
ECM and instrument cluster.
• ECM fault
• Instrument cluster fault Check ignition, power and
Target I.D. grounds to ECM and instrument
B1B3362 transfer - signal (ECM/instrument cluster) cluster. Check correct ECM and
compare failure • Synchronisation error instrument cluster installed. Re-
following re-programming synchronise ID by re-configuring
• Noise/EMC related error the instrument cluster as a new
module. Check CAN network for
• CAN fault Check CAN network between

• ECM fault ECM and instrument cluster.
• Instrument cluster fault Check ignition, power and
Target I.D. • Steering column lock status
grounds to ECM and instrument
B1B3364 transfer - signal incomplete
• Race condition caused by cluster. Check steering column
plausibility failure
closing driver door and lock operation. Design condition
pressing start button within a - advise customer of correct
small time window start sequence

ECM and instrument cluster.
• CAN fault Check ignition, power and
Target I.D.
• ECM fault grounds to ECM and instrument
B1B3387 transfer - missing • Instrument cluster fault cluster. Check battery is in fully
message • Low battery voltage charged and serviceable
care manual

Steering column • Commanded position not associated with this DTC using
B1C3277
tilt solenoid reachable the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

Steering column associated with this DTC using
B1C3294 • Unexpected operation
tilt solenoid the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

Steering column
B1C3312 tilt feedback • Circuit shorted to battery
signal
diagnostic system

Steering column
• Circuit short to ground or associated with this DTC using
B1C3314 tilt feedback
open the manufacturer approved
signal
diagnostic system

Steering column
• Commanded position not associated with this DTC using
B1C3477 telescope reachable the manufacturer approved
solenoid
diagnostic system
Steering column
B1C3494 telescope • Unexpected operation
solenoid
diagnostic system

Steering column
B1C3512 telescope • Circuit shorted to battery
feedback signal
diagnostic system

Steering column
• Circuit short to ground or associated with this DTC using
B1C3514 telescope open the manufacturer approved
feedback signal
diagnostic system

Steering column
B1C3611 tilt/telescope • Circuit short to ground
switch
diagnostic system

Flash to pass associated with this DTC using
B1C4811 • Circuit short to ground
diagnostic system

Flash to pass associated with this DTC using
B1C4815 • Circuit short to power or open
diagnostic system

Front wiper associated with this DTC using
intermittent data the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

Front wiper associated with this DTC using
B1C5315 • Circuit short to power or open
intermittent data the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

Turn indicator associated with this DTC using
B1D3611 • Circuit short to ground
diagnostic system
Turn indicator associated with this DTC using
B1D3615 • Circuit short to power or open
diagnostic system

Wiper switch associated with this DTC using
connection circuit the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

Wiper switch associated with this DTC using
B1D3715 • Circuit short to power or open
connection circuit the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
Using the manufacturer

Power steering approved diagnostic system, re-
C111064 • Signal plausibility failure
calibration data configure the instrument cluster
as new

Power steering associated with this DTC using
P063511 • Circuit short to ground
control circuit the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

P063512 • Circuit short to power
diagnostic system

P063513 • Circuit open
diagnostic system

Power steering • First received speed value associated with this DTC using
P063522
control circuit above threshold the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
• Internal Fault - Wrong reply Carry out any pinpoint tests

Power steering from VAPS driver or NVM associated with this DTC using
P063544
control circuit checksum error (after the manufacturer approved
~500ms) diagnostic system
High speed CAN
• Bus off, break in connection associated with this DTC using
U000188 communication
to bus the manufacturer approved
Bus
diagnostic system
Medium speed Carry out any pinpoint tests

CAN • Bus off, break in connection associated with this DTC using
U001088
communication to bus the manufacturer approved
Bus diagnostic system

Lost
U010000 communication • Missing message
with ECM
diagnostic system

Lost
with TCM
diagnostic system

Lost
with 'L' gate
diagnostic system
Lost Carry out any pinpoint tests

communication associated with this DTC using
U010400 • Missing message
with speed the manufacturer approved
control module diagnostic system
Lost
communication Carry out any pinpoint tests
with Anti-lock associated with this DTC using
Brake System the manufacturer approved
(ABS) control diagnostic system
module
Lost
communication Check PSM for DTCs and refer to
U012600 with Passenger • Missing message DTC Index.
Seat Module Seats
(PSM)
U012700 Lost • Missing message Carry out any pinpoint tests

with Tire Pressure the manufacturer approved
Monitor System diagnostic system
(TPMS) module
Lost
communication
U012800 with Parking • Missing message
Brake control
diagnostic system
module
Lost
Check adaptive damping
communication
module for DTCs and refer to
U013900 with adaptive • Missing message
DTC Index.
damping control
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension
module
Lost Check CJB for DTCs and refer to

U014000 communication • Missing message DTC Index.
with CJB Communications Network

Lost
with RJB
diagnostic system
Lost
communication Carry out any pinpoint tests
with associated with this DTC using
Supplemental the manufacturer approved
Restraints System diagnostic system
(SRS) module
Lost
communication
Check information and
with Information
U015600 • Missing message entertainment module for DTCs
and
and refer to DTC Index
Entertainment
Module
Lost
communication Check climate control module
with climate for DTCs and refer to DTC Index
control module
Lost
communication Check DDM for DTCs and refer
with Driver Door to DTC Index
Module (DDM)
Lost
communication
Check PDM for DTCs and refer
U020000 with Passengers • Missing message
to DTC Index
Door Module
(PDM)
Lost
communication
U020600 with Convertible • Missing message
Top control
diagnostic system
module
Lost
communication Check DSM for DTCs and refer
With Driver Seat to DTC Index
Module (DSM)
Lost
communication Check Remote Keyless Entry
U021400 with Remote • Missing message module for DTCs and refer to
Keyless Entry DTC Index
Module
Lost
communication Check lighting control module
with Active Front for DTCs and refer to DTC Index
Lighting system
Lost
communication Check Pedestrian Protection
U025000 with Pedestrian • Missing message system module for DTCs and
Protection system refer to DTC Index
module
Lost
communication Check Integrated Control Panel
with Integrated for DTCs and refer to DTC Index
Control Panel
diagnostic system. Clear DTCs
Internal control • RJB car configuration data is
and re-test. If DTC still logged,
U030000 module software not compatible with the
instrument cluster suspect the instrument cluster.
incompatibility
Refer to the new module
the DTC Index

Auxiliary switch associated with this DTC using
U200411 • Circuit short to ground
pack the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

Auxiliary switch associated with this DTC using
U200415 • Circuit short to power or open
pack the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
Install a new instrument cluster.

• Calibration/parameter Refer to the new module
U300046 Control module
memory failure installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
Install a new instrument cluster,

refer to the new module
U300049 Control module • Internal electronic failure
the DTC Index

configuration • Incorrect car configuration and re-test. If the DTC remains
U300055
data does not data received suspect the instrument cluster,
match refer to the new module
the DTC Index

diagnostic system. Check
U300087 Control Module • Missing message
instrument cluster for DTCs and
refer to the DTC Index. Check
CAN network integrity using the
diagnostic system
Vehicle match. Corrupt VIN data Install original module, check for
U300281 Identification being transmitted, module DTCs and refer to relevant DTC
Number (VIN) previously installed to other Index
vehicle

• Circuit voltage below associated with this DTC using
U300316 Battery voltage
threshold the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

• Circuit voltage above associated with this DTC using
diagnostic system

U300362 Battery voltage • Signal compare failure
diagnostic system
Instrument Cluster (88.20.01)

Removal
1 NOTE:
.
Make sure all smart keys are available before a new instrument cluster is installed.
If a new instrument cluster is being installed, all smart keys must be cleared from the passive
anti-theft system (PATS), using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment prior to the
instrument cluster removal.
2 . Remove the instrument panel driver's side reinforcement trim panel.
3
component.
Remove the instrument cluster surround.

4 . Remove the instrument cluster.
Raise the steering column finisher for access to the lower screws.
Installation
1 . Install the instrument cluster.
Connect and secure the electrical connectors.
Install the screws.
2 . Install the instrument cluster surround.
Install the screws.
3 . Install the instrument panel driver's side reinforcement trim panel.
4 NOTE:
.
Make sure all smart keys are available before the new instrument cluster is installed.
Using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment, programme the new instrument cluster and
reprogram all of the smart keys to the vehicle.
413-06 : Horn
Specifications
Specifications
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in

Horn - stud 25 18 -
Horn
COMPONENT LOCATION
1 Horns
2 Horn switch
3 Horn relay and fuse (15A)

INTRODUCTION
The vehicle horns are operated by pressing the center of the steering wheel. Two horns are fitted to
the vehicle; a high tone horn and a low tone horn. Voltage supply to the horns is controlled by the
horn relay, which is energised when the horn switch is pressed.
The horn relay is incorporated within the Battery Junction Box (BJB) and when energised provides a
supply to both horns simultaneously. Circuit protection is provided by fuse 10 (15A), which is located
in the BJB.
The horns are mounted on a bracket, which is secured to the center of the front bumper beam, and
form part of the anti-theft system. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft - Active (419-01A
Anti-Theft - Active)
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE:
A = Hardwired
1 Battery
2 Megafuse (175A)
4 Horn relay
5 Horns
6 Horn switch
7 Clock spring
Horn
2 . Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
Visual Inspection Chart

Electrical
• Fuse(s)
• Wiring Harness
• Horn(s)
• Relay
• Horn switch
• Clockspring
2 . If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Jaguar Approved
Diagnostic System.
Horn (86.30.02)
Removal
1 . Open the hood.
2 . Remove the fan cowl.

3

5 . Remove the radiator air deflector.

Remove the 2 scrivets.
All vehicles
6 . NOTE:
Remove the horn assembly.
Release the clip and position the wiring harness aside for access.
Remove the stud.
Installation
1 . To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Tighten the stud to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
Secure the electrical harness with the clip.

413-08 : Information and Message Center
Information and Message Center

COMPONENT LOCATION
1 Message center
INTRODUCTION
The message center is a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) located in a central position in the instrument
cluster.
The message center displays system information, vehicle status and trip computer information to the
driver. The message center is controlled by the instrument cluster and displays system information
using CAN and hard wired signals received from other vehicle system control modules.
MESSAGE CENTER
The message center LCD display has a viewable area of 240 pixels horizontal and 315 pixels vertical. It
is divided into five information display zones as follows, starting from the top:
• Transmission position
• Set speed
• Warning /message display
• Odometer/Trip computer information
• Fuel level.
The message center is active at all times when the ignition is on and can also be active when the
ignition is off, dependant on the information to be displayed.
The message center LCD is displayed at its full brightness when the ignition is on and the exterior
lights are off. If the exterior lights have been activated by the AUTO windshield wipers feature, the
illumination will remain at full brightness. If the exterior lights are on in any position other than
AUTO, then the LCD will be illuminated at a brightness controlled by the illumination dimmer which is
located in the auxiliary lighting switch.
If more than one message is active, each message is displayed in turn in the order of priority. Once all
messages have been displayed, they are again displayed in turn for 2 seconds each. Warning
messages can be displayed when the ignition is in convenience mode which is the initial ignition state
when a door is opened.
Message Priority
Messages are assigned priorities which are defined by the effect on driving safety and functional
ability of the vehicle. When new messages are displayed they may be accompanied by a chime from
the instrument cluster sounder.
A new message will be displayed immediately, providing the currently displayed message (if there is
one) has been displayed for at least 4 seconds. A warning indicator will be activated simultaneously
with the message being displayed. If more than one fault warning message is being displayed, the
messages will cycle, in priority order, with each message being displayed for 2 seconds.
INFORMATION DISPLAY
Transmission Display
The transmission display is located in the upper section of the LCD. The transmission position
information is sent from the Transmission Control Module (TCM) in a high speed CAN message to the
instrument cluster.
The transmission has three modes of operation:
• Conventional automatic operation (selector in 'D' position)

• Sport automatic operation (selector lever in 'S' position)
• Manual gear operation - Jaguar Sequential Shift
The following table shows the selector lever position and the highlighted indication displayed in the
transmission display.
The following table shows the Jaguar Sequential Shift display. Selections are made using the steering
wheel mounted paddle switches.
Selector Lever Position Transmission Display
(P) Park P
(R) Reverse R
(N) Neutral N
(D) Drive D
(S) Sport DS
Jaguar Sequential Shift Gear Selection Transmission Display
First 1
Second 2
Third 3
Fourth 4
Fifth 5
Sixth 6
The transmission may inhibit a requested up or down shift if the requested gear is outside the normal
engine speed operating range. If this occurs, the transmission display will briefly display the gear
requested by the driver but will then change to display the actual gear selection.
Set Speed Display
The following table shows the possible messages which can be displayed, other visual or audible
warnings and a description of the message.
Message Other Warnings Reason Action
LIMITER SET None Displays new speed setting None

XXX MPH for the ASL
(km/h)
LIMITER None Displayed when ASL is None

STANDBY activated and speed control
is selected
LIMITER None Displayed for 4 seconds None

CANCELLED when driver deselects ASL
OVERLIMIT • Amber ASL warning Displayed when vehicle Reduce vehicle speed to
XXX MPH indicator illuminated speed exceeds the ASL set ASL set limit
(km/h) at +4.8 km/h (+3 speed
mph) above limit
• Amber ASL warning
indicator flashing at
+24 km/h (+15 mph)
above limit
• Amber ASL warning
indicator flashing and
chime emitted at +24
km/h (+15 mph) for a
certain time period
LIMITER NOT None Displayed when ECM has Use the Integrated
AVAILABLE detected a fault Diagnostic System to
diagnose fault
SETSPEED None Displays the new speed None

XXX MPH input for the speed control
(km/h)
DRIVER None Immediate action required • Apply brakes if
INTERVENE by the driver to apply the required.
brakes if required • May also be
displayed if speed
control system
loses CAN
messages when
active.
CRUISE NOT None Speed control cannot be A fault has occurred in

AVAILABLE engaged the speed control system.
Diagnose fault using IDS.
GAP None Displays the current set or If required, adjust

default adaptive speed distance using the
control distance. Displayed steering wheel switches.
along with a vehicle graphic
in the LCD.
RADAR None The adaptive speed control Remove obstruction or

SENSOR radar sensor has become clean the radar sensor.
BLOCKED dirty or obstructed.
FORWARD None Forward alert has been None

ALERT OFF switched off. No warning
will be given for objects in
the vehicles forward
direction.
FORWARD None Forward alert has been None

ALERT switched on or the gap
settings have changed.
CRUISE None Driver has pressed the WARNING: Adaptive

OVERRIDE accelerator pedal, cruise braking will be
overriding the speed control disabled when this
system. Message will go off message is displayed.
when accelerator pedal is
released and speed control
is active.
CRUISE None Driver has cancelled speed Re-activate the speed

CANCELLED control or the brake pedal control system or press
has been pressed. the 'Resume' switch on
the steering wheel.
CRUISE None Displayed when speed None
STANDBY control is activated and ASL
is selected
CRUISE None Displayed when speed None

ENGAGED control is active
TOO FAST TO None Displayed when 'Resume' Reduce vehicle speed to

RESUME switch is pressed but vehicle set speed then press
speed is 30 km/h (18 mph) 'Resume' switch.
above the set speed.
Warning/Message Display
Warning and information messages are displayed in the central area of the LCD. When no messages
are required, an analogue clock is present on the display.
The message display language can be changed by the driver using a selection menu on the Touch
Screen Display (TSD).
The following table shows the possible messages which can be displayed, other visual or audible
warnings and a description of the message.
Message Other Warnings Reason Action
FUEL LEVEL LOW Amber warning Fuel level has reached 1/16 Refuel vehicle at earliest
triangle illuminated in of tank capacity - Fuel opportunity.
LCD. range approximately 48 -64
km/h (30 to 40 miles).
FUEL PUMP Amber warning Fuel system fault detected A fault has occurred in the
SYSTEM FAULT triangle illuminated in by the instrument cluster fuel system. Check fuel pump
LCD. checking the signals from operation.
the auxiliary junction box.
Only detected if the left
hand fuel level sensor
shows nearly full and the
right hand fuel level sensor
shows nearly empty.
WASHER FLUID Amber warning Washer fluid level has Refill washer fluid reservoir.
LOW triangle illuminated in become low and activated
LCD. low level switch.
DOOR OPEN Red warning triangle Door(s) open. Close door(s).
illuminated in LCD.
Vehicle graphic
displayed showing
open door(s).
BOOT OPEN Red warning triangle Liftgate open. Close liftgate.

illuminated in LCD.
Vehicle graphic
displaying open
liftgate.
BONNET OPEN Red warning triangle Hood open. Close hood.

illuminated in LCD.
Vehicle graphic
showing open hood.
COLUMN None Column adjust switch has None

ADJUST been moved to the column
position.
COLUMN None Column is operating in auto None

ADJUST AUTO adjust memory mode.
MEMORY 1 None Memory 1 button pressed None

RECALLED or Smart Key assigned to
memory 1 sensed in vehicle
by Keyless Vehicle Module.


MEMORY 1 None New memory settings None

SETTINGS SAVED assigned to memory 1.

CHECK Red warning triangle A fault is present in the A fault has occurred in the
PEDESTRIAN illuminated in LCD. pedestrian protection pedestrian protection system.
SYSTEM system when no accident Interrogate pedestrian
or deployment has protection system control
occurred. module for faults and
diagnose fault using IDS.
INERTIA SWITCH Amber warning Vehicle may have been Check for fuel system leaks.
TRIPPED triangle illuminated in involved in an impact which Perform the inertia switch
LCD. has caused the Restraints reset procedure. For
Control Module to activate additional information, refer
the inertia switch. to Electronic Engine
Controls (303-14B Electronic
Engine Controls - Vehicles
Without: Supercharger)
VALET MODE None Valet Mode has been Use TSD to exit the valet
selected by the driver to mode.
secure the luggage
compartment and the
glovebox.
VEHICLE ARMED None Displayed when the vehicle None

is locked and is displayed
simultaneously with the
visual and audible locking
confirmation.
SMART KEY NOT None The Smart Key has not Insert Smart Key into the slot
FOUND. PLEASE been detected by the in the start control module.
INSERT IN SLOT Keyless Vehicle Module. This may caused by Smart Key
low battery voltage or local RF
interference.
CHECK SMART None Keyless Vehicle Module has Ensure that the Smart Key in
KEY not detected a Smart Key in range of the vehicle LF
the vehicle. antennae.
REMOVE SMART None Smart Key has been Remove Smart Key from slot.
KEY detected by the start
control module.
PRESS BRAKE None Driver has pressed the Press brake pedal to start
WHEN Start/Stop button for a engine.
STARTING second time without
pressing on the brake
pedal.
GEAR SELECTOR None Transmission selector lever Move transmission selector

NOT IN PARK is not the 'PARK' position lever to the 'PARK' position.
when a request to start or
stop the engine is made.
SMART KEY None The Keyless Vehicle Module Replace Smart Key battery.
BATTERY LOW has detected that the
Smart Key battery is low on
power.
STEERING None The Electric steering Turn off the ignition, move
COLUMN column lock has failed to the steering wheel gently
LOCKED unlock the steering and the from side to side and try again
engine is prevented from to start the engine. If this fails
starting. a fault has occurred which
must be rectified.
LIGHTS ON Chime from the The vehicle side lamps are Turn off side lamps or close
instrument cluster. switched on and the driver's door.
driver's door has been
opened.
TAIL LAMP Amber warning A LH or RH tail lamp bulb Replace defective bulb.
FAILURE triangle illuminated in has failed.
LCD. Vehicle graphic
displaying failed tail
lamp displayed.
BRAKE LAMP Amber warning A LH or RH brake lamp bulb Replace defective bulb.
FAILURE triangle illuminated in has failed.
LCD. Vehicle graphic
displaying failed brake
lamp displayed.
INDICATOR Amber warning A LH or RH, front or rear Replace defective bulb.

LAMP FAILURE triangle illuminated in turn signal indicator bulb
LCD. Vehicle graphic has failed.
displaying failed turn
signal indicator
displayed.
DSC ON DSC warning indicator Displayed for a short time None

flashes for a short when the DSC switch is
time. operated to activate the
DSC system.
DSC OFF DSC warning indicator Displayed for a short time None
illuminated. when the DSC switch is
operated to de-activate the
DSC system.
TRAC DSC DSC warning indicator Displayed for a short time None
illuminated. when TRAC DSC has been
selected by the driver using
the DSC switch.
DSC NOT DSC warning indicator A fault is present in the DSC A fault has occurred in the
AVAILABLE illuminated. system. DSC system. Interrogate ABS
module for faults and
diagnose fault using IDS.
BRAKE FLUID • Brake warning Brake fluid level has Investigate fluid loss and
LOW indicator become low and activated check brake system for leaks.
illuminated. low level switch. Repair system as required and
• Red warning
replenish brake fluid
triangle
illuminated in reservoir.
LCD.
ABS FAULT • ABS warning A fault is present in the ABS A fault has occurred in the
indicator system. Braking system will ABS system. Interrogate ABS
illuminated. operate but ABS will not be module for faults and
• Amber
available. diagnose fault using IDS.
warning
triangle
illuminated in
LCD.
BRAKE ASSIST Amber warning A fault is present in the A fault has occurred in the
FAULT triangle illuminated in braking system preventing brake assist system.
LCD. brake assist operation. Interrogate ABS module for
Braking system will operate faults and diagnose fault using
but brake assist will not be IDS.
available and increased
effort on the brake pedal
may be required.
CATS SYSTEM Amber warning A fault is present in the A fault has occurred in the
FAULT triangle illuminated in Computer Active CATS system. Interrogate the
LCD. Technology Suspension CATS module for faults and
(CATS). Suspension will diagnose using IDS.
default to the 'hard'
setting.
PARK BRAKE None Parking brake has been None

APPLIED applied when the vehicle
moving at a speed 5 km/h
(3 mph) or above.
PARK BRAKE • Brake warning A fault is present in the A fault has occurred in the
FAULT indicator parking brake system. parking brake system.
illuminated. Interrogate the parking brake
• Red warning
module for faults and
triangle
illuminated in diagnose using IDS.
LCD.
APPLY FOOT Amber warning The battery has been Apply foot brake and parking
AND PARK triangle illuminated in disconnected or power brake to reset the parking
BRAKE LCD. supply interrupted to the brake module.
parking brake module.
CANNOT APPLY • Brake warning A fault is present in the A fault has occurred in the
PARK BRAKE indicator parking brake system and parking brake system.
flashing. the parking brake cannot Interrogate the parking brake
• Red warning
be applied. module for faults and
triangle
illuminated in diagnose using IDS.
LCD.
• NOTE: In
certain
markets the
brake warning
indicator does
not flash.
CHECK TYRE • Tire Pressure A tire pressure has Check tires for punctures and
PRESSURE Monitoring decreased to below the re-inflate to correct pressures.
System (TPMS) warning threshold.
warning
indicator
illuminated.
• Vehicle
graphic
displaying tire
location.
CHECK ALL TYRE • Tire Pressure One or more tire pressures • Check tires for
PRESSURES Monitoring have decreased to below punctures and re-
System (TPMS) the warning threshold. inflate to correct
warning pressures.
indicator • Message may be
illuminated. displayed when TPMS
• Amber is learning position of
warning a new sensor.
triangle
illuminated in
LCD.
• Vehicle
graphic
displaying tire
location.
TYRE NOT • Tire Pressure • One or more tire • Check for local RF
MONITORED Monitoring pressure sensors interference.
System (TPMS) have developed a • A wheel has been
warning fault. fitted without a TPMS
indicator • A temporary spare sensor fitted (space
illuminated. wheel or a wheel saver spare wheel).
• Vehicle without a sensor • TPMS sensor has
graphic has been fitted at developed a fault or
displaying tire the displayed the battery voltage is
location. position. low.
• An unapproved • A fault has occurred
accessory may be in the TPMS.
interfering with the Interrogate the TPMS
TPMS. module for faults and
diagnose using IDS.
TYRE PRESSURE • Tire Pressure • Wheels and tires A fault has occurred in the
SYSTEM FAULT Monitoring without sensors TPMS. Interrogate the TPMS
System (TPMS) have been fitted to module for faults and
warning the vehicle.
diagnose using IDS.
indicator • TPMS sensors have
illuminated. become defective.
• Amber • An unapproved
warning accessory may be
triangle interfering with the
illuminated in TPMS.
LCD. • A fault is present in
the TPMS system
and the tire
pressures cannot
be monitored.
ENGINE Amber warning Engine coolant • Stop vehicle and allow

TEMPERATURE triangle illuminated in temperature has exceeded engine to idle for 5
HIGH LCD at temperatures threshold for normal minutes. Switch off
engine and allow to
of between 118.0°C operation.
stand for not less than
(244.4°F) and 119.3°C 10 minutes. Check
(246.8°F). coolant level.
• If message re-
appears, investigate
coolant system for
leakage.
ENGINE Red warning triangle Engine coolant • Stop vehicle and allow
OVERHEATING illuminated in LCD at temperature has exceeded engine to idle for 5
temperatures of threshold for normal minutes. Switch off
engine and allow to
119.4°C (247°F) or engine operation.
stand for not less than
above. 10 minutes. Check
coolant level.
• If message re-
appears, investigate
coolant system for
leakage.
ENGINE OIL Red warning triangle Engine oil pressure has Stop the engine immediately.
PRESSURE LOW illuminated in LCD. fallen below the threshold Check engine oil level. If oil
for normal operation. level correct, do not restart
engine until oil pressure loss
has been identified and
corrected.
RESTRICTED Red or Amber warning A fault has occurred which Investigate cause of engine
PERFORMANCE triangle illuminated in has reduced engine power power loss. Interrogate
LCD depending on output. control modules for faults and
nature of power loss. diagnose using IDS.
ENGINE • MIL • A fault has • Investigate cause of

SYSTEMS FAULT illuminated for occurred in the fault. Interrogate ECM
certain faults. engine and TCM for faults
• Red or Amber management and diagnose using
warning system or, if the IDS.
triangle MIL is illuminated, • Check start/stop
illuminated in an emissions switch for correct
LCD. related fault is operation or short
present which has circuits.
been detected by
the On-Board
Diagnostic systems
in the ECM and
TCM.
• A fault has
occurred with the
start/stop switch.
CHECK FUEL • (NAS Only) Diagnostic Monitoring of Check fuel filler cap to ensure
FILLER CAP • Red warning Tank Leakage (DMTL) is it correctly installed and
triangle system has detected fuel secure.
illuminated in
filler cap has not been
LCD.
correctly installed.
ENGINE Red warning triangle A fault has occurred in the Investigate cause of engine
TEMPERATURE illuminated LCD. engine management temperature failure.
INDICATION system and the engine Interrogate ECM for faults and
FAULT temperature signal is no diagnose using IDS.
longer being received.
GEARBOX FAULT Red warning triangle TCM has detected a fault in Investigate transmission fault.
illuminated in LCD. the transmission. Interrogate TCM and diagnose
Transmission may default fault using IDS.
to 'limp home' mode and
only allow operation of one
forward gear and reverse.
BATTERY NOT Red warning triangle Charge output from Investigate cause of generator
CHARGING illuminated in LCD. generator not detected by failure.
ECM.
OVER 120 km/h • (GULF States Vehicle has exceeded the Reduce vehicle speed.
Only) preset 120 km/h speed
• Amber value.
warning
triangle
illuminated in
LCD.
HOOD NOT Red warning triangle The convertible top is not Ensure convertible top is
LATCHED illuminated in LCD. correctly latched. correctly latched and secured.
HOOD OUT OF Amber warning The convertible top is Open or close the convertible
POSITION triangle illuminated in incorrectly positioned. top again and ensure it is
LCD. correctly positioned.
LUGGAGE Amber warning The luggage separator is Check the positioning of the
COVER OUT OF triangle illuminated in incorrectly positioned. luggage separator and it is
POSITION LCD. correctly engaged.
LISTENING None Telephone voice system is None.

active.
Odometer Display
The odometer displays the total distance which the vehicle has travelled. This is calculated by the
instrument cluster using wheel speed signals from the ABS module.
The odometer can show 6 characters and distances up to 999,999 miles or kilometers. The total
distance travelled is stored in a Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM)
and the Random Access Memory (RAM). This ensures that the total distance is not lost if the battery
is disconnected.
The odometer value is passed to other vehicle system modules on the medium speed and high speed
CAN bus. This is used to record the total vehicle mileage for diagnostic purposes and when storing
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC).
Trip computer Information Display

The instrument cluster contains software which controls the trip computer. The computer allows the
driver to access information for current fuel usage, current journey length, average speed and
estimated vehicle range of fuel remaining.
The information is calculated from CAN messages from other vehicle systems, for example wheel
speed signals from the ABS module and fuel injector operating data from the ECM.
A 'Trip' button is located on the end of the LH multifunction switch and allows the driver to access, in
sequence, the available trip information by repeatedly pressing the button. The trip information is
displayed in the following order:
• Trip distance The trip distance since the last reset is displayed.
• Average speed The average speed since the last reset is displayed.
• Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption since the last reset is displayed.
• Range The range is displayed showing the distance which can be travelled until the fuel gage
reads empty. If the range display shows dashes (-), this indicates a failure with one or both of
the fuel level sensors.
The trip computer has three independent memories; A, B and Auto. Memories A and B can be set
independently. The Auto memory is reset after each ignition cycle and therefore only contains
information relating the current journey.
The trip information can also be accessed from the TSD located in the center console. The TSD allows
the same information available with the trip button on the multifunction switch to be displayed on
the TSD, with the addition of the option to reset the values in the A and B memories.
If the battery is disconnected, all trip data in memories A, B and Auto are erased.
Fuel Level Display

The fuel level display is a linear LCD display to show the usable fuel tank contents. The level display is
active at all times when the ignition is on. Low fuel level is displayed as a LOW FUEL LEVEL message
and an amber warning triangle in the message center.
The fuel level is obtained by fuel level sensors in the fuel tank. These are monitored by the auxiliary
junction box software and their output resistance values, corresponding fuel quantity, are
transmitted to the instrument cluster on the medium speed CAN bus. The instrument cluster uses
the two level sensor signals to calculate the fuel tank contents. This calculation takes into account
fuel movement in the tank to display a steady fuel quantity in the LCD.
The fuel level information is transmitted on the medium speed and high speed CAN bus for use by
other vehicle system modules.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS
The instrument cluster can generate audible warnings to alert the driver to a displayed message and
change of vehicle operating condition. The audible warning is generated by a sounder located within
the instrument cluster.
The audible warnings can be generated for the warnings and are listed in order of priority, with the
first being the highest priority.
• Seatbelt reminder
• EPB (High Pitch)
• ACC Driver Intervene 1
• Airbag fault
• Key in ignition switch
• ASL overspeed
• ACC Driver Intervene 2
• EPB (Low Pitch)
• Vehicle armed (entry delay)
• Gear selector not in park
• Valet mode
• Lights on reminder
• Hood operation
• Passive Entry / Passive Start (PEPS)
• Memory set
• Turn signal indicators
• Seat Belt Minder.
The audible warnings can take the form of a single chime, a number of chimes or a continuous chime.
The audible warnings are initiated by a CAN message request from the requesting sub-system control
module or by the instrument cluster software.
Information and Message Center


• Fuse(s)
• Wiring harness
• Engine compartment components
• Fluid level(s)
• Underbody components
• Accessory installations
• Door switches
• Electronic modules
• Boot/bonnet switch
2 . If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Jaguar approved diagnostic
system.
413-09 : Warning Devices
Warning Devices

• Door ajar switch(es) • Fuse(s)

• Safety belt buckle and pretensioner • Wiring harness
• Headlamp switch • Electrical connector(s)
• Fuel gauge • Switch(es)
• Inertia switch • Sensor(s)
2 . If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Jaguar approved diagnostic
system.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Indicator

Switch (84.10.17)
Removal
1
2 . Remove the RH fender splash shield.

For additional information, refer to Fender Splash Shield (76.10.90)
3 . Drain the washer reservoir fluid.
Position a container to collect the fluid.
4 . Remove the low washer fluid warning indicator switch.
5 . Remove and discard the seal.

Installation
1 . Install a new seal.
2 . Install the low washer fluid warning indicator switch.
3 . Install the fender splash shield.

For additional information, refer to Fender Splash Shield (76.10.90)
4 . Refill the washer reservoir.

413-13 : Parking Aid
Specifications
Specifications
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in

Parking aid module - nut 2 - 18
Parking Aid
COMPONENT LOCATION
1 Audio head unit

2 Gateway module
3 Control switch
4 Control module
5 Front parking aid sensors (4 off)
6 Rear parking aid sensors (4 off)
INTRODUCTION
The parking aid system provides an audible warning to the driver when any obstacles are in the path
of the vehicle during a forward (if front sensors fitted) or reversing manouevre. The purpose of the
system is to assist the driver when parking or manoeuvring in restricted space. It is not designed as a
crash avoidance system or a replacement for visual interpretation by the driver.
All vehicles are fitted with rear parking aid sensors. Higher specification vehicles may be fitted with
both front and rear sensors.
Audible warnings to the driver are given by the entertainment system speakers. A visual
representation is shown on the Touch Screen Display (TSD).
The control module controls operation of the speakers via the audio head unit. A gateway module is
incorporated into the system to convert medium speed Controller Area Network (CAN) bus messages
from the control module into Media Orientated System Transport (MOST) messages for use by the
audio head unit. For additional information, refer to Audio System (415-01 Audio Unit)
If an obstacle is sensed by the rear parking aid sensors, the rear audio system speakers will sound. If
an obstacle is sensed by the front parking aid sensors (if fitted), the front audio system speakers will
sound.
The parking aid system operates using ultrasonic signals which are transmitted by the sensors. The
reflected echo from this output is received by the sensors and used by the control module to
calculate the distance from an object.
The roof console mounted control switch allows the driver to deactivate the parking aid system if
operation is not required.
NOTE:
The control switch is only fitted to vehicles with front parking aid sensors.
CONTROL MODULE
The parking aid control module is located in the passenger footwell, behind a protective panel. The
control module uses a single microprocessor to perform the following tasks:
• Control of the ultrasonic sensors

• Monitoring of the sensors
• Evaluation of received echo signals from the sensors
• Noise and disturbance suppression
• Control of the audio system speakers
• Control and monitoring of the switch status Light Emitting Diode (LED) and associated wiring
• Evaluation and monitoring of the control inputs
• Management of diagnostic and test functions
• Monitoring of power supply
• Communication via diagnostic link.
The control module is connected to the vehicle electrical system by either 3 (vehicles fitted with front
and rear sensors) or 2 (vehicles fitted with rear sensors only) multiplug connectors.
Inputs and Outputs

The table below shows control module inputs and outputs
Component Description Input/Output
Transmission Control Medium speed CAN bus message - reverse gear selected Input
Module (TCM)
TCM Medium speed CAN bus message - forward gear selected Input
Control switch Status - On/Off Input
Parking brake module Medium speed CAN bus message via the gateway Input
module - parking brake applied
Auxiliary junction box Electrical power supply Input
Parking aid sensors Electrical power and ground Output
Parking aid sensors Digital transmit and receive signals Output
Audio system speakers Varying frequency outputs Output
Control switch LED illumination Output
Diagnostics
The control module has a diagnostic connection via the medium speed CAN bus to enable faults to be
retrieved using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS). Additionally an on-board diagnostic routine
within the control module constantly monitors the system and alerts the driver to a system fault by
emitting a 5 second continuous tone through the audio system speakers when the ignition is
switched on and a gear is selected. If front parking aid sensors are fitted, the control switch LED will
also illuminate.
PARKING AID SENSORS
Four sensors are positioned in the rear bumper and four in the front bumper (if fitted). The front
sensor housings are glued into position; the rear sensor housings are welded into position. The
sensor bodies are then clipped into the housings from the rear.
Each sensor has a 3 pin connector which connects into a common harness linking all 4 sensors. The 3
pins of each connector provide the sensor a negative feed, a positive feed and a signal line. The rear
parking aid harness connects to the main vehicle body harness. The front parking aid harness
connects to the Left-Hand (LH) engine compartment harness.
Each sensor comprises a plastic housing which contains a piezoelectric disc. The disc resonates at a
frequency of approximately 50 kHz, producing an ultrasonic signal output. The disc also receives the
reflected echo signal.
Each sensor has 2 modes of operation; combined transmitter and receiver mode or receiver mode
only. The control module controls the operating mode of each sensor by the output of a digital signal
on the signal line.
In the combined mode, the sensor emits a series of ultrasonic impulses and then switches to receiver
mode to receive the echo reflected by an obstacle in the detection range. These echo signals are
amplified and converted from an analogue signal to a digital signal by the sensor. The digital signal is
then transmitted to the control module and compared with preprogrammed data stored in an
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) within the module.
The module receives this data via the signal line from the sensor and calculates the distance to the
obstacle according to the elapses time between the transmitted and received impulse. The duration
of the impulse transmission is determined by the control module. The frequency of the impulse is
determined by the sensor.
In the receiver mode, the sensor will receive impulses that were emitted by adjacent sensors. The
control module uses this information to precisely determine position and distance of the obstacle.
CONTROL SWITCH
1 Control switch
The control switch is located in the roof console. The switch is non-latching with an integral LED. The
switch receives a 12 V output from the control module, and is also connected to ground. When the
switch is operated, a momentary ground is completed. This is interpreted by the control module as a
signal to enable or disable the parking aid system.
The switch also receives a 12 V output from the control module to drive the LED when the parking
aid system is on.
NOTE:
The control switch will only switch off the front parking aid sensors. The rear parking aid sensors
will remain operational.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE:
A = Hardwired; N = Medium Speed CAN bus; P = MOST

1 Battery
2 Megafuse (175A)
3 Auxiliary junction box
4 Control module
5 Right outer front sensor
6 Right inner front sensor
7 Left inner front sensor
8 Left outer front sensor
9 Right outer rear sensor
10 Right inner rear sensor
11 Left inner rear sensor
12 Left outer rear sensor
13 Audio head unit
14 To audio system speakers
15 Gateway module
16 Control switch
If a forward drive gear is selected when the vehicle ignition is first switched on, the front parking aid
sensors (if fitted) will not be operational. If reverse (R) is the first gear selected after the ignition is
switched on, both the front and rear parking aid sensors will become operational. If a forward drive
gear is subsequently selected, the rear parking aid sensors be switched off by the control module but
the front parking aid sensors will remain operational until vehicle speed increases above 16 km/h (10
mph).
Parking aid will only become active if the following conditions exist:
Front and rear sensors fitted
• Ignition on
• 'Park' is not selected
• Parking brake is released
• Vehicle speed drops below 7 km/h (4.5 mph) - rear sensors only
• Vehicle speed drops below 7 km/h (4.5 mph) and control switch pressed - front sensors only.
Rear sensors only
• Ignition on
• Reverse gear selected for more than 1 second.
Audible and Visual Warnings

The control module processes the distance readings from the ultrasonic parking aid sensors to
determine if there are any objects within the detection areas. If there are no objects no audible
warning is produced. If an object is detected, repeated audible warnings are produced via the audio
system speakers. The time delay between the audible warnings decreases as the distance between
the detected object and the vehicle decreases until eventually a continuous tone is emitted from the
speakers.
A visual interpretation of the detection areas is given in the TSD.
The detection ranges of the sensors are shown in the table below.
Sensors Maximum Detection Range Continuous Tone
Front 800 mm (31 inches) 250 mm (10 inches)
Rear 1600 mm (63 inches) 300 mm (12 inches)
After the initial detection of an object, if there is no decrease in the distance between an object and
the central sensors, the time delay between the audible warnings remains constant. If an object is
detected by one of the corner sensors only, the audible warnings stop after approximately 5 seconds
if there is no change in the distance between an object and the corner sensor.
Detection Calculation
When operating in the combined transmitter and receiver mode, the sensor outputs a number of
ultrasonic pulses and receives the reflected echo signal. The control module amplifies the received
echo signals and compares them with a preprogrammed threshold to calculate the distance to the
object. This is achieved by determining the elapsed time between the transmission and reception of
the ultrasonic signal.
When operating in receiver mode, the sensor receives echo signals transmitted by an adjacent
sensor. This mode is used to improve the accuracy of the system.
The detection cycle consists of the control module operating 1 sensor in the combined transmitter
and receiver mode and transmitting a number of pulses. The control module then switches the
transmitting sensor and the adjacent sensor(s) to receiver mode. After a short time delay this
sequence is repeated using a different sensor to transmit the ultrasonic signal. This sequence is
completed in 100 ms. The control module uses several measurements of the same sensors to remove
errors from the calculation.
If the detected object is directly behind a sensor, the distance is calculated using the time between
the transmission and reception of the ultrasonic signal. If the object is positioned between 2 sensors,
the control module uses both signals to determine the correct distance using triangulation.
To perform the triangulation calculation, the control module must know the distance between the
individual sensors in the bumper. This information is stored in the control module memory. From the
received distance signal from each sensor and using the known distance between adjacent sensors,
the control module can calculate the minimum distance from the vehicle to the detected object.
When approaching several objects, the control module recognises the distance from the vehicle to
the nearest object.
Parking Aid
For a detailed description of the parking aid system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
Parking Aid
CAUTION: Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of

control modules does not guarantee confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in
the vehicle being tested and/or the donor vehicle.
NOTE:
Particular attention should be paid to the following items where DTCs may not be logged:
• Check for contamination (e.g. dirt, grime, frosting, ice) around the parking aid sensors, if
so refer to the parking aid section in the vehicle handbook.
• Check for the correct installation and alignment of the sensors to the bumper
• Spurious detection of the ground may occur during front system operation on an up-
slope
Electrical
• Fuse(s)
• Relay(s)
• Wiring Harness
• Front parking aid sensor(s) and holders
• Rear parking aid sensor(s) and holders
• Audio system
• Touch screen display unit
• Parking aid switch and LED
• Reversing lamp switch
• Parking aid module
Index.
DTC Index
tests, use the adaptor kit, part number 3548-1358-00.
NOTE:
NOTE:
fault (the last two digits give additional information read by the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system).
NOTE:
three decimal places, and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance
always take the resistance of the DMM leads into account.
NOTE:
NOTE:
Inspect connectors for signs of water ingress, and pins for damage and/or corrosion.
NOTE:
terminals.
• Front right outer sensor signal Carry out any pinpoint tests
circuit - short to ground, high
Front right outer associated with this DTC using
B1B3601 resistance
sensor • Front right outer sensor power the manufacturer approved
supply circuit - high resistance diagnostic system

Front right outer • Front right outer sensor signal associated with this DTC using
B1B3612
sensor circuit - short to power the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

• Front right outer sensor
Front right outer ground circuit - open circuit
B1B3696 diagnostic system. Install new
sensor • Front right outer sensor
internal failure sensor as necessary.
Front Outer Parking Aid Sensor
(86.54.22)
• Front right inner sensor signal Carry out any pinpoint tests
Front right inner associated with this DTC using
B1B3801 resistance
sensor • Front right inner sensor power the manufacturer approved

Front right inner • Front right inner sensor signal associated with this DTC using
B1B3812
diagnostic system
• Front right inner sensor Carry out any pinpoint tests

Front right inner ground circuit - open circuit associated with this DTC using
B1B3896 • Front right inner sensor the manufacturer approved
sensor
internal failure diagnostic system. Install new
sensor as necessary.
Front Inner Parking Aid Sensor
(86.54.21)
• Front left outer sensor signal Carry out any pinpoint tests
Front left outer associated with this DTC using
B1B4001 resistance
sensor • Front left outer sensor power the manufacturer approved

Front left outer • Front left outer sensor signal associated with this DTC using
B1B4012
diagnostic system

• Front left outer sensor ground
Front left outer circuit - open circuit
sensor • Front left outer sensor internal
failure sensor as necessary.
Front Outer Parking Aid Sensor
(86.54.22)
• Front left inner sensor signal Carry out any pinpoint tests
Front left inner associated with this DTC using
B1B4201 resistance
sensor • Front left inner sensor power the manufacturer approved

Front left inner • Front left inner sensor signal associated with this DTC using
B1B4212
diagnostic system

• Front left inner sensor ground
Front left inner circuit - open circuit
sensor • Front left inner sensor internal
Front Inner Parking Aid Sensor
(86.54.21)

• Rear right outer sensor signal
Rear right outer associated with this DTC using
B1B4401 circuit - short to ground, high
sensor resistance the manufacturer approved
• Rear right outer sensor power diagnostic system
supply circuit - high resistance

Rear right outer • Rear right outer sensor signal associated with this DTC using
B1B4412 circuit - short to power
sensor the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

• Rear right outer sensor ground
Rear right outer circuit - open circuit
sensor • Rear right outer sensor
Rear Parking Aid Sensor
(86.54.14)
• Rear right inner sensor signal Carry out any pinpoint tests
Rear right inner associated with this DTC using
B1B4601 resistance
sensor • Rear right inner sensor power the manufacturer approved

Rear right inner • Rear right inner sensor signal associated with this DTC using
B1B4612
diagnostic system

• Rear right inner sensor ground
Rear right inner circuit - open circuit
sensor • Rear right inner sensor
(86.54.14)
• Rear left outer sensor signal Carry out any pinpoint tests
Rear left outer associated with this DTC using
B1B4801 resistance
sensor • Rear left outer sensor power the manufacturer approved

Rear left outer • Rear left outer sensor signal associated with this DTC using
B1B4812
diagnostic system
• Rear left outer sensor ground Carry out any pinpoint tests
Rear left outer circuit - open circuit associated with this DTC using
B1B4896
sensor • Rear left outer sensor internal the manufacturer approved
failure diagnostic system
• Rear left inner sensor signal Carry out any pinpoint tests
Rear left inner associated with this DTC using
B1B5001 resistance
sensor • Rear left inner sensor power the manufacturer approved

Rear left inner • Rear left inner sensor signal associated with this DTC using
B1B5012
diagnostic system

• Rear left inner sensor ground
Rear left inner circuit - open circuit
sensor • Rear left inner sensor internal
(86.54.14)
• Parking aid status LED - short Refer to the electrical circuit

Parking aid status
B1B5411 to ground (detected if driven diagrams and test status LED
LED only) circuit for short to ground
• Parking aid status LED - short Refer to the electrical circuit

Parking aid status
B1B5412 to power (detected if not diagrams and test status LED
LED driven only) circuit for short to power
Refer to the electrical circuit

Front sensors
• Front sensors power supply diagrams and test front sensor
B1B5711 power supply
circuit - short to ground power supply circuit for short to
circuit
ground

Rear sensors
• Rear sensors power supply diagrams and test rear sensor
B1B5811 power supply
circuit - short to ground power supply circuit for short to
circuit
ground
• Disable switch stuck closed Carry out any pinpoint tests

B1C3073 Disable switch • Disable switch circuit - short to
ground
diagnostic system

CAN • Medium speed CAN associated with this DTC using
U001000
communication communication Bus the manufacturer approved

Control module
• Control module associated with this DTC using
U007300 communication communication Bus "A" Off the manufacturer approved
Bus "A" Off
diagnostic system

Lost
• Logged when subscribed CAN associated with this DTC using
message missing from CJB the manufacturer approved
with CJB
diagnostic system

Lost
U014200 communication message missing from RJB the manufacturer approved
with RJB
diagnostic system

• Logged when subscribed CAN
U015500 message missing from
with instrument instrument cluster the manufacturer approved
cluster diagnostic system

diagnostic system. Clear DTCs
Internal control • RJB car configuration data is
and re-test. If DTC still logged,
U030000 module software not compatible with the
parking aid module install a new parking aid
incompatibility
module. Refer to the new
module installation note at the
top of the DTC Index
Check CJB for DTCs and refer to

Invalid data • Logged when subscribed CAN
U042200 DTC Index.
received from CJB message invalid data from CJB
Communications Network
Invalid data
• Logged when subscribed CAN Check instrument cluster for
received from
U042300 message invalid data from DTCs and refer to DTC Index.
instrument Instrument Cluster Instrument Cluster
cluster
Check RJB for DTCs and refer to
Invalid data • Logged when subscribed CAN
U044300 DTC Index.
received from RJB message invalid data from RJB
Re-configure RJB using

Initial
• No configuration has been diagnostic tool, clear DTC and
U210000 configuration not
previously set re-test. If DTC remains check
complete
CAN network.
Re-configure RJB using

Control module diagnostic tool, clear DTC and
U210100 configuration • Data sent from RJB is invalid re-test. If DTC remains check
incompatible Check RJB for DTCs and refer to
DTC Index.
Install a new parking aid control

module, refer to the new
U300049 Control module • Internal control module failure
Install original module, check

• Vehicle/component mis- for parking aid related DTCs and
Vehicle match. Corrupt VIN data being refer to DTC Index. If DTC
U300281 Identification transmitted, module remains suspect parking aid
Number (VIN) previously installed to other module, refer to new module
vehicle installation note at top of DTC
Index

diagnostic system

U300317 Battery voltage threshold the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

U300362 Battery voltage • Mis-match of battery voltage,
of 2 volts or lower, between
parking aid module and RJB diagnostic system
Parking Aid Module (86.80.39)

Removal
NOTE:
The park control module is situated in the LH footwell and does not change position with the
hand of drive.

2 . LH side: Remove the cowl side trim panel.
Remove the hood release lever.
Release the forward edge of the scuff plate trim panel.
3
. CAUTION: Make sure the wiring harness and electrical connectors are not damaged
during the carpet release.
Carefully release the carpet for access.
Carefully release the forward edge of the floor console side trim panel.
4 . Release the subwoofer cover.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Position aside.
5 . Remove the parking aid module.
Position the acoustic pad aside.
Release 2 electrical harness clips from the body and position aside.
Remove the 2 nuts.

Installation
1 . Install the parking aid module.
Connect the electrical connectors.
Secure the electrical harness.
Align the acoustic pad.
2 . Install the subwoofer cover.
3
. CAUTION: Make sure the carpet is correctly installed and that no foul-condition
exists when the accelerator pedal is depressed.
Install the carpet.
Install the floor console side panel trim.
4 . Install the cowl side trim panel.
Carefully align and secure the clips.
Secure the scuff plate trim panel.

Rear Parking Aid Sensor (86.54.14)
Removal
1
2 . Remove the rear bumper cover.

For additional information, refer to Rear Bumper Cover (76.22.74)
3 . Remove the parking aid sensor.
Repeat the above for the other 3 sensors.
Installation
1
. CAUTION: If a new sensor is installed, only the front face must be painted. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in the component malfunctioning.
Install the parking aid sensor.

Repeat the above procedure for the remaining 3 sensors.
2 . Install the rear bumper cover.

For additional information, refer to Rear Bumper Cover (76.22.74)
Front Inner Parking Aid Sensor (86.54.21)
Removal
All vehicles
1
Vehicles with 4.2L engine

2 . Remove the front bumper cover.
For additional information, refer to Front Bumper Cover (76.22.78)
Vehicles with 5.0L engine

3 . Remove the front bumper cover.
All vehicles

Installation
1
To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Front Outer Parking Aid Sensor (86.54.22)
Removal
1
2 . Remove the headlamp assembly.

For additional information, refer to Headlamp Assembly (86.41.33)
Installation
1
To install, reverse the removal procedure.

414 : Battery and Charging System
414-00 : Charging System – General Information
General procedure
Battery Charging
1. Before charging a discharged battery inspect and repair the following conditions, if
necessary:
• Loose accessory drive belt.
• Pinched or grounded wiring harness to the generator or voltage regulator.
• Loose wiring harness connections at the generator or voltage regulator.
• Loose or corroded connections at battery, headlamp panel junction wire or engine
ground.
• Carry out generator charging checks.
• Excessive battery quiescent drain due to:
engine compartment, load space, glove compartment and courtesy lamps remaining on
(switch damaged or out of adjustment, glove compartment left open).
Battery Charging - Maintenance-Free

Batteries
WARNING: KEEP BATTERIES OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN.
BATTERIES CONTAIN SULPHURIC ACID, AVOID CONTACT WITH SKIN, EYES
OR CLOTHING. SHIELD YOUR EYES WHEN WORKING NEAR THE BATTERY
TO PROTECT AGAINST POSSIBLE SPLASHING OF THE ACID SOLUTION. IN
CASE OF ACID CONTACT WITH SKIN OR EYES, FLUSH IMMEDIATELY WITH
WATER FOR A MINIMUM OF 15 MINUTES AND SEEK PROMPT MEDICAL
ATTENTION. IF ACID IS SWALLOWED, CALL A PHYSICIAN IMMEDIATELY.
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
WARNING: BATTERIES NORMALLY PRODUCE EXPLOSIVE GASES

WHICH CAN CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY, THEREFORE DO NOT ALLOW
FLAMES, SPARKS, OR LIGHTED SUBSTANCES TO COME NEAR THE
BATTERY. WHEN CHARGING OR WORKING NEAR A BATTERY ALWAYS
SHIELD YOUR FACE AND PROTECT YOUR EYES . ALWAYS PROVIDE
ADEQUATE VENTILATION. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS
MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Cold batteries will not readily accept a charge. Therefore, batteries should be allowed to
warm up approximately to 15 degrees centigrade (59 degrees Fahrenheit) before charging.
This may require 12 hours at room temperature depending on the initial temperature and
battery size.
2. A battery which has been completely discharged may be slow to accept a charge initially,
and in some cases may not accept a charge at the normal charger setting. When batteries are
in this condition, charging can be started by use of the 'dead battery' switch which is fitted to
certain types of battery chargers. Follow the manufacturer's instructions when carrying out
this procedure.
3. To determine whether a battery is accepting a charge, follow the manufacturer's

instructions for the charger.
4. After releasing dead battery switch and with the charger still operating, measure battery
voltage. If the voltage is 12 volts or higher, the battery may be accepting a charge and may be
capable of being recharged. If the temperature of the battery is below 15 degrees centigrade
(59 degrees Fahrenheit) the battery may require charging for up to two hours before the
charge rate is high enough to show on the charger ammeter. It has been found that all un-
damaged batteries can be charged by this procedure. If a battery cannot be charged by this
procedure, it should be replaced.
5. A rapid recharge procedure has been developed for recharging batteries that have passed
the 'No-Load Test' and only need a recharge. This can be due to non start battery failures or
battery discharged in vehicle due to key-off loads.
6. The battery can be rapidly recharged by using either of the following methods:
• Perform a two hour charge using a constant current of 20 amps (manual setting on the
charger).
• Perform a two hour charge using a constant voltage (automatic setting on the charger).
Quiescent Current Measurement

1. NOTE:
The following quiescent current measurement does not apply to vehicles with the Tracker
system installed. If the vehicle is installed with the tracker system the quiescent current
may be up to 14 milliamps higher. If non-jaguar approved accessories are installed the
following measurements may not apply.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Check the vehicle off-load battery voltage. If below 12.5 volts, install a fully charged slave
battery for the tests and recharge the vehicle battery.
3. Connect a 'shorting' link lead between the negative battery terminal and the negative
battery lead, before connecting a suitable ammeter to the battery (with the negative test lead
clip to the negative battery terminal, and the positive test lead clip to the battery negative
lead).
4. NOTE:
Make sure that all electrical accessories are switched off.
Operate the key fob unlock button to disarm the vehicle security system.
• Select ignition mode (without starting the engine) for around 10 seconds.
• Deselect ignition mode, close doors, hood & luggage compartment lid latch.
• Lock vehicle.
• After 15 minutes on vehicles with TPMS installed or 4 minutes on vehicles without
TPMS installed, remove shorting link & note ammeter reading.
• The quiescent current should be less than 35mA.
• Replace Shorting link.
• Unlock the vehicle.
• Superlock the vehicle.
• After 15 minutes, on vehicles with TPMS installed, or 4 minutes, on vehicles without
TPMS installed, remove shorting link & note ammeter reading.
• The quiescent current should be less than 35mA.
5. NOTE:
In the unlocked state, the vehicle will take 30mins to shut down to its min quiescent
current.
If intermittent wake-ups are suspected, monitor battery current continuously
6. Disconnect the ammeter. Reconnect the battery ground cable.

Charging System
For a detailed description of the charging system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
Battery and Cables
Generator

NOTE:
Check the vehicle battery condition and state of charge before condemning any of the charging
system components. For additional information, refer to the battery care manual.
• Generator
• Generator • Battery
• Drive belt • Fuse 5 Rear Junction Box (RJB)
• Drive belt tensioner • Engine/generator ground connection
• Generator pulley • Circuit(s)
• Check the security of the generator fixings • Electrical connector(s)
• Engine Control Module (ECM)
4 . If the cause is not visually evident verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart.
Alternatively, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Possible Cause Action
Battery Not Charging • Fuse 5 RJB Check Fuse 5 RJB. Check the battery condition
warning displayed • Front End and state of charge. Refer to the battery care
on message center Accessory Drive manual. Check the FEAD belt tension.
(FEAD) belt tension Accessory Drive Check ECM and instrument
• Generator fault cluster for DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index.
• ECM
Electronic Engine Controls
fault Instrument Cluster
• Controller Area Communications Network
Network (CAN)
fault
For ignition power circuit tests. GO to Pinpoint

Test G834532p1.
Check the quiescent drain. Check the battery
condition and state of charge, refer to the battery
• No ignition power
from CJB care manual.
Battery keeps • Battery quiescent Battery Charging Check the FEAD belt tension.
discharging, no drain Accessory Drive Check RJB for DTCs B2A9016,
warning message • Battery fault B2A9116, Note: if battery requires replacing and
displayed on • FEAD belt tension these DTCs were logged, complete and return the
• Generator pulley
message center battery report form listing the DTCs, see battery
fault
care manual. Check ECM for DTCs and refer to
• Generator failure
relevant DTC Index.
Electronic Engine Controls Check the generator
pulley does not turn independently of the
generator
• FEAD belt tension

• FEAD belt
• FEAD belt tensioner For noisy generator tests. GO to Pinpoint Test
Generator noisy
• FEAD belt idler G834532p7.
pulleys
• Generator failure
• Generator For radio interference tests. GO to Pinpoint Test

Radio interference • Wiring harness G834532p8.
DTC Index
NOTE:
module/component.
NOTE:
system).
NOTE:
When performing electrical voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter (DMM)
accurate to three decimal places, and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing
resistance, always take the resistance of the DMM leads into account.
NOTE:
NOTE:
terminals.
Generator faults • Charging system

P163200 fault GO to Pinpoint Test G834532p4.
sensor/circuit
Check battery is in fully charged and

serviceable condition (if battery requires
• Circuit voltage
B2A9016 Battery low replacing and this DTC is logged, complete and
below threshold
return battery report form listing this DTC),
refer to the battery care manual
B2A9116 Battery Check battery is in fully charged and

• Circuit voltage
serviceable condition (if battery requires
discharged below threshold replacing and this DTC is logged, complete and
return battery report form listing this DTC),
refer to the battery care manual
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST G834532p4 : P163200

CHARGING SYSTEM FAULT
G834532t9 : CHECK THE BATTERY VOLTAGE WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING
1. Connect a suitable voltmeter across the battery terminals. 2. Start the engine and allow to idle
with no electrical loads applied. 3. Measure the maximum voltage achieved at the battery after start.
• Is the voltage greater than 13 volts?
-> Yes
GO to Pinpoint Test G834532t10.
-> No
INSTALL a fully charged battery. GO to Pinpoint Test G834532t13.
G834532t10 : CHECK THE GENERATOR 'S' TERMINAL FOR BATTERY

VOLTAGE
1. Set ignition status to OFF. 2. DISCONNECT generator electrical connector PI048. 3. MEASURE the
voltage at generator electrical connector PI048 pin 3.
-> Yes
-> No
G834532t11 : CHECK FUSE 5 IN REAR JUNCTION BOX (RJB)

1. Check fuse 5 in the RJB.
• Is the fuse OK?

-> Yes
REPAIR the circuit between the generator electrical connector PI048 pin 3 and fuse 5 in the RJB.
CLEAR the DTC, test the system for normal operation.
-> No
G834532t12 : CHECK THE GENERATOR 'S' TERMINAL FOR SHORT TO

GROUND
1. MEASURE the resistance between generator electrical connector PI048 pin 3 and ground.
• Is the resistance less than 10,000 ohms?
-> Yes
REPAIR the circuit between the generator electrical connector PI048 pin 3 and fuse 5 of the RJB.
INSTALL a new fuse, CLEAR the DTC, test the system for normal operation.
-> No
INSTALL a new fuse, CLEAR the DTC, test the system for normal operation.
G834532t13 : CHECK FOR BATTERY VOLTAGE AT THE GENERATOR 'L'

TERMINAL
1. Set ignition status to OFF. 2. Disconnect generator electrical connector PI048. 3. Set ignition status
to ON. 4. Measure the voltage at generator electrical connector PI048 pin 1.
-> Yes
INSTALL a new generator.
Generator - 4.2L NA V8 - AJV8 (86.10.02) CLEAR the DTC, test the system for normal operation.
-> No
G834532t14 : CHECK THE GENERATOR 'L' LINE FOR SHORT TO GROUND

1. Set ignition status to OFF. 2. Disconnect battery. 3. MEASURE the resistance between the
generator electrical connector PI048 pin 1 and ground.
-> Yes
REPAIR the circuit between the generator electrical connector PI048 pin 1 and the Engine Control
Module (ECM). CLEAR the DTC, test the system for normal operation.
-> No
G834532t15 : CHECK THE GENERATOR 'L' LINE FOR SHORT TO POWER

1. MEASURE the resistance between the generator electrical connector PI048 pin 1 and battery
positive.
-> Yes
REPAIR the circuit between the generator electrical connector PI048 pin 1 and the Engine Control
Module (ECM). CLEAR the DTC, test the system for normal operation.
-> No
G834532t16 : CHECK THE GENERATOR 'L' LINE FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect the ECM electrical connector PI300. 2. MEASURE the resistance between the generator
electrical connector PI048 pin 1and ECM electrical connector PI300 pin 16.
• Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
-> Yes
Install a new generator.
Generator - 4.2L NA V8 - AJV8 (86.10.02) CLEAR the DTC, test the system for normal operation.
-> No
REPAIR the circuit between the generator electrical connector PI048 pin 1 and the ECM electrical
connector PI300 pin 16. CLEAR the DTC, test the system for normal operation.
PINPOINT TEST G834532p1 : IGNITION

POWER CIRCUIT TESTS
G834532t1 : CHECK FOR IGNITION POWER AT GENERATOR
1. Set ignition status to OFF. 2. Disconnect generator electrical connector PI048. 3. Set ignition status
to ON. 4. Measure the voltage at generator electrical connector PI048 pin 2.
-> Yes
Check for quiescent current fault, check battery condition. Refer to the Battery Care Manual.
-> No
G834532t2 : CHECK THE IGNITION POWER CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO

GROUND
1. Set the ignition status to OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery. 3. Check the resistance between
generator electrical connector PI048 pin 2 and GROUND.
• Is the resistance less than 400 ohms?
-> Yes
REPAIR the circuit between the generator electrical connector PI048 pin 2 and the CJB. CLEAR the
DTC, test the system for normal operation.
-> No
G834532t3 : CHECK THE IGNITION POWER CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO POWER

1. Check the resistance between generator electrical connector PI048 pin 2 and battery positive.
-> Yes
REPAIR the circuit between the generator electrical connector PI048 pin 2 and the CJB. CLEAR the
DTC, test the system for normal operation.
-> No
G834532t4 : CHECK THE IGNITION POWER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect CJB electrical connector FL048. 2. Check the resistance between CJB electrical
connector FL048 pin 12 and generator electrical connector PI048 pin 2.
• Is the resistance greater than 5 ohms?
-> Yes
REPAIR the circuit between CJB electrical connector FL048 pin 12 and generator electrical connector
PI048 pin 2. CLEAR the DTC, test the system for normal operation.
-> No
G834532t5 : CHECK CJB IGNITION POWER OUTPUT DRIVE
1. Connect the battery. 2. Set ignition status to ON. 3. Check the voltage at CJB electrical connector
FL048, component side, pin 12.
-> Yes
Check no other modules connected to this circuit are pulling to GROUND. Clear the DTC, test the
system for normal operation.
-> No
Install a new generator.
Generator - 4.2L NA V8 - AJV8 (86.10.02)
PINPOINT TEST G834532p7 :

GENERATOR NOISY
G834532t23 : CHECK THE GENERATOR FOR SECURITY
1. Inspect the generator fixings.
• Is the generator secure?
-> Yes
-> No
SECURE the generator. TEST the system for normal operation.
G834532t24 : CHECK THE FEAD BELT

1. Remove and inspect the FEAD belt.
Accessory Drive Belt - 4.2L NA V8 - AJV8 (12.10.40)
• Is the FEAD belt in good condition?
-> Yes
-> No
INSTALL a new FEAD belt. TEST the system for normal operation.
G834532t25 : CHECK THE FEAD BELT TENSIONER
1. Remove and inspect the FEAD belt tensioner.
Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner - 4.2L NA V8 - AJV8 (12.10.41)
• Is the FEAD belt tensioner in good condition?
-> Yes
-> No
INSTALL a new FEAD belt tensioner. TEST the system for normal operation.
G834532t26 : CHECK THE GENERATOR FOR MECHANICAL NOISE

1. Rotate the generator pulley by hand.
• Does the generator rotor shaft rotate smoothly and quietly?
-> Yes
-> No
Generator - 4.2L NA V8 - AJV8 (86.10.02) TEST the system for normal operation.
G834532t27 : CHECK THE FEAD BELT IDLER PULLEYS

1. Rotate the FEAD belt idler pulleys by hand.
• Do the FEAD belt idler pulleys rotate smoothly and quietly?
-> Yes
-> No
INSTALL new FEAD belt idler pulleys as necessary.
Accessory Drive Belt Idler Pulley - 4.2L NA V8 - AJV8 (12.10.43) TEST the system for normal
operation.
G834532t28 : CHECK THE GENERATOR FOR ELECTRICAL NOISE

1. Install the FEAD belt pulleys and belt. 2. Start and run the engine at 1500 rpm. Apply a high
electrical load to the battery.
• Is the noise only heard with the high electrical load applied?
-> Yes
-> No
CHECK the air conditioning compressor.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor - 4.2L NA V8 - AJV8 (82.10.20) CHECK the power steering pump.
Power Steering Pump - 4.2L NA V8 - AJV8 (57.20.14) TEST the system for normal operation.
G834532t29 : ELIMINATE THE GENERATOR AS THE CAUSE OF ELECTRICAL

NOISE
1. Disconnect generator electrical connector PI048. 2. Start and run the engine at 1500 rpm.
• Is the noise still present?
-> Yes
CHECK the air conditioning compressor.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor - 4.2L NA V8 - AJV8 (82.10.20) CHECK the power steering pump.
Power Steering Pump - 4.2L NA V8 - AJV8 (57.20.14) TEST the system for normal operation.
-> No
Generator - 4.2L NA V8 - AJV8 (86.10.02) TEST the system for normal operation.
PINPOINT TEST G834532p8 : RADIO

INTERFERENCE
G834532t30 : CHECK IF THE GENERATOR IS THE CAUSE OF THE RADIO
INTERFERENCE
1. Start and run the engine at 1500 rpm. 2. Turn the radio to the ON position, and select the affected
station.
• Is the radio interference present?
-> Yes
-> No
G834532t31 : CHECK IF THE GENERATOR IS THE CAUSE OF THE RADIO
INTERFERENCE WITH A HIGH ELECTRICAL LOAD APPLIED TO THE
BATTERY
1. Start and run the engine at 1500 rpm. 2. Apply a high electrical load to the battery. 3. Turn the
radio to the ON position, and select the affected station.
-> Yes
-> No
DIAGNOSE the entertainment system.
Audio System
G834532t32 : ELIMINATE THE GENERATOR AS THE CAUSE OF RADIO

INTERFERENCE
1. Disconnect generator electrical connector PI048. 2. Start and run the engine at 1500 rpm. 3. Turn
the radio to the ON position, and select the affected station.
-> Yes
DIAGNOSE the entertainment system.
Audio System
-> No
CLEAN and tighten all mounting points, positive and negative cable connections (including the hood,
luggage compartment lid and engine GROUND straps). INSTALL fuse 5 to the RJB. TEST the system for
normal operation. If interference is still present, INSTALL a new generator.
414-01 : Battery, Mounting and Cables
Specifications
Specifications
Battery Specification
WARNING: Batteries produce explosive gases which may cause personal injury.
Do not expose the battery to a naked flame. When charging or working near a battery
wear protective clothing and eye protectors. Always provide adequate ventilation.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Batteries contain sulphuric acid, avoid contact with skin, eyes and
clothing. Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible
contact of the acid solution. In case of contact with the skin or eyes, flush immediately
for a minimum of 15 minutes and seek prompt medical attention. if swallowed call a
physician immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
CAUTION: Make sure all electrical systems are off before connecting the battery
ground cable. Failure to follow these instructions may result in damage to the electrical
system.
Battery
Engine Specification Battery Information
Battery type Specification
Vehicles fitted with 4.2L NA and SC engine Varta T8 90 Ah
Battery Cold Cranking Specification
Item Specification
90 Ah Battery Cold Cranking 800 Amps
Battery Disconnect/Connect Procedures

WARNING: The backup power supply energy must be depleted before any
supplementary restraint system repairs are carried out. To deplete the backup supply
energy, first disconnect the battery ground cable, then disconnect the battery positive
cable and wait ten minutes to avoid accidental deployment and personal injury. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Disconnecting the battery cables will cause all of the electronic
control modules to lose all stored data/fault codes.
NOTE:
Following reconnecting of the battery, the engine should be allowed to idle as the stored
idle and drive values contained within the engine control module (ECM) will have been
lost. This may cause driveability concern if the following procedure is not carried out.
Battery disconnect procedure Battery connect procedure

1. If possible, apply parking brake or 1. Connect the battery cables and tighten to 5
alternatively, chock wheels. Nm. Ground cable must be connected last
2. If required, record any customer audio and
climate control settings. This also applies to 2. Install the battery cover and close the
all electronic control module stored luggage compartment lid.
information.
3. Start the engine and allow to idle until the
3. Switch off ignition.
engine reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Open the luggage compartment lid. 4. Switch the engine off.
5. Restart the engine and allow to idle for
5. Release the cover and disconnect the
approximately two minutes (this will allow the
battery ground cable.
ECM to learn the idle values).
6. Apply and hold the brake pedal, select drive
6. If required, disconnect the battery positive
and allow the engine to idle for a further two
cable.
minutes.
7. Drive the vehicle for approximately five
miles/eight kilometers of varied driving to
enable the ECM to complete it's learning
strategy.
8. Reset the audio unit and climate control
assembly to original customer settings.
9. Reset the door window motors.
Description Nm lb-ft lb-in

Battery positive cable terminal retaining nut 5 4 -
Battery negative cable terminal retaining nut 5 4 -
Battery clamp nuts 9 7 -
Battery and Cables

COMPONENT LOCATION
2 Generator
3 Starter motor
4 Battery Junction Box (BJB)
6 Battery
7 Remote jump start terminal

INTRODUCTION
Electrical power from the battery and generator is distributed throughout the vehicle through a
series of junction boxes.
IGNITION MODES
The vehicle has a possible 4 ignition modes. The modes and systems that are active in each mode are
detailed in the following table.
Ignition Mode Off Accessory (convenience) On Crank
Exterior lamps Memory functions seat, Exterior lamps fog lamps Stability controls
headlamps – Dip column etc directional Indicators
only approach
lamps
Interior lighting Manual adjust seat column Convertible hood Heated/cooled

etc Seat
Preheat - timed in Interior lighting Wash/wipe Adaptive speed

control
Electric park Brake lights HVAC Adaptive

brake - On damping
Instrument Exterior lighting auto EMS TPMS

cluster - stand by, headlamps, reversing lamps,
clock, odometer side lamps, tail lamps
Hazard warning Auto infotainment previous Instrument cluster – dials Pedestrian

lamps condition (preset volume), and warnings fuel gauge Protection
radio standby, phone temperature gauge lamp system
standby, steering wheel check
switches
Locking and Instrument cluster –message Windows Gearshift control

unlocking center, trip computer & TCM
Security Horn EPB – power to EPB – power to

disengage (foot on break) disengage
Cigar lighter/power socket Restraints check

BATTERY
The battery is located behind a cover at the front of the luggage compartment. The cover is held in
place by 4 retainers. The battery sits in a tray and is secured with a clamp plate and 2 nuts.
The positive and negative battery cables are fitted with Service loops. The Service loops add extra
length to the cables and allow the battery to be slid rearward in the luggage compartment without
disconnection.
Remote Jump Start Terminal

The positive battery cable is also connected to a remote jump start terminal. The remote jump start
terminal is located in the Left-Hand (LH) rear corner of the luggage compartment and can be
accessed by removing the air vent trim. Although also fitted to coupe vehicles, the terminal has been
specifically designed to allow a convertible vehicle to be jump started if a drained battery is
experienced when the top is in the stowed condition.
The starter motor power lead is also connected to the remote jump start terminal and is insulated
from the battery jump start cable and the vehicle body by a nylon washer.
The negative jump start connection is a stud located in the spare wheel well. For more information
on jump start procedure, refer to the Owners Handbook.
Transit Relay
The vehicle is also fitted with a transit relay. This is a disposable device and not for use by the
customer. This relay is fitted in series with the battery and ground. It disconnects the battery from
the vehicles ground and thus eliminates quiescent current drain during delivery. The relay must be
removed before delivery to the customer. For more information, refer to the Pre-Delivery Inspection
(PDI) manual.
BATTERY JUNCTION BOX (BJB)
Mounted on the LH side of the battery is the BJB. The BJB contains 3 megafuses delivering battery
power to; the starter motor (400A); the auxiliary junction box (175A) and the CJB (175A). For more
information, refer to the Electrical Guide.
AUXILIARY JUNCTION BOX
The auxiliary junction box is mounted on the passenger compartment rear bulkhead and secured by
2 nuts/studs. The junction box can be accessed by opening the center panel of the rear seat back.
The center panel is secured in position by a single stud at the top, and hinged at the bottom.
The auxiliary junction box receives electrical power from the BJB via a 175A megafuse. For more
information on the circuits and systems served by the auxiliary junction box, refer to the Electrical
Guide.
CENTRAL JUNCTION BOX (CJB)
The CJB is mounted at the base of the LH A pillar and secured by 2 nuts/studs. Access to the CJB can
be gained through a removable panel located below the LH side of the instrument panel.
The CJB receives electrical power from the BJB via a 175A megafuse. A second power supply lead
'daisy chains' off the CJB, providing electrical power to the power distribution box. For more
information on the circuits and systems served by the CJB, refer to the Electrical Guide.
The CJB also controls the functionality of a number of vehicle systems. These include:
• Electric steering column lock. For additional information, refer to Steering Column (211-04
Steering Column)
• Instrument cluster and panel illumination. For additional information, refer to Instrument
Cluster and Panel Illumination (413-00 Instrument Cluster and Panel Illumination)
• Exterior lighting systems. For additional information, refer to Exterior Lighting (417-01
Exterior Lighting)
For additional information, refer to Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) (417-04 Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL))
• Interior lighting systems. For additional information, refer to Interior Lighting (417-02
Interior Lighting)
• Active anti-theft alarm system. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft - Active (419-
01 Anti-Theft - Active)
• Passive anti-theft alarm system. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft -
Passive (419-01 Anti-Theft - Passive)
• Passive start. For additional information, refer to Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry
Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems)
• Electric seats. For additional information, refer to Seats (501-10 Seating)
• Electric windows. For additional information, refer to Glass, Frames and Mechanisms (501-
11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms)
• Wipers and washers. For additional information, refer to Wipers and Washers (501-16
Wipers and Washers)
POWER DISTRIBUTION BOX
The power distribution box is located in the LH rear of the engine compartment, beneath a closing
panel. The power distribution box is supplied electrical power from the BJB, via the CJB. For more
information on the circuits and systems served by the power distribution box, refer to the Electrical
Guide.
Battery
For additional information, <<414-00>>
Battery (86.15.01)
Removal
CAUTION: It is imperative that the battery ground cable is disconnected from the battery
terminal and not the body.
2 . Disconnect the battery positive cable.
Loosen the nut.
3 . Release the harness.
Release the electrical connector from the clip.
4 . Release the battery clamp.
Remove the 2 nuts.
5 . Remove the battery.

Disconnect the vent tube.
Installation
1 . Install the battery.
Connect the vent tube.
2 . Install the battery clamp.
3 . Secure the wiring harness.
Attach the electrical connector to the clip.
4 . Connect the battery positive cable.
Tighten the nut to 5 Nm (4 lb.ft).

414-02 : Generator and Regulator – 4.2L NA V8 –
AJV8/4.2L SC V8 – AJV8
Specifications
Specifications
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in

Electrical connector to generator - nut 12 9 -
Generator to mounting bracket - upper nut 25 18 -
Generator to mounting bracket - lower nut/bolt 40 30 -
Generator mounting bracket to engine - bolt 40 30 -
Generator
COMPONENT LOCATION
INTRODUCTION
The generator is located at the front Right-Hand (RH) side of the engine, on the cylinder block. The
generator has an output of 85/130 Amps and is manufactured by Denso. A six-ribbed polyvee belt
drives the generator pulley, which in turn is driven from the engine crankshaft pulley. The generator
comprises a stator, a rotor, a rectifier pack and a regulator.
The rotor comprises a field winding, wound around an iron core and mounted on a shaft. The iron
core has extensions at each end, which form North and South poles as current flows through the field
winding. The rotor is located inside the stator and is mounted on bearings for smooth running and to
support the rotor due to the high side loading applied by the drive belt tension.
The stator has three sets of coils made from copper wire. The three coil windings are connected in a
'dual star' connection, where one end of the winding is connected to the other two windings. The
output current is supplied from the opposite end of each winding. Rotation of the rotor causes ac
current to be produced in the coils.
The rectifier converts the ac current produced in the stator coils into dc (rectified) current required
by the vehicle electrical system. The rectifier comprises 12 semi-conductor diodes mounted on a
heatsink to dissipate heat. An equal number of the diodes are on the negative and positive side. An
additional diode in the regulator controls feedback through the battery voltage signal line. The
rectifier also prevents current flow from the battery to the generator when the output voltage is less
than the battery voltage.
Initially, the ignition supply provides an excitation current to the rotor at low generator speeds via
brushes, which contact slip rings at the end of the rotor shaft. As the generator speed increases the
generator becomes self-exciting.
The charge warning lamp function is transmitted to the engine management system and then on to
the high speed Controller Area Network (CAN) bus to the instrument cluster.
Generator
For additional information, refer to section<<414-00>>

Removal
All vehicles
2
4 . Remove the RH HO2S.
5 . Remove the RH engine mount.
Right-hand drive vehicles

6 . Disconnect the steering gear electrical connector.
All vehicles
7 . Release the battery positive cable from the body.
8 . Disconnect the ground cable from the transmission.
Remove the bolt.
9 . Disconnect the generator electrical connectors.
Release the cover.
Remove the nut.
10 . Remove the generator.
Remove the nut.
Remove the nut and bolt.

Rotate the generator.
Installation
All vehicles
1 . Install the generator.
Tighten the nut and bolt to 40 Nm (30 lb.ft).
2 . Connect the generator electrical connectors.
Secure the cover.
3 . Connect the ground cable.

4 . Secure the battery positive cable.
Attach the clips.

5 . Connect the steering gear electrical connector.
All vehicles
6 . Install the RH engine mount.
7 . Install the RH HO2S.

Generator - 4.2L SC V8 - AJV8 (86.10.02)
Removal
All vehicles
2

4 . Remove the RH HO2S.

5 . Remove the RH engine mount.

For additional information, refer to Engine Mount RH (12.45.03)

6 . Disconnect the steering gear electrical connector.
All vehicles
7 . Release the battery positive cable from the body.
8 . Disconnect the ground cable from the transmission.
Remove the bolt.
Release the cover.
Remove the nut.
10 . Remove the generator.
Remove the nut.

Rotate the generator.
Installation
All vehicles
Secure the cover.
3 . Connect the ground cable.

4 . Secure the battery positive cable.
Attach the clips.

5 . Connect the steering gear electrical connector.
All vehicles
6 . Install the RH engine mount.
For additional information, refer to Engine Mount RH (12.45.03)
7 . Install the RH HO2S.



415 : Information and Entertainement
Systems
415-00 : Information and Entertainement – General

Information
Audio System
For a detailed description of the Information and Entertainment System, refer to the relevant
Audio System
Antenna
Speakers

• Integrated audio module • Fuses

• Information and entertainment module • Loose or corroded connector(s)
• Audio amplifier • Integrated audio module
• Compact disc player jammed, not loading • Information and entertainment module
• Scratched/dirty compact discs • Audio amplifier
• Speakers • Speakers
Index.
DTC Index
Information and Entertainment Module
NOTE:
NOTE:
system).
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
terminals.
• Internal electronic failure Install a new information and

B1A59- Sensor 5 Volt supply
entertainment control module,
49 refer to the new module
the DTC Index
• Steering wheel audio switch For steering wheel audio

B1D21- Remote control
circuit - short to power, high control switch tests. GO to
15 switch resistance Pinpoint Test G834560p1.
Carry out the pinpoint test

U0010- Medium speed CAN • General failure No sub type associated with this DTC using
00 communication Bus information the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
Lost communication Carry out the pinpoint test

U0127- with Tire Pressure • General failure No sub type associated with this DTC using
00 Monitor System information the manufacturer approved
(TPMS) module diagnostic system

U0140- Lost communication • General failure No sub type associated with this DTC using
00 with CJB information the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

00 with RJB information the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

Lost communication
U0155- • General failure No sub type associated with this DTC using
with instrument
00 information the manufacturer approved
cluster
diagnostic system

Lost communication
with parking aid
module
diagnostic system

Lost communication
with climate control
module
diagnostic system

U0184- Lost communication • General failure No sub type
00 with audio module information the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

00 with audio amplifier information the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

Lost communication
with satellite radio
tuner
diagnostic system

Lost communication
with telephone
module
diagnostic system

Lost communication
with driver door
module
diagnostic system

Lost communication
with passenger door
module
diagnostic system

Lost communication
with convertible top
module
diagnostic system

Lost communication
with remote
function actuation
diagnostic system

Lost communication
with integrated
control panel
diagnostic system
Lost communication Carry out the pinpoint test

U0245- • General failure No sub type
with multimedia associated with this DTC using
00 module information the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

Lost communication
with touch screen
display
diagnostic system

diagnostic system, clear DTCs
• RJB car configuration data is
Internal control and re-test. If DTC still logged,
U0300- not compatible with the
module software suspect the information and
00 information and
incompatibility entertainment control module entertainment control module
and refer to the new module
installation note at top of DTC
Index
Re-configure the information

Internal control and entertainment control
U0300-
module software • System program failure module using the
51
incompatibility manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
Incomplete MOST
ring reported by
U1A15- associated with this DTC using
Information and • Missing message
87 the manufacturer approved
Entertainment
diagnostic system
control module

diagnostic system. Clear DTC
Stored vehicle and re-test. If the DTC remains
U3000- • Incorrect car configuration
configuration data suspect the information and
55 data received
does not match entertainment module, refer
to the new module installation
note at the top of the DTC
Index

U3000- manufacturer approved
Control module • Missing message
87 diagnostic system. Check
information and entertainment
module for DTCs and refer to
the DTC Index. Check CAN
network integrity using the
diagnostic system
U3002-
Identification transmitted, module for DTCs and refer to relevant
81 previously installed to other DTC Index
Number (VIN)
vehicle
• Mis-match of battery voltage, Carry out the pinpoint test

of 2 volts or lower, between
U3003- associated with this DTC using
Battery voltage information and
62 entertainment module and the manufacturer approved
RJB diagnostic system
Audio Amplifier (vehicles with premium audio)
NOTE:
NOTE:
system).
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
terminals.
• Front passenger Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams

B1A01- Speaker #1 - circuit
speaker circuits - and test front passenger speaker
13 open high resistance circuits for high resistance
• Front driver speaker Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams

circuits - high and test front driver speaker circuits for
13 open resistance high resistance
• Rear left speaker Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams

circuit - high and test rear left speaker circuit for high
13 open resistance resistance
• Rear right speaker Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams

circuit - high and test rear right speaker circuit for
• Front center speaker Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams

circuit - high and test front center speaker circuit for
• Sub-woofer speaker Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams

circuit - high and test sub-woofer speaker circuit for
Carry out the pinpoint test associated

B1A01- Speaker#1 - general • General electrical
with this DTC using the manufacturer
01 electrical failure failure
approved diagnostic system

B1A02- Speaker #2 - general • General electrical
01 electrical failure failure approved diagnostic system




Short circuit of one

or both front
B1A09- Check for additional front speaker DTCs
speaker output - • Short to ground
11 and refer to DTC Index
circuit short to
ground
Short circuit of one

B1A10- or both rear speaker Check for additional rear speaker DTCs
• Short to ground
11 output - circuit short and refer to DTC Index
to ground
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams

B1A11- Speaker#11 - circuit
• Short to power and check all speaker circuits for short
12 short to battery
to power
Fibre optic
communication Bus • Component or Check for additional DTCs and refer to
U2003-
- component or system over DTC Index. Clear DTC and re-
98 temperature
system over test/monitor condition
temperature
• Software
Control module - incompatibility Re-configure the audio amplifier as an
U3000- system • The version of the existing control module, using the
05 programming Local Configuration manufacturer approved diagnostic
failures file does not match system
that expected
Re-configure the audio amplifier as an
existing control module, using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic
Control module - system. Clear DTC, cycle ignition and
U3000- • General memory
general memory read DTCs. If DTC returns, suspect audio
42 failure
failure amplifier module and install a new
module. Refer to the new module
installation note at the top of the DTC
Index
Re-configure the audio amplifier as an

existing control module, using the
system. Clear DTC, cycle ignition and
U3000- Control module -
• Data memory failure read DTCs. If DTC returns, suspect audio
44 data memory failure
amplifier module and install a new
module. Refer to the new module
Index

Stored vehicle
• Incorrect car system. Clear DTC and re-test. If the
U3000- configuration data
configuration data DTC remains suspect the audio
55 does not match - not received amplifier, refer to the new module
configured
Index

system. Check audio amplifier for DTCs
U3000- Control module -
• Missing message and refer to the DTC Index. Check CAN
87 missing message
network integrity using the
system
Control module -
• Component or Check for additional DTCs and refer to
U3000- component or
system over DTC Index. Clear DTC and re-
98 system over temperature test/monitor condition
temperature
Battery voltage - Carry out the pinpoint test associated

U3003- • Circuit voltage below
circuit voltage below with this DTC using the manufacturer
16 threshold
threshold approved diagnostic system
Battery voltage - Carry out the pinpoint test associated
U3003- • Circuit voltage above
circuit voltage above with this DTC using the manufacturer
17 threshold
threshold approved diagnostic system
Control module - Install a new audio amplifier module,

U3006-
circuit short to • Short to power refer to the new module installation
12
battery note at the top of the DTC Index
Control module - Install a new audio amplifier module,

U3006- • Circuit voltage below
circuit voltage below refer to the new module installation
16 threshold
threshold note at the top of the DTC Index
Integrated Audio Module
NOTE:
NOTE:
system).
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
terminals.

• Antenna power supply
B1B69- 12 Volt supply and test the antenna power supply
circuit - short to battery,
15 circuit high resistance circuit for short to battery and high
resistance

B1B69- 12 Volt supply • Antenna power supply
and test the antenna power supply
11 circuit circuit - short to ground
circuit for short to ground
Install a new integrated audio module,

B1D19- Compact disc • Circuit voltage below
refer to the new module installation
16 unit threshold
note at the top of the DTC Index

B1D19- Compact disc • Commanded position not
refer to the new module installation
77 unit reachable

B1D19- Compact disc
• No operation refer to the new module installation
93 unit

B1A01- • Front driver speaker
Speaker #1 and test front driver speaker circuits
11 circuits - short to ground
for short to ground

B1A01- • Front driver speaker
Speaker #1 and test front driver speaker circuits
12 circuits - short to power
for short to power
• Front driver speaker Carry out the pinpoint test associated

B1A01-
Speaker #1 circuits - resistance below with this DTC using the manufacturer
1A threshold approved diagnostic system

B1A01- Speaker #1
circuits - resistance above with this DTC using the manufacturer
1B threshold approved diagnostic system

B1A01-
Speaker #1 circuits - voltage out of with this DTC using the manufacturer
1C range approved diagnostic system

B1A02- • Front passenger speaker
Speaker #2 and test front passenger speaker
11 circuits - short to ground
circuits for short to ground

B1A02- • Front passenger speaker
Speaker #2 and test front passenger speaker
12 circuits - short to power
circuits for short to power
• Front passenger speaker Carry out the pinpoint test associated

B1A02-
Speaker #2 circuits - resistance below with this DTC using the manufacturer

B1A02-
Speaker #2 circuits - resistance above with this DTC using the manufacturer

B1A02-
Speaker #2 circuits - voltage out of with this DTC using the manufacturer
1C range approved diagnostic system

B1A03- • Rear left speaker circuits -
Speaker #3 and test rear left speaker circuits for
11 short to ground
short to ground

B1A03- • Rear left speaker circuits -
Speaker #3 and test rear left speaker circuits for
12 short to power
short to power
• Rear left speaker circuits - Carry out the pinpoint test associated
B1A03-
Speaker #3 resistance below with this DTC using the manufacturer
• Rear left speaker circuits - Carry out the pinpoint test associated
B1A03-
Speaker #3 resistance above with this DTC using the manufacturer
B1A03- • Rear left speaker circuits - Carry out the pinpoint test associated
Speaker #3 voltage out of range
1C with this DTC using the manufacturer

B1A04- • Rear right speaker circuits
Speaker #4 and test rear right speaker circuits for
11 - short to ground
short to ground

Speaker #4 and test rear right speaker circuits for
12 - short to power
short to power
• Rear right speaker circuits Carry out the pinpoint test associated
B1A04-
Speaker #4 - resistance below with this DTC using the manufacturer
• Rear right speaker circuits Carry out the pinpoint test associated
B1A04-
Speaker #4 - resistance above with this DTC using the manufacturer
13 threshold approved diagnostic system

Speaker #4 with this DTC using the manufacturer
1C - voltage out of range

B1D78- • Auxiliary input circuit -
Auxiliary input and test Auxiliary input circuits for
11 short to ground
short to ground

12 short to power
short to power

13 high resistance
high resistance

B1D79- Microphone • Microphone input circuit -
and test microphone input circuits for
11 input short to ground
short to ground

B1D79- Microphone • Microphone input circuit -
12 input short to power
short to power
B1D79- Microphone • Microphone input circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
13 input high resistance
high resistance

B1134- • Phone input circuit - short
Phone input and test phone input circuits for short
11 to ground
to ground

B1134- • Phone input circuit - short
Phone input and test phone input circuits for short
12 to power
to power

B1134- • Phone input circuit - high
Phone input and test phone input circuits for high
13 resistance
resistance
Suspect the integrated audio module,

U3000-
Control module • Internal electronic failure refer to the new module installation
49

Stored vehicle
U3000- configuration
configuration data DTC remains suspect the integrated
55 data does not received audio module, refer to the new
match
module installation note at the top of
the DTC Index

system. Check integrated audio
U3000-
Control module • Missing message module for DTCs and refer to the DTC
87
Index. Check CAN network integrity
using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
Check for additional DTCs and refer to

U3000- • Component or system
Control module DTC Index. Clear DTC and re-
98 over temperature
test/monitor condition
• Mis-match of battery
voltage, of 2 volts or Carry out the pinpoint test associated
U3003-
Battery voltage lower, between with this DTC using the manufacturer
62 integrated audio module approved diagnostic system
and RJB
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST G834560p1 :

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL
SWITCH CIRCUIT TESTS
G834560t1 : CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH
CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
Battery (86.15.01) 2. Wait one minute for the supplemental restraints system back-up power to
dissipate. 3. Disconnect the information and entertainment module connector, IP087. 4. Measure the
resistance between:
Information and entertainment module connector, IP087 pin 07, harness side
GROUND
• Is the resistance 5036.71 ohms?
-> Yes
-> No
G834560t2 : CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL MUTE SWITCH

CIRCUIT
1. PRESS and HOLD the MUTE switch 2. Measure the resistance between:
GROUND
-> Yes
-> No
Install a new steering wheel audio control switch assembly.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls (86.50.42)
G834560t3 : CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SOURCE

SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. PRESS and HOLD the SOURCE switch 2. Measure the resistance between:
GROUND
-> Yes
-> No
G834560t4 : CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SEEK DOWN

SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. OPERATE and HOLD the SEEK DOWN switch 2. Measure the resistance between:
GROUND
-> Yes
-> No
G834560t5 : CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SEEK UP

SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. OPERATE and HOLD the SEEK UP switch 2. Measure the resistance between:
GROUND
-> Yes
-> No
G834560t6 : CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL VOLUME +

SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. OPERATE and HOLD the VOLUME + switch 2. Measure the resistance between:
GROUND
-> Yes
-> No
G834560t7 : CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL VOLUME -

SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. OPERATE and HOLD the VOLUME - switch 2. Measure the resistance between:
GROUND
-> Yes
No fault is indicated with the steering wheel audio control switches or circuit. Check the integrity of
all connections, TEST the system for normal operation.
-> No

CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect the clockspring connector IP042. 2. Measure the resistance between:
Clockspring connector IP042, pin 03, component side
Clockspring connector IP042, pin 06, component side
-> Yes
-> No

CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect the clockspring connector SW001. 2. Measure the resistance between:
Clockspring connector SW001, pin 04, harness side
-> Yes
INSTALL a new clockspring.
Clockspring TEST the system for normal operation.
-> No

CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect the steering wheel audio control switch connector SW003. 2. Measure the resistance
between:
Audio control switch connector SW003, pin 04, component side

Audio control switch connector SW003, pin 01, component side
-> Yes
-> No
Install a new steering wheel audio control switch.

CIRCUIT
1. Measure the resistance between:
Audio control switch connector SW003, pin 01, harness side
-> Yes
REPAIR the circuit - audio control switch connector SW003, pin 01 to clockspring connector SW001,
pin 01. For additional information, refer to the wiring diagrams. TEST the system for normal
operation.
-> No

CIRCUIT
Audio control switch connector SW003, pin 04, harness side
-> Yes
REPAIR the circuit - audio control switch connector SW003, pin 04 to clockspring connector SW001,
pin 04. For additional information, refer to the wiring diagrams. TEST the system for normal
operation.
-> No
No fault is indicated with the steering wheel audio control switches or circuit. Check integrity of all
connections and TEST system for normal operation.

CIRCUIT
Clockspring connector IP042, pin 03, harness side
Information and entertainment module connector IP087, pin 07, harness side
-> Yes
REPAIR the circuit - clockspring connector IP042, pin 03 to information and entertainment module
connector IP087, pin 07. For additional information, refer to the wiring diagrams. TEST the system for
normal operation.
-> No

CIRCUIT
Clockspring connector IP042, pin 06, harness side
GROUND point G40AR/1
-> Yes
REPAIR the circuit - clockspring connector IP042, pin 06 to GROUND point G40AR/1. For additional
information, refer to the wiring diagrams. TEST the system for normal operation.
-> No
No fault is indicated with the steering wheel audio control switches or circuit. Check integrity of all
connections and TEST system for normal operation.
PINPOINT TEST G834560p2 : MOST

NETWORK TESTS
G834560t15 : CHECK HLDF DISPLAY
1. Check HLDF display
• Is the HLDF showing a flashing Jaguar leaper, or a blank screen?
-> Yes
-> No
No ring break fault has occurred. Suspect invalid Car Configuration File parameter faults, check
modules on MOST Network for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
G834560t16 : CHECK INTEGRITY OF MOST RING TEST CONNECTOR OPTICAL

LOOP AND FUSE RL2
1. Check the MOST ring test connector optical loop IP090 is not disconnected or open circuit and free
from damage, and fuse RL2 in the RJB is not disconnected or open circuit.
• Is the MOST ring test connector optical loop IP090 disconnected, open circuit or damaged,
or fuse RL2 in the RJB disconnected or open circuit.
-> Yes
Rectify the fault condition and re-test.
-> No
G834560t17 : INITIATE RING BREAK DIAGNOSTIC (RBD) & READ DTCs

1. Ensure fuse RL2 is installed in RJB and is in serviceable condition. 2. Set ignition status from 'OFF'
to 'ON'. 3. Clear all DTCs. 4. Remove fuse RL2 from RJB and wait for at least 10 seconds, then replace
fuse RL2 in RJB and wait for at least 30 seconds for RBD to initiate and complete. 5. Read DTCs
• Is DTC U1A1587 logged?
-> Yes
-> No
Check HLDF for additional DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index.
G834560t18 : CHECK FOR FAILURE AT INTERMEDIATE CONNECTOR TM071

PIN 1 FROM INFORMATION AND ENTERTAINMENT MODULE
1. Disconnect the MOST network intermediate connector TM071.
• Is the bright red light visible at the connector TM071, pin 1 female?
-> Yes
-> No
G834560t19 : CHECK FOR FAILURE AT FIRST HALF OF MOST NETWORK

1. Connect the Optical Bus Tester (OBT) to intermediate connector TM071, from information and
entertainment module. 2. Switch OBT 'ON' and set to 2+0 option. 3. Select the visible LED option.
• Is the Rx lamp/LED permanently 'ON' and the HLDF screen permanently displaying 'Home
menu screen' or Jaguar leaper?
-> Yes
On Low Line vehicles, check integrity of optical loop installed at intermediate connector TM071. On
High Line vehicles, fault is in second half of MOST Network. Disconnect OBT and re-connect
intermediate connector TM071. GO to Pinpoint Test G834560t21.
-> No
G834560t20 : CHECK FOR FAILURE OF OPTICAL FIBRE FROM INFORMATION

AND ENTERTAINMENT MODULE
1. Disconnect MOST connector IP088 from information and entertainment module.
• Is the bright red light visible at the connector IP088 pin 2, module side?
-> Yes
Fault is in optical fibre harness between intermediate connector TM071, pin 1 female and
information and entertainment module connector IP088, pin 2.
-> No
Install a new information and entertainment module and re-test.
G834560t21 : CHECK FOR FAILURE OF OPTICAL FIBRE BETWEEN

INTERMEDIATE CONNECTORS TM071 AND TM075
1. Disconnect intermediate connector TM075.
• Is the bright red light visible at the intermediate connector TM075, pin 2 female.
-> Yes
-> No
Fault is in optical fibre harness between intermediate connectors TM071 pin 1 and TM075 pin 2,
rectify the fault and re-test the vehicle.
G834560t22 : CHECK FOR FAILURE OF OPTICAL FIBRE BETWEEN

INTERMEDIATE CONNECTORS TM071 AND TM075
1. Connect the Optical Bus Tester (OBT) to intermediate connector TM075. 2. Switch OBT 'ON' and
set to 2+0 option. 3. Select the visible LED option.
-> Yes
Fault is in second half of MOST network. GO to Pinpoint Test G834560t48.
-> No
Fault is in optical fibre harness between intermediate connectors TM071 pin 2 and TM075 pin 1,
rectify the fault and re-test the vehicle.
G834560t23 : CHECK FOR FAILURE OF OPTICAL FIBRE TO HLDF

1. Disconnect MOST connector IP065 from HLDF.
• Is the bright red light visible at connector IP065 pin 1, harness side?
-> Yes
-> No
Fault is in optical fibre harness between intermediate connector TM071 pin 2 and HLDF connector
IP065 pin 1, rectify the fault and re-test the vehicle.
G834560t24 : CHECK FOR FAILURE AT HLDF

1. Connect the Optical Bus Tester (OBT) to HLDF connector IP065. 2. Switch OBT 'ON' and set to 2+0
option. 3. Select the visible LED option.
• Is the Rx lamp/LED permanently 'ON' and the HLDF screen permanently displaying blank
screen?
-> Yes
Check/repair power feed and ground lines to HLDF. If power feed and ground lines ok, install a new
HLDF.
-> No
G834560t25 : CHECK FOR INSTALLATION OF AUDIO AMPLIFIER

1. Check for installation of audio amplifier.
• Is there an audio amplifier installed to the vehicle?
-> Yes
-> No
G834560t26 : CHECK FOR FAILURE OF OPTICAL FIBRE TO AUDIO

AMPLIFIER
1. Disconnect MOST connector CA117 from audio amplifier.
• Is the bright red light visible at the connector CA117 pin 1, harness side?
-> Yes
-> No
G834560t27 : CHECK FOR FAILURE AT INTERMEDIATE CONNECTOR CA119

1. Disconnect intermediate connector CA119.
• Is the bright red light visible at the intermediate connector CA119, pin 1 female?
-> Yes
Fault is in optical fibre harness between intermediate connector CA119 pin 1 and audio amplifier
connector CA117 pin 1, rectify the fault and re-test the vehicle.
-> No
Fault is in optical fibre harness between intermediate connector CA119 pin 1 and HLDF connector
IP065 pin 2, rectify the fault and re-test vehicle.
G834560t28 : CHECK FOR FAILURE AT AUDIO AMPLIFIER
1. Connect the Optical Bus Tester (OBT) to audio amplifier connector CA117. 2. Switch OBT 'ON' and
set to 2+0 option. 3. Select the visible LED option.
-> Yes
Check/repair power feed and ground lines to audio amplifier. If power feed and ground lines ok,
install a new audio amplifier.
-> No
G834560t29 : CHECK FOR FAILURE OF OPTICAL FIBRE TO INTEGRATED

AUDIO MODULE
1. Disconnect MOST connector IP059 at integrated audio module.
• Is the bright red light visible at the connector IP059 pin 1 harness side?
-> Yes
-> No
If no audio amplifier is installed, the fault is in the optical fibre harness between HLDF connector
IP065 pin 2 and integrated audio module connector IP059 pin 1, rectify the fault and re-test the
vehicle. If audio module is installed. GO to Pinpoint Test G834560t30.
G834560t30 : CHECK FOR FAILURE AT INTERMEDIATE CONNECTOR CA119

PIN 2
1. Disconnect intermediate connector CA119.
• Is the bright red light visible at the intermediate connector CA119 pin 2 male?
-> Yes
Fault is in the optical fibre harness between intermediate connector CA119 pin 2 and integrated
audio module connector IP059 pin 1, rectify the fault and re-test the vehicle.
-> No
Fault is in the optical fibre harness between intermediate connector CA119 pin 2 and audio amplifier
connector CA117 pin 2, rectify the fault and re-test the vehicle.
G834560t31 : CHECK FOR FAILURE AT INTEGRATED AUDIO MODULE
1. Connect the Optical Bus Tester (OBT) to integrated audio module connector IP059. 2. Switch OBT
'ON' and set to 2+0 option. 3. Select the visible LED option.
-> Yes
Check/repair power feed and ground lines to integrated audio module. If power feed and ground
lines ok, install a new integrated audio module.
-> No
G834560t32 : CHECK FOR FAILURE OF OPTICAL FIBRE TO MOST TEST

CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect MOST test connector IP090.
• Is the bright red light visible at the connector IP090 pin 1 harness side?
-> Yes
-> No
Fault is in the optical fibre harness between integrated audio module connector IP059 pin 2 and
MOST test connector IP090 pin 1, rectify the fault and re-test the vehicle.
G834560t33 : CHECK FOR FAILURE AT MOST TEST CONNECTOR OPTICAL

LOOP
1. Connect the Optical Bus Tester (OBT) to MOST test connector IP090. 2. Switch OBT 'ON' and set to
2+0 option. 3. Select the visible LED option.
-> Yes
Install a new MOST test connector optical loop.
-> No
G834560t34 : CHECK FOR FAILURE OF OPTICAL FIBRE TO INFORMATION
AND ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL MODULE
1. Disconnect MOST connector IP088 from information and entertainment control module.
• Is the bright red light visible at connector IP088 pin 1, harness side?
-> Yes
No fault identified with the MOST network. Check integrity of all MOST network connections, and re-
test vehicle.
-> No
Fault is in the optical fibre harness between MOST test connector IP090 pin 2 and information and
entertainment module connector IP088 pin 1, rectify the fault and re-test the vehicle.
G834560t48 : CHECK FOR INSTALLATION OF NAVIGATION MODULE

1. Check for installation of navigation control module.
• Is a navigation control module installed to the vehicle?
-> Yes
-> No
G834560t35 : CHECK FOR FAILURE OF OPTICAL FIBRE TO NAVIGATION

MODULE
1. Disconnect MOST connector TM084 from navigation module.
• Is the bright red light visible at connector TM084 pin 1, harness side?
-> Yes
-> No
Fault is in the optical fibre harness between MOST intermediate connector TM075 pin 2 and
navigation module connector TM084 pin 1, rectify the fault and re-test the vehicle.
G834560t45 : CHECK FOR FAILURE AT NAVIGATION MODULE

1. Connect the Optical Bus Tester (OBT) to navigation module connector TM084. 2. Switch OBT 'ON'
and set to 2+0 option. 3. Select the visible LED option.
-> Yes
Check/repair power feed and ground lines to navigation module. If power feed and ground lines ok,
install a new navigation module.
-> No
G834560t36 : CHECK FOR INSTALLATION OF SATELLITE RADIO MODULE

1. Check for installation of satellite radio module.
• Is a satellite radio module installed to the vehicle?
-> Yes
-> No
G834560t37 : CHECK FOR FAILURE OF OPTICAL FIBRE TO SATELLITE RADIO

MODULE
1. Disconnect MOST connector TM100 from satellite radio module.
• Is the bright red light visible at connector TM100 pin 1 , harness side?
-> Yes
-> No
If navigation module is installed to the vehicle - the fault is in the optical fibre harness between
navigation module connector TM084 pin 2 and satellite radio module connector TM100 pin 1. If
navigation module is not installed to the vehicle - the fault is in the optical fibre harness between
intermediate connector TM075 pin 2 and satellite radio module connector TM100 pin 1.
G834560t38 : CHECK FOR FAILURE AT SATELLITE RADIO MODULE

1. Connect the Optical Bus Tester (OBT) to satellite radio module connector TM100. 2. Switch OBT
'ON' and set to 2+0 option. 3. Select the visible LED option.
-> Yes
Check/repair power feed and ground lines to satellite radio module. If power feed and ground lines
ok, install a new satellite radio module.
-> No
G834560t39 : CHECK FOR INSTALLATION OF BLUETOOTH MODULE

1. Check for installation of bluetooth module.
• Is a bluetooth module installed to the vehicle?
-> Yes
-> No
If satellite radio module is not installed. GO to Pinpoint Test G834560t43.
If satellite radio module is installed. GO to Pinpoint Test G834560t44.
G834560t40 : CHECK FOR FAILURE OF OPTICAL FIBRE TO BLUETOOTH

MODULE
1. Disconnect MOST connector TM023 from bluetooth module.
• Is the bright red light visible at connector TM023 pin 1, harness side?
-> Yes
-> No
If satellite radio module is installed to vehicle - fault is in optical fibre harness between bluetooth
module connector TM023 pin 1 and satellite radio module connector TM100 pin 2, rectify the fault
and re-test the vehicle. If satellite radio module is not installed - fault is in optical fibre harness
between bluetooth module connector TM023 pin 1 and navigation module TM084 pin 2, rectify the
fault and re-test vehicle.
G834560t41 : CHECK FOR FAILURE AT BLUETOOTH MODULE

1. Connect the Optical Bus Tester (OBT) to satellite bluetooth module connector TM023. 2. Switch
OBT 'ON' and set to 2+0 option. 3. Select the visible LED option.
-> Yes
Check/repair power feed and ground lines to bluetooth module. If power feed and ground lines ok,
install a new bluetooth module.
-> No
G834560t42 : CHECK FOR FAILURE OF OPTICAL FIBRE FROM BLUETOOTH

MODULE
1. Disconnect MOST intermediate connector TM075.
• Is the bright red light visible at connector TM075 pin 1 male?
-> Yes
No fault is identified with the MOST network. Check integrity of all MOST connectors and re-test the
vehicle.
-> No
Fault is in the optical fibre harness between bluetooth module connector TM023 pin 2 and
intermediate connector TM075 pin 1, rectify the fault and re-test the vehicle.
G834560t43 : CHECK FOR FAILURE OF OPTICAL FIBRE FROM NAVIGATION

MODULE
• Is the bright red light visible at the intermediate connector TM075 pin 1 male?
-> Yes
vehicle.
-> No
Fault is in optical fibre harness between intermediate connector TM075 pin 1 and navigation module
connector TM084 pin 2, rectify the fault and re-test the vehicle.
G834560t44 : CHECK FOR FAILURE OF OPTICAL FIBRE FROM SATELLITE

RADIO MODULE
• Is the bright red light visible at the intermediate connector TM075 pin 1 male?
-> Yes
vehicle.
-> No
Fault is in optical fibre harness between intermediate connector TM075 pin 1 and satellite radio
module connector TM100 pin 2, rectify the fault and re-test the vehicle.
Cellular Phone
For a detailed description of the telephone system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
Cellular Phone

NOTE:
Prior to starting any diagnostics, ensure that the customer handset is on the Jaguar Approved
Phone List (as found in the vehicle technology information on the external Jaguar website). If the
customer handset is not on the approved phone list it should NOT be used when carrying out
these diagnostics, the technician should test using an approved handset only.
1 . Verify the customer concern by operating the telephone.
• Electrical connectors
• Microphone
• Wiring harness for damage or corrosion
• Bluetooth antenna
• Fuses
Index.
System/Carrier Concerns - All Systems

Dropped calls, bad connections, noisy audio and other intermittent symptoms usually indicate a
system or cellular carrier concern, and are not the fault of the phone itself. Such symptoms may
occur in situations such as the following:
• In certain geographic areas (for example: areas of excessive foliage or hills) or at the edge of
coverage areas
• At the same place each day
• At the same time each day
• Under bridges, tunnels, in lower freeways, or in congested downtown areas
If the customer phone exhibits any of the above symptoms or symptoms occur under the above
conditions, the customer or the dealer should contact customer assistance at their particular cellular
provider/carrier.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Action
Unable to pair • GO to Pinpoint Test G1296535p1.
Not Auto Connecting • GO to Pinpoint Test G1296535p2.
Poor Quality Audio • GO to Pinpoint Test G1296535p3.
No Audio to 3rd Party • GO to Pinpoint Test G1296535p4.
No Audio from 3rd Party • GO to Pinpoint Test G1296535p5.
No Audio • GO to Pinpoint Test G1296535p6.
DTC Index
NOTE:
NOTE:
diagnostic system).
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
terminals.

Bluetooth
B1A5613 • Open circuit diagrams and test blue tooth
antenna
antenna circuit for open circuit

diagrams and test microphone input
Microphone • Signal amplitude <
B1D7984 circuit for short/open circuit. Check
input minimum
integrated audio module for DTCs
and refer to DTC Index
Install a new telephone module,

Private Bus • BT chipset
U1A0088 refer to the new module installation
circuit communications failure

• Initial configuration not manufacturer approved diagnostic
U210000 Control module complete system. If DTC remains, carry out
CAN network tests

• Configuration
U210100 Control module manufacturer approved diagnostic
incompatible
system. If DTC remains, suspect the
telephone module, refer to the new
module installation note at the top
of the DTC Index
Re-configure the telephone module.

If the DTC remains install a new
U300044 Control module • Data memory failure telephone module, refer to the new
of the DTC Index
Re-configure the telephone module.

If the DTC remains install a new
U300045 Control module • Program memory failure telephone module, refer to the new
of the DTC Index

Stored vehicle
configuration
U300055 configuration data DTC remains suspect the telephone
data does not received module, refer to the new module
match
installation note at the top of the
DTC Index

system. Check telephone module for
U300087 Control module • Missing message DTCs and refer to the DTC Index.
Check CAN network integrity using
diagnostic system
Check for additional DTCs and refer

• Component or system to DTC Index. Clear DTC and re-
U300098 Control module
over temperature test/monitor condition for re-
occurrence
• Mis-match of battery Carry out any pinpoint tests

voltage, of 2 volts or
associated with this DTC using the
U300362 Battery voltage lower, between
telephone module and manufacturer approved diagnostic
RJB system
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST G1296535p1 : Unable to

Pair
G1296535t1 : 'No Phone Fitted' Display
1. Carry out checks to determine if 'No Phone Fitted' is shown on vehicle display.
• Is 'No Phone Fitted' displayed?
-> Yes
-> No
Locate the connected telephone and if not Customer telephone, disconnect from the system.
G1296535t2 : Telephone Bluetooth Device Search

1. Carry out Bluetooth device search using Customer handset.
• Is 'Jaguar' identified in Bluetooth device list?
-> Yes
Select device from list, then continue with diagnosis. GO to Pinpoint Test G1296535t3.
-> No
Carry out further Bluetooth device search, to a maximum of 4 times, waiting approximately 20
seconds between searches. If 'Jaguar' still not identified in Bluetooth device list, set ignition status to
OFF, wait approximately 30 seconds and set ignition status to ON. Carry out further Bluetooth device
search, to a maximum of 4 times, waiting approximately 20 seconds between searches. If 'Jaguar' still
not identified in Bluetooth device list, contact your local in market support for further assistance.
G1296535t3 : Telephone Handset Error

1. Check for any error shown on the telephone handset when 'Jaguar' is selected from the Bluetooth
device list.
• Was an error immediately shown on the telephone handset?
-> Yes
Wait approximately 10 seconds then re-attempt selection, to a maximum of 4 times, waiting
approximately 10 seconds between each attempt. If error still being displayed, contact your local in
market support for assistance.
-> No
Enter PIN '1313' then continue with diagnosis. GO to Pinpoint Test G1296535t4.
G1296535t4 : PIN Entry Status

1. Check for successful PIN entry.
• Was PIN entry successful?
-> Yes
-> No
Wait approximately 10 seconds then re-attempt PIN entry, to a maximum of 4 times, waiting
approximately 10 seconds between each attempt. If PIN entry is still un-successful, contact your local
in market support for assistance.
G1296535t5 : 'No Phone Fitted' Display

1. Carry out checks to determine if 'No Phone Fitted' is still shown on vehicle display.
• Is 'No Phone Fitted' still displayed?
-> Yes
From the telephone handset, select the connect option for the 'Land Rover' device identified in the
Bluetooth device list. If 'No Phone Fitted' is still displayed, suspect a telephone handset fault. Carry
out Pinpoint test again using known good telephone handset.
-> No
The telephone is paired and connected to the system. No further action is required for this symptom.
PINPOINT TEST G1296535p2 : Not

Automatically Connecting
G1296535t6 : Bluetooth Module Paired Device List
1. Carry out checks to determine if the Customer telephone is shown in the Bluetooth Module paired
device list.
• Is the Customer telephone in the Bluetooth Module paired device list?
-> Yes
-> No
Carry out Unable to Pair Pinpoint Test. GO to Pinpoint Test G1296535p1.
G1296535t7 : Customer Handset Paired Device List

1. Carry out checks to determine if the Bluetooth Module is shown in the Customer telephone paired
device list.
• Is the Bluetooth Module in the Customer telephone paired device list?
-> Yes
-> No
Carry out Unable to Pair Pinpoint Test. GO to Pinpoint Test G1296535p1.
G1296535t8 : Customer Telephone in Position 1

1. Carry out checks to determine if the Customer telephone is in position 1 in the Bluetooth Module
paired device list.
• Is the Customer telephone in position 1?
-> Yes
-> No
Advise Customer that auto connection will only be attempted with the device that is shown in
position 1 in Bluetooth Module paired device list.
G1296535t9 : Check for DTC B1A56-13

1. Using Manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for DTC B1A56-13.
• Is DTC B1A56-13 logged?
-> Yes
Carry out remedial actions as outlined in DTC Index. If symptom remains, contact your local in market
support for assistance.
-> No
G1296535t10 : Bluetooth Connection
1. Carry out checks to determine if Bluetooth connection icon is shown on Customer Bluetooth
telephone screen but shows 'No Phone Fitted' on vehicle screen.
• Is Bluetooth connection icon shown on the Customer handset but 'No Phone Fitted'
displayed on vehicle screen?
-> Yes
-> No
G1296535t11 : 'Land Rover' Authorisation

1. Carry out checks to determine if 'Land Rover' is authorised in the Customer Bluetooth telephone
device list menu.
• Is 'Land Rover' authorised in the Customer Bluetooth telephone device list menu?
-> Yes
-> No
Advise customer that 'Land Rover' needs to be authorised in the Customer Bluetooth telephone
device list menu, or operator intervention may be required to manually authorise connection.
G1296535t12 : Search for Devices Screen

1. Select the search for devices button on the vehicle display.
• Does pressing the search for devices button bring up the searching screen on the vehicle
display?
-> Yes
Contact your local in market support for assistance.
-> No
G1296535t13 : Cycle Ignition and Check Search for Devices Screen

1. Lock vehicle (wait 60s) before unlocking and turning Ignition status back to ON.
• Does pressing the search for devices button bring up the searching screen on the vehicle
display?
-> Yes
No further action required for this Symptom. Possible intermitent fault.
-> No
G1296535t14 : Paired Device

1. Check Customer telephone paired device list to establish which device the Customer telephone is
connected to.
• Is the Customer telephone connected to the vehicle?
-> Yes
Lock vehicle (wait 60s) before unlocking and turning Ignition status back to ON. If Not Automatically
Connecting, contact you local in market support for assistance.
-> No
Using the Customer telephone controls, disconnect from the currently connected device and delete
from paired device list. Lock vehicle (wait for 60s) before unlocking and turning Igition status to ON. If
Not Automatically Connecting, contact your local in market support for assistance.
PINPOINT TEST G1296535p3 : Poor

Quality Audio
G1296535t15 : Microphone Installation
1. Check that the microphone is installed in the correct location/orientation.
• Is the microphone installed in the correct location/orientation?
-> Yes
-> No
Install microphone to correct location/orientation.
G1296535t16 : Signal Strength

1. Check the signal strength displayed on the telephone handset.
• Are at least two signal strength bars shown on the telephone handset display?
-> Yes
-> No
Suspect GSM Network issue. This can explain intermittent audio and dropped calls, and the inability
to initiate calls.
G1296535t17 : Poor Audio From Third Party Only

1. Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is poor audio from the Third Party only.
• Is the poor audio from the Third Party only?
-> Yes
Suspect GSM Network issue. This can explain intermittent audio and dropped calls, and the inability
to initiate calls.
-> No
G1296535t18 : Poor Audio To Third Party Only

1. Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is poor audio to the Third Party only.
• Is the poor audio to the Third Party only?
-> Yes
Check and install a new microphone as necessary.
-> No
G1296535t19 : Poor Audio with Vehicle Stationary

1. Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is poor audio when the vehicle is stationary
only.
• Is the poor audio when the vehicle is stationary only?
-> Yes
Check and install a new microphone as necessary.
-> No
G1296535t20 : Third Party Moving Vehicle

1. Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if the Third Party is in a moving vehicle.
• Is the Third Party in a moving vehicle?

-> Yes
There are limitations to the way the system can improve audio, and in this situation it is not possible
to determine the source of the audio degradation.
-> No
G1296535t21 : Customer Hearing Echo

1. Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if the Customer is hearing an echo.
• Is the Customer hearing an echo?
-> Yes
Echo from the Third Party is not vehicle failure, it is the Third Party set-up. No further action is
required for this symptom.
-> No
PINPOINT TEST G1296535p4 : No Audio

To Third Party
G1296535t22 : Microphone Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
1. Using the Manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for any logged microphone DTCs in
Audio Front Control module.
• Is DTC B1D79-01 logged?
-> Yes
Carry out diagnosis of electrical failure as advised in Action column of DTC Index.
-> No

From Third Party
G1296535t23 : 'In Call' Display
1. Carry out checks to determine if 'In Call' is shown on the vehicle display.
• Is vehicle display showing 'In Call'?

-> Yes
-> No
Call has ended. No further action is required for this symptom.

G1296535t24 : Audio From Third Party
1. Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is Audio from the Third Party.
• Is there Audio from the Third Party?
-> Yes
-> No
Refer to the 'No Audio From Third Party' Pinpoint test. GO to Pinpoint Test G1296535p5.
G1296535t25 : Audio To Third Party

1. Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is Audio to the Third Party.
• Is there Audio to the Third Party?
-> Yes
-> No
Refer to the 'No Audio To Third Party' Pinpoint test. GO to Pinpoint Test G1296535p4.
G1296535t26 : CD or Radio Audio

1. Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is Audio from the CD or Radio.
• Is there Audio from the CD or Radio?
-> Yes
-> No
Suspect MOST ring fault, refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check/rectify MOST ring as
necessary.
G1296535t27 : Telephone Handset Audio

1. Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is Audio from the telephone handset.
• Is there Audio from the telephone handset?
-> Yes
Ensure vehicle is parked. Disconnect and reconnect handset. If issue not resolved, contact your local
in market support for assistance.
-> No
Contact you local in market support for assistance.
415-01 : Audio Unit
Specifications
Specifications
lb- lb-
Item Nm
ft in
Amplifier to bracket - screw 2.5 - 22
Audio/CD module and climate control module assembly to instrument panel -
3 - 27
bolt
Audio/CD and climate control modules to assembly bracket - bolt 3 - 27
Audio/CD and climate control modules to assembly bracket - screw 2.5 - 22
Radio frequency interference suppressor to engine cover bracket - bolt 10 7 88
Steering wheel audio controls - bolt 3.5 2.5 31
Audio System
COMPONENT LOCATION
1 Integrated control panel
2 Touch Screen Display (TSD)
3 Remote audio switches
4 Auxiliary Universal Serial Bus (USB) unit (from 2009 Model Year (MY))
5 Auxiliary input panel (from 2009 MY)
6 Integrated audio module
7 Information and entertainment Module
INTRODUCTION
The audio system contains the following functions:
• Six disc CD autochanger.

• AM/FM tuner.
• Interface Protocol Option Devices (iPod) and USB connectivity (from 2009 MY).
The audio system is available in two versions, standard and premium. The standard audio system
uses an internal amplifier to drive the system speakers. The premium system uses an external
amplifier and subwoofer assembly to drive the speakers. For additional information, refer to
Speakers (415-03 Speakers)
Control of the audio system is via the integrated control panel and the TSD, located in the center of
the instrument panel, and the remote audio switches on the steering wheel.
Control signals from the integrated control panel are relayed on the medium speed CAN (controller
area network) bus to the information and entertainment module. The information and
entertainment module relays the control signals to the rest of the audio system on the Media
Orientated System Transport (MOST) ring. The information and entertainment module is the timing
master for the MOST ring and also hosts a gateway function between the medium speed CAN
(controller area network) bus and the MOST ring. On premium audio systems the audio signals are
sent on the MOST ring from the integrated audio module to the amplifier. The control signal from the
remote audio switches to the information and entertainment module consists of an analogue voltage
from a resistive ladder.
The iPod and USB connectivity allows audio files on portable media players and mass storage devices
(i.e. portable audio devices) to be played through the speakers of the audio system. The audio
system supports portable audio devices with a storage capacity up to 256 GB (approximately 65,000
music tracks).
The iPod and USB connectivity is provided by:
• • An auxiliary input panel, installed in the cubby box of the floor console.
• • An auxiliary USB unit, attached to the RH rear quarter panel, behind the trim of the luggage
compartment.
The auxiliary input panel provides the interface between the portable audio device and the vehicle’s
audio system. An iPod port and a USB port are located in the top of the auxiliary input panel,
underneath a protective rubber cover. An iPod connector lead is supplied with the vehicle. Portable
audio devices can be connected to both ports at the same time.
The iPod and USB ports both incorporate a charging function. The maximum charging current
supplied is 500 ma.
Auxiliary Input Panel
1 USB port
2 iPod port
iPod Connector Lead
The auxiliary USB unit translates the electronic signals from the auxiliary input panel into optical
signals and transmits them on the MOST ring.
Operation of the portable audio device is controlled from the TSD via the integrated audio module.
For road safety reasons, the normal control interface of the portable device is disabled when it is
plugged into the auxiliary input panel, and it can only be controlled from the TSD.
Portable Audio Device Selection on TSD
Some MP3 players have a file system that is not supported by the audio system. To use one of these
MP3 players with the audio system, the MP3 player must be set to USB Removable Device mode or
Mass Storage Device mode (see the MP3 player manufacturer’s information for further details). Only
files that have been added to the MP3 player in these modes can be played on the audio system.
A number of other vehicle systems are operated from the TSD and the integrated control panel, or
have inputs into the audio system. These include:
• Air conditioning system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (412-03 Air
Conditioning)
• Navigation. For additional information, refer to Navigation System (419-07 Navigation
System)
• Parking aid. For additional information, refer to Parking Aid (413-13 Parking Aid)
• Telephone. For additional information, refer to Cellular Phone (419-08 Cellular Phone)
Software in the information and entertainment module generates the graphics for the TSD.
CONTROL DIAGRAM - STANDARD AUDIO SYSTEM (UP TO 2009 MY)

NOTE:
A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus; P = MOST ring
1 Auxiliary Junction Box (AJB)
2 TSD
4 To speakers
5 Clock spring

8 Information and entertainment module
CONTROL DIAGRAM - STANDARD AUDIO SYSTEM (FROM 2009 MY)

NOTE:
1 AJB
2 TSD
3 Auxiliary USB unit

5 To speakers
6 Auxiliary input panel
7 Clock spring
CONTROL DIAGRAM - PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM (UP TO 2009 MY)

NOTE:
1 AJB
2 TSD
3 Audio amplifier
4 To speakers
7 Clock spring
CONTROL DIAGRAM - PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM (FROM 2009 MY)

NOTE:
1 AJB
2 TSD
3 To speakers
4 Audio amplifier
7 Auxiliary input panel
8 Clock spring

Audio System
For additional information, refer to<<415-00>>
Amplifier (86.50.10)
Removal
NOTE:
The component is situated in the passenger footwell. LHD is illustrated the procedure to remove
the component on a RHD vehicle is similar.
1 . Remove the instrument panel assembly.

2 . Remove the heater duct.
3

4 . Remove the subwoofer cover.
Remove the 4 bolts.
5
. CAUTION: Cover fibre optic cable connectors to minimise dust ingress and avoid
bending the cables in a radius of less than 30 mm.
Carefully disconnect the MOST connector.
6 . Remove the amplifier.

Installation
1 . Install the amplifier.
2 . Connect the electrical connectors.
Connect the MOST connector.
4
Install the carpet.
5 . Install the heater duct.
Install the lampholder.
6 . Install the instrument panel assembly.

Audio Unit (86.50.03)
Removal
NOTE:
This component is easily recognised as a CD multichanger, it is however an audio module and

links to the MOST.

2 . Remove the navigation screen module.

For additional information, refer to Navigation System Display Module (86.62.07)
3 . Release the audio/CD module and climatic control assembly.
Remove the 4 module bracket Torx bolts.
4
. CAUTION: Care must be taken to avoid damage to the mating surfaces.
Separate the climatic control and audio/CD module from the module bracket.
Remove 2 Torx screws securing the navigation screen to the climatic
control assembly.
Remove the 4 Torx bolts.
5 . Remove the CD unit.
Installation
1 NOTE:
.
Carefully check the CD access slot in the climatic control assembly is aligned to the CD
unit after tightening the screws. This is a visual check only, do not attempt to probe the
CD unit with a sharp object or load a CD .
Carefully install the audio/CD module to the climatic control assembly.
Tighten the Torx screws.
2 . Install the climatic control assembly and audio/CD module to the module bracket.
Install and tighten the navigation screen Torx screws.
Install the CD module bracket Torx bolts and tighten to 6 Nm (4 lb.ft).
Install the climatic control assembly Torx bolts and tighten to 6 Nm (4

lb.ft).
3 . Install the navigation screen module.

For additional information, refer to Navigation System Display Module (86.62.07)


Removal
NOTE:
This procedure is identical to the removal of the steering wheel speed control switch.
1 . Remove the steering wheel switch assembly.

For additional information, refer to Speed Control Switch (19.75.25)
Installation
For additional information, refer to Speed Control Switch (19.75.25)
415-02 : Antenna
Specifications
Specifications
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in

Body earth point - nut 9 7 80
Electric AM/FM antenna 9 7 80
FM ariel splitter module - nut 7 5 62
Antenna
COMPONENT LOCATION
1 VICS beacon antenna (Japan only)
2 Amplitude Modulation (AM)/Frequency Modulation (FM) electric antenna
3 FM antenna signal splitter
4 GPS antenna
5 Bluetooth antenna
INTRODUCTION
The antenna systems on the vehicle cover the following functions:
• AM/FM radio reception

• Bluetooth connection with the Telephone Control Module
• FM reception for the VICS/TMC function of the navigation system
• Global Positioning System (GPS) signals.
GPS ANTENNA
The GPS antenna is located in the rear liftgate spoiler.
BLUETOOTH ANTENNA
The Bluetooth Antenna is located centrally behind the rear seat. The antenna is used to connect the
telephone control module to a Bluetooth compatible phone. The vehicle audio system can then be
used for making and recieving telephone calls hands free. For additional information, refer to
Cellular Phone (419-08 Cellular Phone)
ELECTRIC AM/FM ANTENNA

The electric AM/FM antenna is located on the rear RH quarter of the vehicle. The antenna is
controlled by the Integrated Audio Module, which supplies power to the antenna motor. The
antenna is extended when the radio is switched on and retracted when the system is switched off or
the ignition is switched off.
AM/FM ANTENNA AND AMPLIFIER - 08 MODEL YEAR ONWARDS
1 Antenna
2 FM amplifier
On all vehicles from 08MY, the AM/FM antenna is located in the rear spoiler. The antenna has a
hardwire connection to the amplifier which is mounted on the inner Left-Hand (LH) side of the lift
gate, behind the trim panel. The amplifier is held in place by a steel strap. The amplifier is connected
to the integrated audio module, via the FM antenna signal splitter, by a coaxial cable.
On coupe models, ground for the antenna amplifier is provided by a strap connected to the lift gate
hinge. On convertible models a block connected directly to the amplifier provides the ground
through the vehicle body.
FM ANTENNA SIGNAL SPLITTER

The FM antenna signal splitter is located in the luggage compartment just below the RH rear lamp
cluster. The splitter divides the recieved FM signal between the Intergrated Audio Module and the
navigation computer. The navigation computer uses the FM signal for TMC information For
additional information, refer to Navigation System (419-07 Navigation System)
.
VICS BEACON ANTENNA (Japan only)
The VICS beacon antenna is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel adjacent to the
windshield. The antenna receives infra red and microwave data transmissions from roadside
transmitters.
SDARS ANTENNA
Where fitted the SDARS antenna is located in the center of the liftgate just in front of the spoiler. The
antenna recieves satellite radio transmissions.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
Upto 08 Model Year

NOTE:
A=Hardwired; P=MOST; T=Coaxial

1 SDARS Antenna (where fitted)
2 VICS beacon antenna (Japan)
3 GPS antenna

5 AM/FM electric antenna
7 Navigation computer
8 Telephone control module
9 Bluetooth antenna
10 SDARS module
From 08 Model Year

NOTE:
A=Hardwired; P=MOST; T=Coaxial

1 SDARS Antenna (where fitted)
2 VICS beacon antenna (Japan)
3 GPS antenna

5 AM/FM antenna amplifier
9 Bluetooth antenna
10 AM/FM antenna
11 SDARS module
Antenna
For diagnosis and testing information.
Audio System
Antenna (86.51.17.60)
Removal
1 . Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel.
2 . Raise the vehicle on the lift.
3 . Release the antenna.
Remove the 2 nuts.
4 . Lower the vehicle.
5 . Remove the antenna.
Disconnect the antenna cable.
Disconnect the antenna earth strap.

Installation
1 . Install the antenna.
Connect the antenna cable.
Connect the antenna earth strap.
2 . Raise the vehicle on the lift.
3 . Secure the antenna.
4 . Lower the vehicle.

5 . Install the RH rear quarter trim panel.
415-03 : Speakers
Specifications
Specifications
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in

Front door speaker - screw 2 - 18
Subwoofer speaker - screw 5 4 44
Subwoofer speaker cover - bolt 5 4 44
Subwoofer speaker housing - bolt 5 4 44
Subwoofer speaker housing - nut 5 4 44
Subwoofer speaker housing - screw 5 4 44
Quarter panel speaker - screw 2 - 18
Speakers
COMPONENT LOCATION-STANDARD AUDIO SYSTEM
1 Front RH high range speaker
2 Front RH mid/low range speaker
3 Rear RH mid/low range speaker
4 Rear LH mid/low range speaker
5 Front LH mid/low range speaker
6 Front LH high range speaker
INTRODUCTION
The standard speaker system comprises 6 speakers that are driven by the Integrated Audio Modules
internal amplifier.
CONTROL DIAGRAM-STANDARD AUDIO SYSTEM
NOTE:
A=Hardwired

7 Integrated Audio Module
COMPONENT LOCATION-PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
6 Subwoofer and power amplifier assembly
8 Center speaker
INTRODUCTION
Premium audio system is a 7 speaker system which is driven by a Dolby Prologic II Audio amplifier.
The subwoofer is located in the passenger footwell behind a false panel inside its own enclosure. The
Dolby Prologic II amplifier is attached to the front of the subwoofer enclosure.
CONTROL DIAGRAM-PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM

NOTE:
A=Hardwired
2 Center speaker
6 Subwoofer
9 Power amplifier
Speakers
For diagnosis and testing information.
Audio System
Front Door Speaker (86.50.13)

Removal
1 . Remove the front door trim panel.
For additional information, refer to Front Door Trim Panel (76.34.01)
2 . Remove the front door speaker.
Installation
1 . Install the front door speaker.
Tighten the Torx bolts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
2 . Install the front door trim panel.

For additional information, refer to Front Door Trim Panel (76.34.01)
Front Door Tweeter Speaker (86.50.63)
Removal
1 . Remove the exterior mirror trim panel.
2 . Release the speaker tweeter.
Release from the clips.

Installation
1 . Install the speaker tweeter.
Release from the clips.
2 . Install the exterior mirror trim panel.

Subwoofer Speaker (86.51.05)
Removal
1 . Remove the instrument panel assembly.
2 . Remove the heater duct.
3
Remove the 4 bolts.

5 . NOTE:
Remove the subwoofer.
6 . Remove the amplifier.

7 . Release the subwoofer speaker housing
Remove the 2 nuts.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove both speaker housing support brackets.
8
. CAUTION: Cover fibre optic cable connectors to minimise dust ingress and avoid
bending the cables in a radius of less than 30 mm.
Remove the subwoofer speaker housing.
Carefully disconnect the MOST connector.
Installation
1 . Install the subwoofer speaker housing.
Install the brackets.
Install the screws.
2 . Connect the subwoofer speaker housing electrical connectors.
Connect the MOST connector.
3 . Install the amplifier.
4 . Install the subwoofer.
Install the screws.

6
Install the carpet.
7 . Install the heater duct.
Install the lampholder.
8 . Install the instrument panel assembly.

Quarter Panel Speaker - 2-Door (86.50.12)
Removal
1 . Remove the rear quarter trim panel.
For additional information, refer to Rear Quarter Trim Panel - 2-Door (76.13.73)
2 . Remove the quarter panel speaker.
Installation
1 . Install the quarter panel speaker.
Install and tighten the Torx screws.
2 . Install the rear quarter trim panel.

For additional information, refer to Rear Quarter Trim Panel - 2-Door (76.13.73)
Quarter Panel Speaker - Convertible
(86.50.12)
Removal
1 . Remove the rear quarter trim panel.
For additional information, refer to Rear Quarter Trim Panel - Convertible (76.13.73)
2 . Remove the quarter panel speaker.
Installation
1 . Install the quarter panel speaker.
Install and tighten the Torx screws.
2 . Install the rear quarter trim panel.

For additional information, refer to Rear Quarter Trim Panel - Convertible (76.13.73)
417 : Lighting
417-01 : Exterior Lightning
Specifications
Specifications
Bulbs
Lamp Bulb Type

Number plate lamp W5WL
Reverse lamp LED (non-serviceable)
Side repeater indicator WY5W
Headlamp unit:
Cornering lamp H8
Dip and main beam projector unit D1S35W
Direction indicator PY21W
Side lamp W5W
Side marker WY5W
Rear lamp unit:
Direction indicator PY21W Silver Vision
Side marker W5W
Stop and tail P21/5W
Tail lamp W5W
Fog lamps:
Front fog lamp H11 55W
Rear fog lamp LED (non-serviceable)
Adjustment
Item Adjustment Setting

Headlamp aim (ROW) -1% +/- 0.1%
Headlamp aim (NAS) -0.7%
Fog lamp aim -2% +/- 0.5%
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in

Headlamp assembly - bolt 6 4 53
Headlamp leveling, front sensor - bolt 20 15 -
Headlamp leveling module - bolt 4 3 35
Headlamp leveling, rear sensor - bolt 20 15 -
High-mounted stop lamp - screw 2 - 18
Rear lamp assembly to gate/lid - nut 2.5 - 22
Rear lamp assembly to fender - nut 2 - 18
General procedures
Front Fog Lamp Adjustment

1. Align the beam setting equipment to one fog lamp.
2. NOTE:
The fog lamp beam should be set at 1.2% below the horizontal and parallel.
Check the fog lamp beam alignment.
3. Turn the steering on to full lock for access.
4. NOTE:
Wheel shown removed for clarity.
Release the front of the fender splash shield.

• Remove the 7 Torx bolts.
• Tie the splash shield aside.
5. Adjust the fog lamp using the thumb wheel.

6. Install the fender splash shield.
• Tighten the Torx bolts.
7. To adjust the second fog lamp, repeat the above procedure.

Headlamp Adjustment (86.40.18)
1. Align the headlamp beam setting equipment to one headlamp.
2. NOTE:
The headlamp setting is 1.2 % below horizontal and parallel.
Check the headlamp beam alignment.
3. Open the hood.
4. Adjust the headlamps with an Allen Key.
5. To adjust the second headlamp, repeat the above procedure.

Exterior Lighting
COMPONENT LOCATION
1 Headlamp leveling/AFS control module

2 Light sensor
3 Rear height sensor
4 Turn signal indicator repeater lamp (2 off)
5 Cornering lamp
6 Headlamp power washer
7 Front side lamp
8 Xenon headlamp module
9 Front turn signal indicator
10 Side marker lamp
12 Front fog lamp switch
13 Rear fog lamp switch
14 License plate lamps
15 Reverse or rear fog lamp
16 Side lamp
17 Rear turn signal indicator
18 Side lamp/Stop lamp
19 Rear side marker lamp
20 High mounted stop lamp
21 Lighting switch
22 Front height sensor
23 Front fog lamp (2 off)

INTRODUCTION
The lighting systems are controlled by the Auxiliary Junction Box (AJB) and the CJB (central junction
box) . The two boxes contain fuses, relays and microprocessors to control the power supply and
functionality of the lighting systems.
Driver lighting selections using the LH (left-hand) steering column multifunction switch or the
auxiliary lighting switch are passed to the CJB (central junction box) via the instrument cluster.
The lighting system has an 'auto' lights function which is controlled by the CJB (central junction box)
on receipt of signals from the light sensor. The exterior lights are turned on or off in response to
ambient light signals from the light sensor via the instrument cluster.
Two levels of headlamp are available; Bi-xenon or Bi-xenon with Adaptive Front lighting System
(AFS). The AFS headlamp has a swiveling projector module which moves the headlamp beam in the
direction of travel. The AFS headlamp also features a cornering/static bending lamp which
illuminates the area at the side of the vehicle when turning into driveways for example.
The tail lamp is in two parts. The turn signal indicator, side and stop lamps are located in each rear
fender. The reverse and rear fog lamps are located in separate units attached to the liftgate. The
locations of the fog and reverse lamps changes depending if the vehicle is LHD (left-hand drive) or
RHD (right-hand drive) . The turn signal indicator, side and stop lamps use conventional glass filament
bulbs. The rear fog and reverse lamp use colored LED (light emitting diode) .
EXTERIOR BULB TYPE/RATING

The following table shows the bulbs used for the exterior lighting system and their type and
specification.
Bulb Type Rating
Xenon Headlamps - Low/High beam Xenon D1S 35W
Front fog lamps - Naturally aspirated Halogen H11 55W
Front fog lamps - Supercharged Halogen H3 55W
Rear fog lamp LED (light emitting diode) Not

applicable
Turn signal indicator lamps - Front - Rest of World (ROW) Bayonet PY21W 21W
Turn signal indicator lamps - Front - North American Wedge S8W 3457K 27/7W
Specification (NAS)
Turn signal indicator repeater lamps Capless W5W 5W

Turn signal indicator lamps - Rear Bayonet PY21W 21W
Side lamps - Front Wedge W5W 5W
Stop / Side lamps Bayonet - Twin filament - 21W/5W

P21/5
High mounted stop lamp LED (light emitting diode) Not

applicable
Licence plate lamps Capless W5W 5W
Reverse lamp LED (light emitting diode) Not

applicable
Cornering lamp Halogen H8 35W
Side marker lamps (front/rear) Capless W3W 3W
CENTRAL JUNCTION BOX AND AUXILIARY JUNCTION BOX

The CJB (central junction box) is an integrated unit located in the passenger compartment LH (left-
hand) side on the 'A' pillar.
The Auxiliary Junction Box (AJB) is located in a central position, behind the rear seat.
CJB (central junction box) Control

The CJB (central junction box) receives inputs from the following switches via the instrument cluster
and the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus:
• LH (left-hand) steering column multifunction switch Side lamp position Headlamp position
Automatic (AUTO) position Timer delay positions Turn signal indicators Headlamp flash and
high beam
• Stop lamp switch
• Hazard flasher switch
• Sunload/Light sensor.
The following lamps are controlled by the CJB (central junction box) :
• Front side lamps

• Front side marker lamps
• Headlamps
• Cornering lamps
• Front fog lamps.
AJB Control
The following lamps are controlled by the AJB:
• Rear fog lamp

• Reverse lamp
• Stop lamps
• High mounted stop lamp
• Rear side lamps
• Rear side marker lamps
• Licence plate lamps
• Front and rear turn signal indicators and side repeaters
The AJB is also connected via a hardwired connection to the hazard flasher switch.
Circuit Protection
The AJB and the CJB (central junction box) provide circuit protection for all exterior lighting circuits.
The exterior lighting circuits are protected by Field Effect Transistors (FETs). Operation of the exterior
lighting circuits is protected by the FETs which can detect overloads and short circuits. The FETs
respond to heat generated by increased current flow caused by a short circuit.
On a normal circuit this would cause the fuse to blow. The FETs respond to the heat increase and
disconnect the power supply to the affected circuit. When the fault is rectified or the FET has cooled,
the FET will reset and operate the circuit normally. If the fault persists the FET will cycle,
disconnecting and reconnecting the power supply.
The CJB (central junction box) and the AJB store fault codes which can be retrieved using a Jaguar
approved diagnostic system. The fault code will identify that there is a fault on a particular output
which will assist with fault detection.
Alarm Indications
The exterior lighting system is used for alarm arm and disarm requests.
When the driver locks and arms the vehicle, a visual indication of a successful lock and arm request is
displayed to the driver by a single flash of the hazard flashers. If the vehicle is superlocked then the
hazard flashers will flash a second time (200ms off and 200ms on) to confirm the superlock request.
When the driver unlocks the vehicle, a visual indication of a successful lock and disarm request is
displayed to the driver by the hazard flashers operating twice (200ms off and 200ms on).
If the alarm is triggered, the hazard flashers are operated for ten 30 second cycles of 200ms on and
200ms off with a 10 second delay between each cycle.
NOTE:
On NAS vehicles the delay between cycle when the alarm is triggered is 60 seconds. The alarm
triggered hazard flasher operation varies depending on market.
Lights on Warning Chime
When the ignition is in the off mode or accessory mode conditions and the lighting switch is in the
side lamp or headlamp position, a warning chime will sound if the driver's door is opened. This
indicates to the driver that the exterior lights have been left switched on.
The chime is generated from the instrument cluster sounder on receipt of a lights on signal, a driver's
door open signal and an ignition off or accessory mode signal via a medium speed CAN (controller
area network) bus signal from the CJB (central junction box) .
Crash Signal Activation

When a crash signal is transmitted from the restraints control module, the AJB activates the hazard
flashers. The hazard flashers continue to operate until the ignition is in the off or accessory modes
and then returned to the ignition on mode. Once this condition has occurred, the restraints control
module will cease transmission of the crash signal.
Headlamp Timer
The AJB controls a headlamp timer function which allows the headlamps to remain on for a period of
time after leaving the vehicle. This is a driver convenience feature which illuminates the driveway
after leaving the vehicle.
To select this feature, the lighting control switch on the steering column multifunction switch must
be in one of the three headlamp timer positions when the ignition mode is changed from ignition on
mode to off mode. The timer function will then be initiated and the low beam headlamps will be
illuminated for the selected timer period.
NOTE:
If the lighting switch is in the AUTO position, the headlamp timer will not function when the
ignition mode is changed to off.
The timer period can be adjusted using one of the 3 positions on the lighting control switch on the LH
(left-hand) steering column multifunction switch. The 3 switch positions correspond to timer values
of 30, 60 and 120 seconds.
LIGHTING CONTROL SWITCH
1 Off position
2 Side lamp position
3 High beam position
4 RH (right-hand) turn signal indicator position
5 Headlamp flash/high beam off position
6 LH (left-hand) turn signal indicator position
7 Headlamp position
8 AUTO headlamp position
9 Headlamp timer 120 second delay position
10 Headlamp timer 60 second position
11 Headlamp timer 30 second position
The lighting control switch is located on the LH (left-hand) steering column multifunction switch. The
switch is a rotary control with positions for the following lighting selections:
• Off
• Side lamps
• Headlamps
• AUTO headlamps
• Headlamp timer (3 time period selections).
The steering column multifunction switch also provides for the selection of low and high beam
headlamps and also the headlamp flash function.
The steering column multifunction switch is connected to the instrument cluster by 3 wires. Two
wires supply a signal voltage to the lighting switch and the headlamp timer positions. The third wire
is a common ground. Each switch position is connected to the ground return via resistors which vary
the return voltage to the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster senses the voltage returning and
determines the switch position selected. The instrument cluster then generates an applicable
message which is sent to the AJB and the CJB (central junction box) on the medium speed CAN bus
for activation of the selected exterior lamps.
The steering column multifunction switch also provides the control for the turn signal indicators. The
switch can be pushed down to select the LH (left-hand) turn signal indicators or pushed up to select
the RH (right-hand) turn signal indicators. The switch has 2 positions. If the switch is pushed up or
down gently and held, the turn signal indicators will operate until the switch is released, if the switch
is pushed past a detent, the switch can be released and the selected position will automatically be
cancelled when the manoeuvre is completed. If a turn signal indicator bulb fails, the green turn signal
indicator warning indicator in the instrument cluster will flash at twice the normal rate and the
audible ticking will also be at twice the normal rate.
The steering column multifunction switch also has a lane change function. If the switch is gently
pushed to either turn signal indicator direction and then released, the turn signal indicators will flash
3 times and then automatically cancel.
AUXILIARY LIGHTING SWITCH
1 Front fog lamp switch
2 Rear fog lamp switch
The auxiliary lighting switch is located in the instrument panel, adjacent to the steering column. The
switch has 2 buttons which select the front and rear fog lamps. The buttons are non-latching
momentary switches.
The auxiliary lighting switch is connected to the instrument cluster by 3 wires. Two wires supply a
signal voltage to the each fog lamp switch. The third wire is a common ground. Each switch position
is connected to the ground return via a series of resistors which vary the supply voltage from the
instrument cluster. The instrument cluster senses the voltage and determines the switch position
selected. The instrument cluster then generates an applicable message which is sent to the AJB and
the CJB (central junction box) on the medium speed CAN bus for activation of the selected fog lamps.
The front fog lamps can only be activated when the ignition is in the ignition power mode and side
lamps or headlamps are active. The rear fog lamps can only be activated if the low beam headlamps
are on or if the sidelamps and front fog lamps are on. A second press of each fog lamp button will
switch of the selected fog lamps. If the lighting control switch or the ignition is changed to the off
mode, then both fog lamps will be switched off and will need to be re-selected if required.
HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY
Two types of headlamp are available; Bi-Xenon and Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS). The
headlamps are located with a locating dowel through the upper front bumper bracket and secured
with 3 bolts to the front body structure. Bulb replacement requires the removal of the complete
headlamp assembly.
The rear of the headlamp unit has removable access panels which allow access to the bulbs for
replacement. A large cover, which is rotated anti-clockwise to remove allows access to the Xenon
D1S bulb. Another removable cover provides access to the corning lamp bulb and the side lamp bulb,
which is retained with a spring clip. A smaller cover can be rotated anti-clockwise to provide access
to the turn signal indicator bulb and the side marker lamp bulb.
The headlamps have two adjustment screws on the rear which allow for the manual setting of the
vertical and horizontal alignment.
On NAS vehicles the headlamp is regarded as 'Visual Optically Left' aiming. The adjustment screws
have to turned equal amounts to maintain the correlation in the vertical axis only. There is no
horizontal adjustment. Refer to the Service Repair Procedures manual for headlamp alignment data
and procedures.
Each headlamp has an integral 16 pin connector which provides inputs and outputs for the various
functions of the headlamp assembly.
The low beam headlamps are switched on when the ignition is in the ignition mode and:
• the lighting control switch is in the headlamp position

• the lighting control switch is in the AUTO position and a 'lights on' signal is received by the
CJB (central junction box) from a 'lights on' message generated by the AJB.
The low beam headlamps can also be operated by the headlamp timer function.
The high beam headlamps are switched on when the ignition is in the ignition mode and:
• The low beam headlamps are selected on or activated via the AUTO feature and the LH (left-
hand) steering column multifunction switch is pushed forward, away from the driver
The high beam lamps will be switched off when:
• The LH (left-hand) steering column multifunction switch is moved rearwards, towards the
driver.
• The low beam headlamps are switched off
• The ignition mode is changed to accessory or off mode.
1 Headlamp power washer jet

2 Side lamp bulb
3 Cornering lamp (if fitted)
4 Xenon projector module
5 Turn signal indicator bulb
6 Side marker lamp bulb
7 Cover - Side lamp and cornering lamp
8 Powerwash hose connection
9 AFS power module (if fitted)
10 Xenon control module
11 Cover - Xenon bulb
12 Electrical connector
13 Side marker lamp bulb and holder
14 Turn signal indicator bulb and holder
15 Igniter electrical connector
16 Igniter unit and bulb
17 Mounting collar
WARNING: The Xenon system generates up to 28000 volts and contact with this voltage
could lead to fatality. Make sure that the headlamps are switched off before working on the
system.
The following safety precautions must be followed when working on the Xenon headlamp system:
• DO NOT attempt any procedures on the Xenon headlamps when the lights are switched on.
• Handling of the D1S Xenon bulb must be performed using suitable protective equipment, for
example gloves and goggles. The glass part of the bulb must not be touched.
• Xenon bulbs must be disposed of as hazardous waste.
• Only operate the lamp in a mounted condition in the reflector.
The Xenon headlamp is known as Bi-Xenon because it operates as both a low and high beam unit.
The Xenon lamp or High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamp as they are sometimes called, comprise an
ellipsoidal lens with a solenoid controlled shutter to change the beam output from low to high beam.
NOTE:
If the lighting control switch is in the OFF position, the Xenon lamps operate when the high
beam 'flash' function is operated.
The Xenon headlamp system is controlled by the CJB (central junction box) using a control module
for each headlamp and an igniter. The control modules and the igniters provide the regulated power
supply required to illuminate the Xenon bulbs through their start-up phases of operation.
Xenon Headlamp Construction
Xenon Bulb Replacement
A Locking Ring Removal
B Locking Ring Replacement
1 Mounting ring
2 Xenon bulb
3 Igniter
The Xenon headlamp is a self contained unit located within the headlamp assembly. The unit
comprises a reflector, an adaptor ring, the lens, a shutter controller and the xenon bulb, which
together is an assembly known as the projector module.
The reflector is curved and provides the mounting for the Xenon bulb. The bulb locates in a keyway
to ensure correct alignment in the reflector and is secured by a plastic mounting ring. The bulb is an
integral part of the igniter and is electrically connected by a connector located in the igniter unit.
The shutter controller is a solenoid which operates the shutter mechanism via a lever. The shutter is
used to change the beam projection from low beam to high beam and visa versa.
The Xenon bulbs illuminate when an arc of electrical current is established between 2 electrodes
within the bulb. The Xenon gas sealed in the bulb reacts to the electrical excitation and the theat
generated by the current flow to produce the characteristic blue/white light.
To operate at full efficiency, the Xenon bulb goes through 3 full stages of operation before full output
for continuous operation is achieved. The 3 phases are; start-up phase, warm-up phase and
continuous phase.
In the start-up phase, the bulb requires an initial high voltage starting pulse of up to 30000 volts to
establish the arc. This is produced by the igniter. The warm-up phase begins once the arc is
established. The Xenon control module regulates the supply to the bulb to 2.6A which gives a lamp
output of 75W. During this phase, the Xenon gas begins to illuminate brightly and the environment
within the bulb stabilizes, ensuring a continual current flow between the electrodes. When the
warm-up phase is complete, the Xenon control module changes to continuous phase. The supply
voltage to the bulb is reduced and the operating power required for continual operation is reduced
to 35W. The process from start-up to continuous phase is completed in a very short time.
The Xenon control modules (one per headlamp) receive an operating voltage from the CJB (central
junction box) when the headlamps are switched on. The modules regulate the power supply required
through the phases of start-up.
The igniters (one per headlamp) generate the initial high voltage required to establish the arc. The
igniters have integral coils which generate high voltage pulses required for start-up. Once the Xenon
bulbs are operating, the igniters provide a closed circuit for the regulated power supply from the
control modules.
Turn Signal Indicator Lamp

The turn signal indicator lamp is incorporated into the outer part of the headlamp assembly,
outboard of the projector module. The turn signal indicator lamp uses a PY21W bayonet orange
colored bulb in Rest Of World (ROW) markets. A S8W 27/7W wedge bulb is used in NAS markets.
The bulb is fitted into a holder which connects with contacts in the headlamp housing. The holder is
fitted into an aperture in the headlamp housing and is rotated to lock in position. Access to the turn
signal indicator bulb requires removal of the headlamp assembly.
The turn signal indicator lamps are operated by the LH (left-hand) steering column multifunction
switch or by the hazard flasher switch. The steering column multifunction switch is only active when
the ignition is the ignition mode. The hazard flasher switch is active at all times. When active, the
turn signal indicator lamps flash at a frequency cycle of 400 ms on and 400 ms off.
If a bulb fails, the remaining turn signal indicator lamps continue to flash at the normal speed. The
applicable turn signal indicator in the instrument cluster will flash at double speed to indicate the
failure to the driver.
Side Lamp
The side lamp is incorporated into the outer part of the headlamp assembly, above the cornering
lamp. The side lamp shares the same housing and reflector as the cornering lamp.
The side lamp uses a W5W wedge fitting, orange colored bulb which is fitted in a holder and
connected by wires to the main headlamp connector. The holder is a push fit into a receptacle in the
headlamp housing. The bulb is accessible by removal of the cover on the side of the headlamp.
Access to the bulb and the cover requires removal of the headlamp assembly.
The side lamps are operated by selecting side lamps or headlamps on the lighting control switch. The
side lamps are operational at all times and are not dependant on the ignition mode. The side lamps
will also be illuminated when the lighting control switch is in the AUTO position and a 'lights on'
signal is received by the CJB (central junction box) from a 'lights on' message generated by the AJB.
Side Marker Lamp

The side marker lamp is located on the outer part of the headlamp, adjacent to the turn signal
indicator bulb. The side marker lamp uses an orange colored W3W wedge fitting bulb, which is fitted
in a holder which connects with contacts in the headlamp housing. The holder is fitted into an
aperture in the headlamp housing and is rotated to lock in position. Access to the side marker bulb
requires removal of the headlamp assembly.
The side marker lamp is active at all times when the side lamps are selected on using the lighting
control switch. The side marker lamps will also be illuminated when the lighting control switch is in
the 'AUTO' position and a 'lights on' signal is received by the CJB (central junction box) from a 'lights
on' message generated by the AJB.
Cornering Lamp - Vehicles without AFS

The cornering lamp functionality differs between vehicles with or without the AFS system. The
cornering lamps are designed to illuminate the direction of travel when cornering at low speeds. The
design of the lens projects a spread of light from the vehicle at approximately 45 degrees to the
vehicle axis.
The cornering lamp is incorporated into the inner part of the headlamp assembly, below the side
lamp. The cornering lamp uses a 35W Halogen H8 bulb which is permanently fitted in an integral
holder which is located in the headlamp housing. The holder is connected by a removable harness
connector and the holder can be removed from the housing by rotating to unlock. The bulb is
accessible by removal of a cover on the side of the headlamp. Access to the bulb anc over requires
removal of the headlamp assembly.
The cornering lamps are controlled by the LH (left-hand) steering column multifunction switch, when
the lighting control switch is in the headlamps position and the ignition is in the ignition on mode.
The cornering lamps are controlled by the CJB (central junction box) which uses turn signal indicator
active and vehicle speed to operate the cornering lamps. The cornering lamps are deactivated if the
vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) with the turn signal indicators selected on or if the
headlamp high beam is active.
Only one cornering lamp will illuminate at any one time. If the LH (left-hand) turn signal indicators
are active, the LH (left-hand) cornering lamp will be illuminated and visa versa, providing the vehicle
speed and the lighting control switch positions are correct.
Cornering Lamp - Vehicles with AFS

The cornering lamps fitted to vehicles with the AFS system functions differently to those fitted to
vehicle with non AFS headlamps. The construction and light distribution of the cornering lamp with
AFS is as described previously for cornering lamp without AFS.
The cornering lamps operate using high speed CAN (controller area network) signals from the
steering angle sensor which are received by the CJB (central junction box) and the AFS control
module. The AFS control module transmits a cornering lamp on request to the CJB (central junction
box) which, if all operating conditions are correct, activates the cornering lamp.
When the operating parameters of the cornering lamp is achieved, the CJB (central junction box)
fades the cornering lamp on using a PWM (pulse width modulation) voltage over a period of
approximately 2 seconds. When the lamp is switched off, the CJB (central junction box) fades the
bulb off by decreasing the PWM (pulse width modulation) voltage in a linear manner depending on
vehicle speed and steering angle.
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS)

The AFS headlamp is similar in its construction to the Xenon, non-AFS headlamp. The projector
module is constructed and functions as described for the Xenon headlamp but with the addition of
the AFS system which allows the projector module to be moved vertically and horizontally. The AFS
system is controlled by a AFS control module which is integral with the headlamp levelling module.
The AFS headlamp assembly contains an additional carrier frame which provides location for the AFS
actuators. The remaining lamps are as described previously. The carrier frame is attached to the AFS
vertical actuator. The projector module has a central pivot point which allows the module to move
horizontally in response to operation of the AFS horizontal actuator.
The AFS actuators are bi-polar (2 phase) dc stepper motors which are driven by a power output from
the AFS power module located on the rear of the headlamp assembly. Each stepper motor receives
its position information from the AFS control module via the applicable AFS power module. When
the actuators are powered to their requested positions, a holding current is applied to maintain the
actuator position.
The actuators do not supply a positional feedback signal to the AFS control module. Each stepper
motor requires referencing each time the AFS system becomes active. When the AFS system is
active, each vertical actuator is driven to the low beam position and each horizontal actuator is
driven to an inboard position until a mechanical stop in the actuator is reached. Once the stop is
reached a step counter in the AFS control module is set to zero and the actuator is then powered to
the operating position as determined by the AFS control module software.
The AFS control module receives front and rear vehicle height data from the height sensors to
provide headlamp levelling adjustment via the vertical actuator motor. The AFS control module also
receives vehicle speed signals from the ABS module to adjust the projector module vertically to
increase the beam range as the vehicle speed increases.
A Conventional headlamp beam distribution
B AFS swivel headlamp beam distribution
AFS Control Module

The AFS control module is located on the bulkhead, at the bottom of the RH (right-hand) 'A' pillar.
The AFS control module is a dual functionality unit which also incorporates software to control the
headlamp leveling. The AFS control module is connected to the high speed CAN (controller area
network) bus and receives inputs from other vehicle systems on the status of the following
parameters:
• Steering angle
• Vehicle speed
• Headlamp status
• Engine running
• Reverse gear selected
• AUTO lights on.
The AFS will only operate when the AFS control module receives an engine running signal on the high
speed CAN (controller area network) bus from the ECM (engine control module) . When the engine
running signal is received the AFS control module performs its initialisation routine.
The AFS will also function when the lighting control switch is in the AUTO position and the AFS
control module receives a lights on signal from the light sensor and an engine running signal.
The AFS control module then monitors the inputs from the other vehicle systems to control the AFS
functionality according to cornering angles and vehicle speed.
The AFS control module is connected to each AFS power module on a private Local Interconnect
Network (LIN) bus. The power modules read operating values supplied from the AFS control module
and control the output drivers for the stepper motor actuators inside the headlamp assembly.
AFS Operation
The AFS controls the swiveling angle of each projector module using speed and steering angle signals.
The angles of each projector module differ to give the correct spread of light, for example, when
turning left, the LH (left-hand) projector module will have a greater swiveling angle than the RH
(right-hand) projector module.
Initialisation Procedure
When the AFS control module receives an ignition mode on signal, the control module performs the
initialisation procedure which ensures that the headlamps are correctly aligned on both their vertical
and horizontal axes.
The headlamp leveling motors are powered from their current position, which can be either the
upper or lower limit or somewhere in between, to their lower position and then back to the 0
degrees position.
The AFS swivel initialisation starts less than 1 second after the headlamp leveling initialisation is
activated to ensure that the headlamps are at or below the 0 degree position in the vertical axis, thus
preventing glare to oncoming vehicles. The AFS swivel initialisation is completed in less than 2.5
seconds. The LH (left-hand) and RH (right-hand) AFS actuator motors are powered from the 0 degree
position to their fully inboard position, then to their fully outboard position and then back to the 0
degree position.
Failure Mode
In the event of a failure of the AFS system, a warning indicator in the instrument cluster is illuminated
to warn the driver. The AFS warning indicator illuminates when the ignition is in the ignition on mode
and will flash continuously until the fault is rectified. The AFS warning indicator will also be
illuminated if a failure of the steering angle sensor or the vehicle speed signal is detected.
Illumination of the warning indicator does not necessarily mean that there is a fault with the AFS
system. The fault may be caused by a failure of another system preventing the AFS system from
operating correctly.
The AFS control module performs a diagnostic routine every time AFS is requested. If any fault is
found, the AFS control module will suspend the operation of the AFS function.
If the AFS leveling system has failed with the projector module in a position other than the correct
straight ahead position, the AFS control module will attempt to drive the projector module to a
position a small amount lower than the standard position. If the swivel function has failed, the AFS
control module will lower the projector module using the leveling actuator to a position much lower
than standard to prevent excess glare to oncoming vehicles.
The AFS control module software can detect an internal failure of the control module control circuits.
The control module will power the projector modules to the zero position and prevent further
operation.
Faults can be investigated by interrogating the AFS control module using an approved Jaguar
diagnostic system to check for fault codes.
AUTOMATIC HEADLAMP OPERATION

The automatic headlamp function is a driver assistance system. The driver can override the system
operation by selection of side lamp or headlamp on if the ambient light conditions require front and
rear lighting to be active. The automatic headlamp system uses a light sensor and the AJB, which is
connected to the instrument cluster, via the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus, to
control 'AUTO' headlamp functionality.
The light sensor is located in the centre of the instrument panel upper surface. The sensor has three
functions; houses the alarm system LED (light emitting diode) , auto lamp function for AUTO
headlamps and sun load sensor for the A/C (air conditioning) system.
The sensor is hardwired to the instrument cluster which supplies a 5V current via a pull-up resistor to
2 photodiode light sensors within the sensor housing. The ambient light signals are returned to the
instrument cluster by the light sensor varying the current drawn from the 5V output, hence varying
the voltage at the 'pull-up' resistor. The instrument cluster then outputs a message relating to the
ambient light level on the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus. The AJB receives the
message and determines if AUTO lamps are required to be activated.
Operation of the 'AUTO' headlamps requires the ignition to be in the ignition mode and the lighting
control switch must be in the AUTO position. The AJB will only activate the AUTO headlamps on
receipt of a valid ambient light signal on the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus from
the instrument cluster.
HEADLAMP LEVELING
Headlamp leveling provides for the automatic adjustment of the vertical aim of the headlamps. The
leveling system is required to minimise glare to other road users when the vehicle attitude changes
due to braking or acceleration.
Headlamp leveling is controlled by a headlamp leveling module which is located on the bulkhead, at
the bottom of the RH (right-hand) 'A' pillar.
NOTE:
On vehicles with the AFS system, the headlamp leveling software is incorporated into the AFS
control module and the module is known as the AFS control module.
The headlamp leveling system comprises the following components and information from other
vehicle systems:
• Front and rear vehicle height sensors

• Two headlamp leveling, vertical adjustment motors
• Headlamp leveling module (or AFS control module if vehicle is fitted with AFS)
• Ignition in on mode
• Vehicle speed information form ABS (anti-lock brake system) module.
When the ignition is in the ignition power mode, power is supplied via the ignition relay in the
battery junction box to the headlamp leveling module (or AFS control module if vehicle is fitted with
AFS).
NOTE:
When the headlamp leveling module receives a power supply from the ignition relay, the
module performs an initialization procedure to correctly align the vertical aim of the headlamps
and to determine if the leveling motors are functioning correctly.
The headlamp leveling module receives information relating to vehicle attitude from the front and
rear height sensors. The headlamp leveling module processes these signal and provides an output to
the headlamp leveling motors to adjust the headlamp vertical aim according to vehicle speed and
attitude.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS

Refer to the DRL (daytime running lamps) section for details. For additional information, refer to
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) (417-04 )
FRONT FOG LAMP
1 Fog lamp - Naturally aspirated vehicles
2 Bulb H11
3 Bulb H3
4 Fog lamp - Supercharged vehicles
Two front fog lamps are located in apertures in the front bumper. The fog lamps are different in
design between the naturally aspirated and supercharged vehicles.
Front Fog Lamp - Naturally Aspirated Vehicles

The front fog lamp is a conventional design with a clear lens and smooth surface reflector. An H11
55W halogen bulb is located at the rear of the fog lamp. The bulb has an integral holder and can be
removed by rotating counter clockwise to remove from the lamp housing.
Fog lamp beam adjustment is provided by a rotary adjuster located on the underside of the lamp and
is accessible from the rear of the bumper.
The front fog lamps are controlled by the auxiliary lighting switch and the CJB (central junction box) .
Refer to the Auxiliary Lighting Switch section for switch operation.
Front Fog Lamp - Supercharged Vehicles

The front fog lamp is projector module, similar in design to the projector module used in the Xenon
headlamp. A halogen H3 bulb is located in the rear of the lamp and secured with a spring clip. The
bulb has a power lead which is secured to the rear of the lamp connector socket.
Fog lamp beam adjustment is provided by a screw at the top of the lamp. The screw is accessible
from the front of the lamp.
Front fog lamp control and operation is as described for 'Front Fog Lamp - Naturally Aspirated
Vehicles.
Front Fog Lamp Functionality (NAS and Canadian Markets Only)

The front fog lamps operate as described previously but with the following differences which cover
local laws governing lamp usage.
If the low beam headlamps and the front fog lamps are on at the same time, when the high beam
headlamps are switched on, the front fog lamps will be automatically switched off. When the high
beam headlamps are subsequently switched off, the front fog lamps will be switched on
automatically.
NOTE:
The front fog lamps will also be switched off if the high beam 'flash' function is operated.
REAR LAMP ASSEMBLY

The rear lamp assembly is a 2 piece unit, with one part being located in the rear quarter panel and
the second part being attached to the liftgate. The outer rear lamp assembly is located in a recess in
the vehicle body and is secured with 2 nuts which screw onto studs in the lamp assembly. The inner
rear lamp assembly is located in a recess in the liftgate and is secured with 3 nuts.
1 Inner rear lamp assembly
2 Outer rear lamp assembly
3 Rear fog lamp or reverse lamp LED (light emitting diode) (market dependant)
4 Turn signal indicator bulb and holder
5 Stop lamp and Tail lamp bulb and holder
6 Side marker bulb and holder
7 Turn signal indicator
8 Rear fog lamp or reverse lamp (market dependant)
9 Stop lamp and tail lamp
10 Side marker lamp
Rear Stop and Side Lamp

The stop and side lamp are located in the lower section of the outer rear lamp assembly. A
combined, twin filament 21W/5W bayonet fitting bulb is used. The stop lamp uses the 21W bulb
filament and the side lamp uses the 5W bulb filament. The bulb is located in a holder which connects
with contacts in the rear lamp housing. The holder can be released by rotating and pulling from the
aperture.
The stop lamps are active when the ignition is in the ignition mode and the stop lamp switch is
activated by pressing the brake pedal. The high mounted stop lamp will also be activated when the
brake pedal is pressed. Operation of the stop lamp switch is sensed by the CJB (central junction box)
which sends a message on the high speed CAN (controller area network) bus to the AJB which
activates the stop lamps.
The stop lamps can also be activated by the adaptive speed control system. A signal from the
adaptive speed control module is sent via the high speed CAN (controller area network) bus to the
AJB which activates the stop lamps until an off message is received.
The side lamps are operated by selecting side lamps or headlamps on the lighting control switch. The
side lamps are operational at all times and are not dependant on the ignition mode. The side lamps
will also be illuminated when the lighting control switch is in the AUTO position and a 'lights on'
signal is received by the CJB (central junction box) from the light sensor.
Turn Signal Indicator Lamp
The turn signal indicator lamp is located in the upper section of the outer rear lamp assembly and
uses a PY21W bayonet fitting bulb. The bulb is located in a holder which connects with contacts in
the rear lamp housing. The holder can be released by rotating and pulling from the aperture.
The turn signal indicator lamps are operated by the LH (left-hand) steering column multifunction
switch or by the hazard flasher switch. The steering column multifunction switch is only active when
the ignition is the ignition mode. The hazard flasher switch is active at all times. When active, the
turn signal indicator lamps flash at a frequency cycle of 400 ms on and 400 ms off.
If a bulb fails, the remaining turn signal indicator lamps continue to flash at the normal speed. The
applicable turn signal indicator in the instrument cluster will flash at double speed to indicate the
failure to the driver.
Reversing Lamp
The reversing lamp is located in the inner rear lamp assembly. The reversing lamp uses 3 LED (light
emitting diode) . Only one reversing lamp is fitted and is located in the LH (left-hand) inner lamp
assembly on RHD (right-hand drive) vehicles and in the RH (right-hand) inner lamp assembly on LHD
(left-hand drive) vehicles.
The reversing lamp is activated on receipt of reverse selected message sent on the medium speed
CAN signal from the TCM (transmission control module) to the AJB.
Rear Fog Lamp

The rear fog lamp is located in the inner rear lamp assembly. The fog lamp uses 3 LED (light emitting
diode) 's. Only one fog lamp is fitted and is located in the RH (right-hand) inner lamp assembly on
RHD (right-hand drive) vehicles and in the LH (left-hand) inner lamp assembly on LHD (left-hand
drive) vehicles.
The rear fog lamp is controlled by the auxiliary lighting switch and the CJB (central junction box) . The
rear fog lamp switch receives a power supply from the instrument cluster. When the rear fog lamp
switch is pressed, a ground path is completed through a resistor. The current flow is monitored by
the instrument cluster which determines that the switch has been pressed. The instrument cluster
transmits a rear fog lamp on request message on the medium speed CAN (controller area network)
bus to the AJB which activates the power supplies to the fog lamp provided the lighting switch is in
the correct position and the ignition mode is correct.
When the ignition is in ignition on mode and the lighting control switch is in the side lamp or
headlamp position and the front fog lamps are on, pressing the rear fog lamp switch on the auxiliary
lighting switch will activate the rear fog lamp. Pressing the rear fog lamp switch for a second time will
switch the rear fog lamp off. The rear fog lamp will also be deactivated if the lighting control switch is
moved to the off position or the ignition mode is changed to off mode.
LICENCE PLATE LAMPS
Two licence plate lamps are located in the underside of the liftgate (hardtop) or luggage
compartment lid (convertible) exterior trim finisher. Each lamp uses a W5W capless bulb which is
located in a holder at the rear of the lamp.
The lamp can be removed from the finisher by using a wide flat blade screwdriver or similar tool,
inserting it in the slot between the lamp lens and the finisher and gently levering the lamp from the
surround. The bulb is pushed into a holder which in turn is a press fit in the lamp housing.
The licence plate lamps are illuminated at all times when the side lamps are active.
HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP

The high mounted stop lamp is located in the rear spoiler on the upper edge of the liftgate or luggage
compartment lid. The lamp comprises 24 separate LED (light emitting diode) 's which illuminate
through a red colored lens. The high mounted stop lamp functionality is the same as that described
for the stop lamps.
TURN SIGNAL INDICATOR REPEATER LAMP

The turn signal indicator repeater lamps are located in each front fender and can be removed by
sliding the lamp assembly rearwards and releasing the front edge from the fender. The lamps use a
5W capless bulb which is located in a holder in the rear of the lamp housing.
The repeater lamps have the same functionality as described for the turn signal indicators and the
hazard flashers.
HAZARD FLASHERS
The hazard flashers are controlled by a non-latching switch located in the centre of the instrument
panel. The hazard flashers operate at all times when selected and are not dependant on an ignition
mode to be selected.
When the hazard flashers are selected on by the driver, a ground path is momentarily completed to
the AJB which activates the front and rear and side repeater turn signal indicators. A second press of
the switch is again sensed by the AJB and the hazard flasher will be deactivated. When the hazard
flasher are active, they override any request for turn signal indicator operation.
The hazard flashers can also be activated by a crash signal from the RCM (restraints control module) .
The signal is received on the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus from the instrument
cluster by the AJB which activates the hazard flashers. The hazard flasher can be cancelled by
changing the ignition mode to accessory or off mode and then changing it to ignition on mode on or
the crash mode signal is removed by the RCM (restraints control module) .
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE:
A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus
1 Battery
2 Megafuse (175A)
3 Megafuse (175A)
4 Auxiliary Junction Box (AJB)
5 CJB (central junction box)
6 High speed CAN (controller area network) bus to other vehicle systems
8 LH (left-hand) steering column multifunction switch
9 Stop lamp switch
11 LH (left-hand) headlamp
13 RH (right-hand) headlamp
14 Rear height sensor
15 Front height sensor
16 Headlamp leveling/AFS control module
17 LH (left-hand) side repeater
18 RH (right-hand) side repeater
19 A/C (air conditioning) control module
20 Hazard warning switch
21 Light sensor
22 LH (left-hand) license plate lamp
23 RH (right-hand) license plate lamp
24 LH (left-hand) front fog lamp
25 RH (right-hand) front fog lamp
26 High mounted stop lamp

27 RH (right-hand) tail lamp assembly
28 LH (left-hand) tail lamp assembly

Headlamps
Principles of Operation
For a detailed description of the exterior lighting system, refer to the Description and Operation
section 417-00 - Exterior Lighting of the workshop manual.
Safety Information
WARNING: The Xenon Headlamp System generates up to 28,000 volts. Make sure that the
headlamps are switched off before working on the system. Failure to follow this instruction may
lead to fatality.
WARNING: The following safety precautions must be followed when working on the Xenon
Headlamp System:
• DO NOT attempt any procedures on the Xenon Headlamps or circuits when the system is
energized.
• Handling of the Xenon bulb must be performed using suitable protective equipment, e.g.
gloves and goggles. The glass part of the bulb must not be touched.
• Only operate the lamp in a mounted condition in the reflector.
• All safety procedures and precautions must be followed to prevent personal injury.
CAUTION: Xenon bulbs must be disposed of as hazardous waste.
There are instructions on the correct procedures for Xenon Headlamp System repairs in the manual,
refer to section 100-00 - General Information, Standard Workshop Practices of the workshop manual.


Electrical
• Headlamp Leveling Module (HLM)

• Bulb(s)
• Photocell(s)
• Ballast
• Wiring harness/electrical connectors
• Fuse(s)
Index.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Possible Causes Action
Low beam • Bulb failure Check the bulb and fuse condition (see visual
lamp(s) • Fuse(s) blown inspection). Check the headlamp circuits. Check
inoperative • Circuit fault
the lighting control switch function. Check the
• Lighting control switch
left-hand steering column multifunction switch
fault
High beam • Left-hand steering operation. Refer to the electrical guides. Check for
lamp(s) column multifunction DTCs indicating a headlamp or related circuit
inoperative switch fault fault.
Low beam • Incorrect bulb rating

lamp(s) dim • Tourist lever set in the Check the bulb condition and rating. Check the
wrong position tourist lever is set correctly. Check the headlamp
• Circuit fault
circuits. Check the lighting control switch
• Lighting control switch
fault function. Check the left-hand steering column
High beam
• Left-hand steering multifunction switch function. Refer to the
lamp(s) dim
column multifunction electrical guides.
switch fault
Low beam • Circuit fault

• Lighting control switch Check the headlamp circuits. Check the lighting
lamp(s) stuck on
fault control switch function. Check the left-hand
• Left-hand steering steering column multifunction switch operation.
High beam column multifunction Check the headlamp timer function. Refer to the
lamp(s) stuck on switch fault electrical guides. Check for DTCs indicating a
• Headlamp timer
function fault headlamp circuit fault
Headlamp • Circuit fault Check the headlamp circuits. Check the left-hand
• Left-hand steering
low/high beam steering column multifunction switch operation.
column multifunction
switching Check the xenon lamp shutter mechanism
switch fault
function • Xenon lamp shutter operation. Refer to the electrical guides. Check for
inoperative mechanism fault DTCs indicating a headlamp circuit fault
• Fuse(s) blown
• Lighting control switch Check the fuse(s) (see visual inspection). Check
fault the lighting control switch function. Check the
Warning lamp(s) • Left-hand steering left-hand steering column multifunction switch
inoperative column multifunction function. Check the warning lamp circuits. Refer
switch inoperative to the electrical guides. Check for DTCs indicating
• Circuit fault
an instrument cluster or CAN system fault.
Check for outstanding Technical Service Bulletins

(TSBs) relating to 'Headlamp Internal
Headlamp Wet - • Condensation
Condensation'. Carry out the instructions in the
Internal • Water Ingress
service bulletin to determine if the fault is related
to condensation or water ingress.
DTC Index
NOTE:
If the Control Module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer
module/component.
NOTE:
system).
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
terminals.
NOTE:
Prior to installation/replacement of the Headlamp assembly carry out all relevant internal visual
and mechanical checks for correct cable location and termination including: checks for corroded,
bent or backed out pins or terminals, incorrectly inserted connectors and harness damage due
to chaffing or incorrect routing.
NOTE:
If the control module has been removed and reinstalled, carry out a DTC code clear, cycle the
ignition state to off, then on. This will erase any DTCs that have been logged during the module
installation procedure.
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams,

Front or Rear Height • Front or Rear Height
B1A59- and check Front and Rear Height
Sensors - Circuit Sensors 5 volt supply
11 short to ground Sensors 5 volt supply circuit for short
short to ground
to ground
Front or Rear Height • Front or Rear Height Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams,
B1A59-
Sensors - Circuit Sensors 5 volt supply
12 and check Front and Rear Height
short to power short to power
Sensor 5 volt supply circuit for short to
power
Front Right Height • Front Right Height Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams,
C1A04-
Sensor - Circuit Sensor signal circuit and check Front Right Height Sensor
11 short to ground
short to ground signal circuit for short to ground
Front Right Height • Front Right Height Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams,
C1A04- Sensor - Circuit Sensor signal circuit and check Front Right Height Sensor
15 short to power or short to power or open signal circuit for short to power or
open circuit circuit open circuit
NOTE:
This DTC may be logged if the

vehicles wheels have been raised
from the floor
Front Right Height
C1A04- • Sensor (PWM) Signal
Sensor - Signal
64 out of range
plausibility failure Check the location, security and
mechanical operation of the Height
Sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams, and check Front Right
Height Sensor signal circuit for fault
Rear Right Height • Rear right Height Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams,
C1A06-
Sensor - Circuit Sensor signal circuit and check Rear Right Height Sensor
11 short to ground
short to ground signal circuit for short to ground
Rear Right Height • Rear right Height Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams,
C1A06- Sensor - Circuit Sensor signal circuit and check Rear Right Height Sensor
15 short to power or short to power or open signal circuit for short to power or
open circuit circuit open circuit
NOTE:
This DTC may be logged if the

vehicles wheels have been raised
from the floor
Rear Right Height
Sensor - Signal
64 out of range
mechanical operation of the Height
Sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams, and check Rear Right Height
Sensor signal circuit for fault
Turn the Headlamp Switch on, cycle
the ignition state to start the engine,
look for any errors in the Headlamp
Beam movement (compare with other
headlamp) and visually inspect the
lamp for internal damage or
dislocation (ball joints out). If no faults
Left Headlamp • Internal Headlamp
are evident refer to the electrical
B1A57- Leveling Motor - Motor Fault
circuit diagrams and check for circuit
01 General Electrical • Internal Headlamp
Circuit Fault fault between the Headlamp Power
Failure
Module and the swiveling feedback
sensor. If no mechanical or circuit
faults are evident, suspect headlamp
internal fault, replace as required.
Refer to the new module/component
Index
Turn the Headlamp Switch on, cycle

the ignition state to start the engine,
look for any errors in the Headlamp
Beam movement (compare with other
headlamp) and visually inspect the
lamp for internal damage or
dislocation (ball joints out). If no faults
Right Headlamp • Internal Headlamp
are evident refer to the electrical
B1A58- Leveling Motor - Motor Fault
circuit diagrams and check for circuit
01 General Electrical • Internal Headlamp
Circuit Fault fault between the Headlamp Power
Failure
Module and the swiveling feedback
sensor. If no mechanical or circuit
faults are evident, suspect headlamp
internal fault, replace as required.
Refer to the new module/component
Index
Check the Anti-lock Brake System

Lost communication Module for stored DTCs. Using the
with Anti-lock Brake • Lost communication manufacturer approved diagnostic
U0121- System (ABS) with the Anti-lock system, complete the CAN Network
00 Control Module - Brake System Module
Integrity test. Refer to the electrical
No sub type • CAN network fault
circuit diagrams and check the CAN
information network between the Headlamp
Leveling Module and the Anti-lock
Brake System Module
Check the Anti-lock Brake System

Module for stored DTCs. Using the
Lost communication manufacturer approved diagnostic
• Invalid signal from the
with Anti-lock Brake system, complete the CAN Network
U0121- Anti-lock Brake System
System (ABS) Integrity test. Refer to the electrical
86 Module
Control Module - • CAN network fault circuit diagrams and check the CAN
Signal invalid network between the Headlamp
Leveling Module and the Anti-lock
Brake System Module
Check the Engine Control Module for

stored DTCs. Using the manufacturer
• Lost communication approved diagnostic system, complete
Lost communication
U0100- with the Engine the CAN Network Integrity test. Refer
with ECM - No sub
00 Control Module to the electrical circuit diagrams and
type information • CAN network fault check the CAN network between the
Headlamp Leveling Module and the
Engine Control Module
Check the Transmission Control

Module for stored DTCs. Using the
• Lost communication
Lost communication system, complete the CAN Network
U0101- with the Transmission
with TCM - No sub Integrity test. Refer to the electrical
00 Control Module
type information • CAN network fault circuit diagrams and check the CAN
network between the Headlamp
Leveling Module and the Transmission
Control Module
Check the Auxiliary Junction Box for

stored DTCs. Using the manufacturer
Invalid data from • Invalid signal from the approved diagnostic system, complete
U0443- Body Control Auxiliary Junction Box the CAN Network Integrity test. Refer
00 Module B - No sub • Auxiliary Junction Box to the electrical circuit diagrams and
type information fault check the CAN network between the
Headlamp Leveling Module and the
Auxiliary Junction Box
High speed CAN • Adaptive Front Lighting Using the manufacturer approved
U0001- communication Bus System (AFS) Control diagnostic system, complete the CAN
49 - Internal electronic Module internal Network Integrity test. Refer to the
failure electronic failure electrical circuit diagrams and check
the CAN network to the Headlamp
Leveling Module. If no CAN Bus circuit
faults are evident suspect Headlamp
Leveling Module internal fault. Refer
to the new module/component
Index
Check the correct Headlamp Leveling

Internal Control • Configuration data Module is installed to vehicle
Module software received over the CAN
U0300- specification. Refit original or replace
incompatibility - BUS is different from
62 the stored the module as required. Refer to the
Signal Compare
configuration data new module/component installation
Failure.
Check other modules for stored DTCs.

High Speed CAN
U0001- • CAN Bus Off Carry out the CAN Network Integrity
Communication Bus
88 • CAN Bus Circuit fault test using the manufacturer approved
- Bus off
diagnostic system
• The stored Vehicle

Identification Number
is not the same as the Check the correct Headlamp Leveling
Vehicle
Central Broadcast Module is installed to vehicle
Identification
U3002- Vehicle Identification specification. Refit original or replace
Number (VIN) -
81 Number the module as required. Refer to the
Invalid Serial Data • The Headlamp Leveling new module/component installation
received Module has previously
been installed to
another vehicle
NOTE:
Sensor calibration routine must

be carried out with the vehicle
unladen
U3000- Control Module - • Height Sensors not

54 Missing Calibration calibrated to vehicle Calibrate the Headlamp Leveling
sensors using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system, carry the
out routine 'Headlamp and Axle
Sensor Calibration' from the 'Module
programming and configuration -
Setup and Configuration - Lighting'
U3000- Control Module - • Internal electronic Install a new Headlamp Leveling

49 Internal electronic failure Module, refer to the new module
failure installation note at the top of the DTC
Index
NOTE:
The Car Configuration File (CCF)

parameters required are (Vehicle
type)(Headlamp type)(Gearbox
type) and (Dayrunning light)
• Incorrect Car
U3000- Control Module -
Configuration File
55 Not Configured Re-configure the Car Configuration File
(CCF) data received
(CCF) File (CCF) as required using the
system. Clear DTC and re-test. If the
DTC remains suspect the Headlamp
Leveling Module, refer to the new
module installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
• The power supply to Suspect Charging fault. Check the

the Module has been battery condition and state of charge.
U3003-
Battery voltage above 16 Volts for Check the vehicle charging system.
17 more than 1000 Refer to the relevant workshop
milliseconds manual section
Suspect Battery or Charging fault.

Check the battery condition and state
of charge. Check the vehicle charging
• The power supply to system. Refer to the relevant
U3003- the Module has been workshop manual section. Clear the
Battery voltage
16 below 9 Volts for more DTC, cycle ignition state to off then on,
than 1000 milliseconds if DTC returns refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check power and
ground circuit to the Headlamp
Leveling Module
DTC Index
NOTE:
If the Control Module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer
module/component.
NOTE:
system).
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
terminals.
NOTE:
Prior to installation/replacement of the Headlamp assembly carry out all relevant internal visual
and mechanical checks for correct cable location and termination including: checks for corroded,
bent or backed out pins or terminals, incorrectly inserted connectors and harness damage due
to chaffing or incorrect routing.
NOTE:
If the control module has been removed and reinstalled, carry out a DTC code clear, cycle the
ignition state to off, then on. This will erase any DTCs that have been logged during the module
installation procedure
NOTE:
The Headlamp Power Module is referenced as the AFS ECU + Motors in the circuit diagrams.

B1A59- diagrams, and check Front and
Sensors - Circuit short to Sensors 5 volt supply
11 short to ground Rear Height Sensors 5 volt
ground
supply circuit for short to ground

B1A59- diagrams, and check Front and
Sensors - Circuit short to Sensors 5 volt supply
12 short to power Rear Height Sensor 5 volt supply
power
circuit for short to power

Front Right Height • Front Right Height
C1A04- diagrams, and check Front Right
Sensor - Circuit short to Sensor signal circuit
11 short to ground Height Sensor signal circuit for
ground
short to ground
• Front Right Height Refer to the electrical circuit

Front Right Height
C1A04- Sensor signal circuit diagrams, and check Front Right
Sensor - Circuit short to
15 short to power or open Height Sensor signal circuit for
power or open circuit circuit short to power or open circuit
NOTE:
This DTC may be logged if

the vehicles wheels have
been raised from the floor
Front Right Height
Sensor - Signal
64 out of range
mechanical operation of the
Height Sensor. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams, and
check Front Right Height Sensor
signal circuit for fault
• Rear Right Height
C1A06- Rear Right Height Sensor diagrams, and check Rear Right
Sensor signal circuit
11 - Circuit short to ground short to ground Height Sensor signal circuit for
short to ground
• Rear Right Height Refer to the electrical circuit

Rear Right Height Sensor
C1A06- Sensor signal circuit diagrams, and check Rear Right
- Circuit short to power
15 short to power or open Height Sensor signal circuit for
or open circuit circuit short to power or open circuit
NOTE:
This DTC may be logged if

the vehicles wheels have
been raised from the floor
Rear Right Height Sensor
- Signal plausibility
64 out of range
failure Check the location, security and
mechanical operation of the
Height Sensor. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams, and
check Rear Right Height Sensor
signal circuit for fault
NOTE:
The power module is a

service item
This DTC is logged if the

Headlamp Power Module supply
voltage is above 16 volts / below
• Headlamp Power
Left Headlamp Power 9.5 volts or the module suffers
B1D66- Module internal fault
Module - No sub type an internal failure. Record then
00 • Headlamp Power
information Module circuit fault clear the stored DTC, cycle the
ignition state and check
headlamp operation, if the DTC
returns refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check the
power, ground and signal circuit
of the Power Module for circuit
fault. If no circuit faults are
evident suspect the Headlamp
Power Module has an internal
fault, replace as required. Refer
the DTC Index
NOTE:

service item
This DTC is logged if the

Headlamp Power Module supply
voltage is above 16 volts / below
9.5 volts or the module suffers
an internal failure. Record then
• Headlamp Power clear the stored DTC, cycle the
Right Headlamp Power
B1D67- Module internal fault ignition state and check
Module - No sub type
00 • Headlamp Power
information headlamp operation, if the DTC
Module circuit fault
returns refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check the
power, ground and signal circuit
of the Power Module for circuit
fault. If no circuit faults are
evident suspect the Headlamp
the DTC Index
NOTE:

service item
• The parameter set of
Left Headlamp Power the power module does
B1D66- Module - not match the Adaptive Clear the DTC. Turn the
46 Calibration/parameter Front Lighting System Headlamp Switch on, cycle the
memory failure (AFS) Control Module
ignition state to start the engine,
parameter set
check for stored DTCs, if DTC
returns suspect the Headlamp
the DTC Index
NOTE:

service item
• The parameter set of

Right Headlamp Power the power module does Clear the DTC. Turn the
B1D67- Module - not match the Adaptive Headlamp Switch on, cycle the
46 Calibration/parameter Front Lighting System ignition state to start the engine,
memory failure (AFS) Control Module check for stored DTCs, if DTC
parameter set returns suspect the Headlamp
the DTC Index
Turn the Headlamp Switch on,

cycle the ignition state to start
the engine, look for any errors in
the Headlamp Beam movement
(compare with other headlamp)
and visually inspect the lamp for
internal damage or dislocation
(ball joints out). If no faults are
• Internal Headlamp evident refer to the electrical
Left Headlamp Swiveling
B1D68- Sensor Fault circuit diagrams and check for
Feedback Sensor circuit -
01 • Internal Headlamp circuit fault between the
General Electrical Failure Circuit Fault Headlamp Power Module and
the Headlamp Swiveling
Feedback Sensor. If no
mechanical or circuit faults are
evident suspect headlamp
internal fault, replace as
required. Refer to the new
module/component installation
• Internal Headlamp Turn the Headlamp Switch on,

B1D69- Right Headlamp Sensor Fault cycle the ignition state to start
01 Swiveling Feedback • Internal Headlamp
Sensor circuit - General Circuit Fault
Electrical Failure (compare with other headlamp)
evident refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check for
circuit fault between the
Headlamp Power Module and
the Headlamp Swiveling
Feedback Sensor. If no

• Internal Headlamp
Left Headlamp Swiveling evident refer to the electrical
B1D64- Motor Fault
Motor circuit - General circuit diagrams and check for
01 • Internal Headlamp
Electrical Failure Circuit Fault circuit fault between the
the Headlamp Swiveling Motor.
If no mechanical or circuit faults
are evident suspect headlamp

• Internal Headlamp the engine, and check headlamp
Right Headlamp
B1D65- Motor Fault operation, look for any errors in
Swiveling Motor circuit -
General Electrical Failure the Headlamp Beam movement
Circuit Fault
the Headlamp Swiveling Motor.
If no mechanical or circuit faults
are evident suspect headlamp

B10A3- Left Headlamp Swivel Actuator Fault
71 Actuator - Actuator stuck • Internal Headlamp
Circuit Fault circuit fault between the
the Swiveling Feedback
Actuator. If no mechanical or
circuit faults are evident suspect
headlamp internal fault, replace
as required. Refer to the new

• Internal Headlamp (compare with other headlamp)
B10A4- Right Headlamp Swivel Actuator Fault and visually inspect the lamp for
71 Actuator - Actuator stuck • Internal Headlamp
Circuit Fault
the Swiveling Feedback
Actuator. If no mechanical or
circuit faults are evident suspect
headlamp internal fault, replace
as required. Refer to the new

Left Headlamp Leveling evident refer to the electrical
B1A57- Motor Fault
motor - General circuit diagrams and check for
Electrical Failure Circuit Fault circuit fault between the
the Leveling motor. If no

• Internal Headlamp internal damage or dislocation
Right Headlamp Leveling (ball joints out). If no faults are
B1A58- Motor Fault
motor - General
01 • Internal Headlamp evident refer to the electrical
Electrical Failure Circuit Fault circuit diagrams and check for
the Leveling motor. If no
NOTE:
On Adaptive Front Lighting

System (AFS) equipped
vehicles the power feed to
Left Corner Lamp circuit the Corner Lamp is
B1C98- • Left Corner Lamp circuit
defect - Circuit short to supplied via the Headlamp
11 short to ground
ground Power Module

diagrams, and check Left Corner
Lamp circuit for short to ground
NOTE:

the Corner Lamp is
B1C98- Left Corner Lamp circuit • Left Corner Lamp circuit
supplied via the Headlamp
13 defect - Circuit open open
Power Module

diagrams, and check Left corner
lamp circuit for open circuit
NOTE:

the Corner Lamp is
Right Corner Lamp circuit
B1C99- • Right Corner Lamp supplied via the Headlamp
defect - Circuit short to
11 circuit short to ground Power Module
ground

diagrams, and check Right
corner lamp circuit for short to
ground
NOTE:

the Corner Lamp is
B1C99- Right Corner Lamp circuit • Right Corner Lamp supplied via the Headlamp
13 defect - Circuit open circuit open Power Module

diagrams, and check Right
corner lamp circuit for open
circuit
NOTE:
This circuit uses shielded

cable
NOTE:

service item

• Communication Circuit
fault diagrams, and check the
Lost communication with
• Headlamp Power power/ground supply and
U1A39- Right Headlamp Power
Module internal fault Communication circuit to the
00 Module - No sub type • Headlamp Power Headlamp Power Module. Using
information Module Power or the manufacturer approved
Ground supply fault
diagnostic system, clear stored
DTCs in the Adaptive Front
Lighting System (AFS) Control
Module. Cycle the ignition state
to off, then return to on and
check for stored DTCs. If DTCs
U1A39-00 and U1A38-00 return
suspect Adaptive Front Lighting
System (AFS) Control Module
internal fault, If only DTC U1A39-
00 returns suspect Headlamp
Power Module internal fault.
Replace as required. Refer to the
new module/component
the DTC Index
NOTE:
This circuit uses shielded

cable
NOTE:

service item

diagrams, and check the
• Communication Circuit power/ground supply and
fault Communication circuit to the
Lost communication with
• Headlamp Power Headlamp Power Module. Using
U1A38- Left Headlamp Power
Module internal fault the manufacturer approved
00 Module - No sub type • Headlamp Power diagnostic system, clear stored
information Module Power or
DTCs in the Adaptive Front
Ground supply fault
Module. Cycle the ignition state
to off, then return to on and
check for stored DTCs. If DTCs
U1A39-00 and U1A38-00 return
suspect Adaptive Front Lighting
internal fault, If only DTC U1A38-
00 returns suspect Headlamp
Power Module internal fault.
Replace as required. Refer to the
new module/component
the DTC Index
Check the Steering Angle Sensor

Lost communication with • Lost communication Module for stored DTCs. Using
U0126- Steering Angle Sensor with the Steering Angle the manufacturer approved
00 Module - No sub type Sensor Module
diagnostic system, complete the
information • CAN network fault
CAN Network Integrity test.
diagrams and check the CAN
network between the Adaptive
Front Lighting System (AFS)
Control Module and the Steering
Angle Sensor Module
Check the Steering Angle Sensor

Module for stored DTCs. Using
Lost communication with CAN Network Integrity test.
U0126- Steering Angle Sensor
Steering Angle Sensor Refer to the electrical circuit
86 Module
Module - Invalid signal • CAN network fault diagrams and check the CAN
Control Module and the Steering
Angle Sensor Module
Check the Anti-lock Brake

System Module for stored DTCs.
approved diagnostic system,
Lost communication with • Lost communication complete the CAN Network
U0121- Anti-lock Brake System with the Anti-lock Brake Integrity test. Refer to the
00 (ABS) Control Module - System Module electrical circuit diagrams and
No sub type information • CAN network fault check the CAN network between
the Adaptive Front Lighting
and the Anti-lock Brake System
Module
Check the Anti-lock Brake

System Module for stored DTCs.
Lost communication with • Invalid signal from the complete the CAN Network
U0121- Anti-lock Brake System Anti-lock Brake System Integrity test. Refer to the
86 (ABS) Control Module - Module electrical circuit diagrams and
Signal invalid • CAN network fault check the CAN network between
and the Anti-lock Brake System
Module
U0100- Lost communication with • Lost communication Check the Engine Control
00 ECM - No sub type with the Engine Control Module for stored DTCs. Using
information Module the manufacturer approved
• CAN network fault diagnostic system, complete the
CAN Network Integrity test.
diagrams and check the CAN
Control Module and the Engine
Control Module
Check the Transmission Control

Module for stored DTCs. Using
• Lost communication
Lost communication with CAN Network Integrity test.
U0101- with the Transmission
TCM - No sub type Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Control Module
information • CAN network fault diagrams and check the CAN
Control Module and the
Transmission Control Module
Check the Auxiliary Junction Box

for stored DTCs. Using the
Invalid data from Body CAN Network Integrity test.
U0443- Auxiliary Junction Box
Control Module B - no Refer to the electrical circuit
00 • Auxiliary Junction Box
sub type information fault diagrams and check the CAN
Control Module and the
Auxiliary Junction Box

complete the CAN Network
• CAN network fault
High speed CAN • Adaptive Front Lighting Integrity test. Refer to the
U0001- electrical circuit diagrams and
communication Bus - System (AFS) Control
49 Module internal check the CAN network to the
Internal electronic failure
electronic failure Headlamp Leveling Module. If no
CAN Bus circuit faults are
evident suspect Adaptive Front
Module internal fault, replace as
• Configuration data Check the correct Adaptive Front

received over the CAN Lighting System (AFS) Control
BUS is different from Module is installed to vehicle
Internal Control Module the stored
U0300- specification. Refit original or
software incompatibility configuration data
62 • The Headlamp Leveling replace the module as required.
- Signal Compare Failure.
Module has previously Refer to the new
been installed to module/component installation
another vehicle note at the top of the DTC Index
Carry out the CAN Network

High Speed CAN
U0001- • CAN Bus Off Integrity test using the
Communication Bus -
88 • CAN Bus Circuit fault manufacturer approved
Bus off
diagnostic system
• The stored Vehicle

Identification Number is
Check the correct Adaptive Front
not the same as the
Central Broadcast Lighting System (AFS) Control
Vehicle Identification Module is installed to vehicle
Vehicle Identification
U3002- Number specification. Refit original or
Number (VIN) - Invalid
81 • The Adaptive Front replace the module as required.
Serial Data received Lighting System (AFS) Refer to the new
Control Module has
previously been
installed to another note at the top of the DTC Index
vehicle
NOTE:
Sensor calibration routine

must be carried out with
the vehicle unladen
U3000- Control Module - Missing • Height sensors not

54 Calibration calibrated to vehicle Calibrate the Headlamp Leveling
sensors using the manufacturer
carry the out routine 'Headlamp
and Axle Sensor Calibration'
from the 'Module programming
and configuration - Setup and
Configuration - Lighting'
Suspect an internal fault, replace

U3000- Control Module - • Internal electronic System (AFS) Control Module as
49 Internal electronic failure failure required, refer to the new
NOTE:
The Car Configuration File

(CCF) parameters required
are (Vehicle
type)(Headlamp
type)(Gearbox type) and
(Dayrunning light)
• Incorrect Car
U3000- Control Module - Not
Configuration File (CCF) Re-configure the Car
55 Configured data received Configuration File (CCF) as
required using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system.
Clear DTC and re-test. If the DTC
remains suspect the Adaptive
Control Module, replace as
Suspect Charging fault. Check

• The power supply to the battery condition and state
U3003- the Module has been of charge. Check the vehicle
Battery voltage above 16 Volts for more charging system. Refer to the
17
than 1000 milliseconds relevant workshop manual
section
Suspect Battery or Charging

• The power supply to fault. Check the battery
U3003- the Module has been condition and state of charge.
Battery voltage
16 below 9 Volts for more Check the vehicle charging
than 1000 milliseconds system. Refer to the relevant
workshop manual section. Clear
the DTC, cycle ignition state to
off then on, if DTC returns refer
to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check power and ground
circuit to the Adaptive Front
Module
Front Fog Lamp (86.40.96)

Removal
NOTE:
Left-hand shown, right-hand similar.

2
3 . Remove the front wheel and tire.

For additional information, refer to Wheel and Tire (74.20.05)
4 . Release the front of the fender splash shield.
Tie the splash shield aside.

5 . Remove the front fog lamp.
Installation
1 . Install the front fog lamp.

Tighten the Torx bolts.
3 . Install the wheel and tire.


5 . NOTE:
The fog lamp beam should be set at 1.2% below the horizontal and parallel.
Check the fog lamp beam alignment.

Headlamp Assembly (86.41.33)
Removal
WARNING: Vehicles fitted with Xenon headlamps, the following precautions must be
observed. Failure to comply may result in exposure to ultra violet rays, severe electric shock, burns
or the risk of explosion. Ensure the headlamps are switched off at all times. Eye and hand
protection must be worn. Never switch on the lamps or test the bulbs with the lamp holder
released from the headlamp.
2 . Open the hood.
3
. CAUTION: Always protect paintwork and glass when removing exterior
components.
Release the headlamp assembly.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Release the locating pegs.
4 . Disconnect the washer jet hose.

5 . Remove the LH headlamp assembly.
6 . Remove the headlamp bulb.
Remove the cover.
Release the clip.

7 . Remove the headlamp inner bulb.
Remove the cover.
Release the clip.
8 . Remove the turn signal indicator bulb.
Release the bulb holder.

9 . Remove the side marker bulb.
Release the bulb holder.

10 . Remove the gas discharge modules.
11 . Remove the headlamp washer jet.
Disconnect the washer jet hose.
Installation
1 . Install the headlamp washer jet.
Connect the washer jet hose.
2 . Install the gas discharge modules.

3 . Install the side marker bulb.
Install the bulb holder.
4 . Install the turn signal indicator bulb.
Install the bulb holder.
5 . Install the headlamp inner bulb.
Install the cover.
6 . Install the headlamp bulb.
Install the cover.
7 . Install the headlamp assembly.
Position the locating pegs.
8 . Connect the washer jet hose.
9 . Secure the headlamp assembly.
Tighten the bolts.

10 . Close the hood.

Headlamp Bulb - Vehicles With: High
Intensity Discharge Headlamps (86.42.14)
Removal
WARNING: Vehicles fitted with Xenon headlamps, the following precautions must be
observed. Failure to comply may result in exposure to ultra violet rays, severe electric shock, burns
or the risk of explosion. Ensure the headlamps are switched off at all times. Eye and hand
protection must be worn. Never switch on the lamps or test the bulbs with the lamp holder
released from the headlamp.
2 . Remove the headlamp assembly.

3 . Remove the headlamp bulb.
Remove the cover.
Release the clip.

4 . Remove the headlamp bulb retainer.
Release the clip.

Installation
1 . Attach the headlamp bulb retainer.
2 . Install the headlamp bulb.
Secure with the clip.
Install the cover.
3 . Install the headlamp assembly.


Headlamp Leveling Module
Removal
2 . Remove the blower motor.

For additional information, refer to Blower Motor (82.25.66)
3 . NOTE:
LH illustration shown, RH is similar.
Remove the RH cowl side trim panel.
Reposition the carpet for access.
Remove the 4 bolts.

5 . Remove the headlamp leveling module.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
2 . Install the headlamp leveling module.

Headlamp Leveling Front Sensor
Removal
1
2 . Remove the LH front wheel and tire.

3 . Remove the headlamp levelling sensor.
Disconnect the height sensor link.
Remove the 2 bolts.
4 . NOTE:
Remove the height sensor link.

5 . NOTE:
Remove the bracket.
Installation
1 . NOTE:
Align to the position noted on removal.
Install the bracket.
Tighten the Allen bolts to 5 Nm (4 lb.ft).
2 . Install the height sensor link.
3 . Install the headlamp levelling sensor.
Connect the height sensor link.

4 . Install the wheel and tire.
Headlamp Leveling Rear Sensor
Removal
1
2 . Remove the headlamp levelling sensor.
Disconnect the height sensor link.
Remove the 2 bolts.
3 . NOTE:
NOTE:
Remove the bracket.

Installation
1 . NOTE:
Install the bracket.
Tighten the Allen bolts to 5 Nm (4 lb.ft).
2 . Install the headlamp levelling sensor.
Install the height sensor link.

High Mounted Stoplamp (86.41.01)
Removal
1 . Remove the liftgate lower trim panel.
For additional information, refer to Liftgate Lower Trim Panel
2 . Disconnect the high mounted stoplamp electrical connector.
3 . Remove the high mounted stoplamp.
Carefully release the Torx bolt covers.
Installation
1 . Install the high mounted stoplamp.

Install the Torx bolt covers.
2 . Connect the high mounted stoplamp electrical connector.
3 . Install the liftgate lower trim panel.

Rear Lamp Assembly (86.40.70)
Removal
NOTE:
Take great care when removing the rear lamp assembly as the forward point of the lens can be
easily damaged.
1 . Remove the luggage compartment grille.
Release the clip.
2 . If installed, remove the loadspace lamp.
3.
CAUTION: Note the fitted position of the component prior to removal.
Remove the rear lamp assembly trim panel.

4
. CAUTION: Take great care when removing the rear lamp assembly as the forward
point of the lens can be easily damaged.
Remove the rear lamp assembly.
Remove the 2 nuts.
Carefully release the clip.

5 . NOTE:
Remove the wiring harness.
Release the 4 bulb holders.
Installation
1 . Install the wiring harness
Install the bulb holders.
2 . NOTE:
Install the rear lamp assembly.
Secure with the clip.
Tighten the nuts to 2 Nm (1.5 lb.ft).
3 NOTE:
.
Position the rear lamp assembly trim panel upper edge behind the rear quarter panel
lip.
Install the rear lamp assembly trim panel.
4 . Install the loadspace lamp.
5 . Install the grille.

Fog Lamp Bulb
Removal
NOTE:
Left-hand shown, right-hand similar.

2 . Turn the steering on to full lock for access.
3 . Release the front of the fender splash shield.
Tie the splash shield aside.
4 . Remove the front fog lamp bulb.
Release and disconnect the electrical connector.

Installation
1 . Install the fog lamp bulb.
Tighten the Torx bolts.

Rear Fog and Reversing Lamp - 2-Door
Removal
1 . Remove the liftgate lower trim panel.
2 . Remove the fog and reversing lamp.
Remove the 3 plastic nuts.
Installation
1 . Install the fog and reversing lamp.
Install the plastic nuts.

2 . Install the liftgate lower trim panel.
Rear Fog and Reversing Lamp -
Convertible
Removal
1 . Remove the luggage compartment lid trim panel.
For additional information, refer to Luggage Compartment Lid Trim Panel (76.19.05)
2 . Remove the reverse/fog lamp.
Remove the 3 plastic nuts.
Installation
1 . Install the reverse/fog lamp.
Install the plastic nuts.

2 . Install the luggage compartment lid trim panel.
For additional information, refer to Luggage Compartment Lid Trim Panel (76.19.05)
417-02 : Interior Lighting
Interior Lighting
COMPONENT LOCATION
1 Left Hand (LH) vanity mirror
2 Overhead console (Coupe version shown)
3 LH map reading lamp switch
4 Interior lamp switch
5 Right Hand (RH) map reading lamp switch
6 Map and interior lamps
7 RH vanity mirror
8 LH and RH door puddle lamps
9 LH and RH footwell lamps
10 LH and RH luggage compartment lamps
11 Glovebox lamp
INTRODUCTION
The interior lamps are controlled by the Central Junction Box (CJB) and have two modes of operation:
manual and automatic. In the manual mode the interior lamps can be switched on and off using the
momentary switches adjacent to each lamp or disabled completely using the same switches. In the
automatic mode the interior lamp functionality is controlled by the CJB on receipt of various input
signals.
The CJB receives the following inputs which affect the operation of the interior lamps:
• Ignition switch
• Door latch switches
• Liftgate latch switch
• Glovebox lamp switch
• Unlock signal
• Main interior lamp switch
• Map reading lamp switches
• Delayed power off relay
• Vanity mirror lamp switches.
The driver's and passenger door puddle lamps are controlled by the driver's door module and the
passenger door module respectively on receipt of Controller Area Network (CAN) signals from the
CJB.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE:
A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN bus

1 Battery
2 Megafuse (175A)
3 Megafuse (175A)
4 CJB
6 Liftgate latch switch
7 Luggage compartment lamp
8 Luggage compartment lamp
9 Passenger door module
10 Passenger door puddle lamp
11 Driver's door module
12 Driver's door puddle lamp
13 Glovebox lamp switch
14 Glovebox lamp
15 Driver's vanity mirror
16 Passenger vanity mirror
17 Driver's footwell lamp
18 Passenger footwell lamp
19 Driver's map reading lamp
20 Interior lamp
21 Passenger map reading lamp

Interior Lighting
For a detailed description of the interior lighting system, refer to the relevant Description and
Interior Lighting

2 . Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage and system integrity.
Electrical
• Fuse(s)
• Bulb(s)
• Wiring harness
• Loose or corroded connector(s)
• Accessories
• Switch(es)
diagnostic system.
417-04 : Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

INTRODUCTION
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) use the full intensity low beam headlamps which are permanently
illuminated when the vehicle is being driven. DRL are used in a number of markets and there are two
systems to cover these markets.
For additional information, refer to Exterior Lighting (417-01 Exterior Lighting)
DRL CANADIAN MARKET

DRL for this market use full intensity low beam headlamps. The side marker lamps, tail lamps and
license plate lamps will be on, but instrument cluster illumination will be off. DRL are active when the
following parameters are met:
• PARK is not selected on automatic transmission selector lever

• Power mode 6 (ignition on) detected by the auxiliary junction box
• The Central Junction Box (CJB) receives an engine running signal
• The lighting control switch is in the off or side lamps position.
NOTE:
If the lighting control switch is moved to the headlamp position, DRL are deactivated and normal
side lamp and headlamp functionality is operational.
NOTE:
Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) (where fitted) is non-functional when the DRL are active.
NOTE:
When DRL are active, the headlamp flash function using the left hand steering column
multifunction switch will operate normally.
The high beam headlamp function using the left hand steering column stalk switch will be
deactivated. When the selector lever is in the PARK position on automatic transmission vehicles, DRL
are turned off. This is to reduce battery discharge during long periods of engine idling in cold climate
conditions. When the selector lever is moved from the PARK position, normal DRL functionality is
restored.
DRL DENMARK, HOLLAND, NORWAY, SWEDEN, FINLAND AND POLAND

DRL for these markets use full intensity low beam headlamps. Side lamps and license plate lamps will
be on, but instrument cluster illumination will be off. DRL are active when the following parameters
are met:
• Power mode 6 (ignition on) detected by the auxiliary junction box

• The CJB receives an engine running signal
• The lighting control switch is in the off position.
NOTE:
When DRL are active, the headlamp flash function using the left hand steering column
multifunction switch will operate normally. The high beam headlamp function using the left
hand steering column stalk switch will be deactivated.
If the lighting control switch is moved to the side lamp or headlamp positions, DRL are deactivated
and normal side lamp and headlamp functionality is operational.

For a detailed description of the daytime running lamps, refer to the relevant Description and

Electrical
• Fuse(s)
• Bulb(s)
• Switch(es)
• Wiring Harness
diagnostic system.
418 : Electrical Distribution
418-00 : Module Communications Network
Specifications
Specifications
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in

Junction box - nut/screw 4 3 35
INTRODUCTION
A number of different types of communication network are incorporated into the vehicle wiring
harnesses for the transmission of commands and information between control modules. The
configuration installed on a particular vehicle depends on the model and equipment level.
The communication networks available on the vehicle are:
• Medium speed Controller Area Network (CAN) bus

• High speed CAN bus
• Media Orientated System Transport (MOST) ring
• Local Interconnect Network (LIN) bus
• Private CAN bus
Bus Baud Rate
Medium speed CAN bus 125 kbits/s
High speed CAN bus 500 kbits/s
MOST ring 24 mbits/s
LIN bus 9.6 kbits/s
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) BUS

The CAN bus is a high speed broadcast network where control modules automatically transmit
information every few microseconds. Information is broadcast down a pair of twisted wires, known
as 'CAN high' and 'CAN low'. Information is transmitted on the CAN bus as a voltage difference
between the two wires.
Two CAN bus networks are used on the vehicle; medium speed and high speed, with the instrument
cluster acting as a gateway between the two networks. The table below shows the wire colours used
on both networks.
Network High Low
Medium Speed White (W) Blue (U)

High Speed Yellow (Y) Green (G)
Private CAN bus

The private CAN bus networks used on the vehicle can be either medium or high speed depending on
which vehicle system they are being used. All private CAN bus networks are proprietary systems and
cannot be interrogated using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS).
Diagnostic Socket
The diagnostic socket allows the transfer of information between the vehicle electronic control
modules and the IDS. The diagnostic socket is connected directly to both the medium speed CAN bus
and the high speed CAN bus and is located below the drivers side of the instrument panel.
MEDIA ORIENTATED SYSTEM TRANSPORT (MOST) RING

The MOST ring uses a fibre optic cable to transport data and audio around the information and
entertainment system. The fibre optic cable is arranged in a ring, with each unit on the ring having a
'MOST in' and 'MOST out' connection.
MOST is a synchronous network. A timing master supplies the clock and all other components on the
ring synchronize their operation to this clock. The timing master for the MOST ring is the Information
and Entertainment control module.
When handling MOST fibre optic cables the following precautions should be observed.
• After disconnection of any cables, carefully install appropriate dust caps to protect the
mating faces of the connectors from damage or contamination.
• Avoid introducing bends of less than 25 mm (0.98 inches) radius or kinks into the fibre optic
cable during service or repair. Tight bends or kinks could impair operation, cause immediate
system failure, or future system failure.
• Avoid excessive force, strain or stress on the fibers and connectors, especially permanent
stress after reinstallation.
Software Download Socket

The MOST software download socket is located below the drivers side of the instrument panel. A
service loop is fitted to the end of the socket to complete the MOST ring. If the service loop is
removed the MOST ring will be broken and all components on the ring will stop operating.
NOTE:
The software download socket is used for engineering purposes only and must not be used in
service.
Ring Break Diagnostics
Incorporated into the Auxiliary Junction Box (AJB) is a Ring Break Diagnostics (RBD) link. The RBD link
houses a copper link which when removed initiates the ring break diagnostics mode. The ring break
diagnostics mode allows the technician to locate an optical fiber break in the MOST ring. To initiate
the ring break diagnostics mode, carry out the following process:
• Connect the Jaguar approved diagnostic system.

• Ensure the vehicle is in power mode 4 or greater.
• Remove the RBD link for the length of time specified by the Jaguar approved diagnostic
system.
• Replace the RBD link.
After approximately 30 seconds a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be logged in the Information
and Entertainment Control Module, identifying the location of the fault. The DTC can be read and
interrogated using the Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
LOCAL INTERCONNECT NETWORK (LIN) BUS

The LIN bus is a low speed broadcast network that employs master and slave components. The
master component transmits a message to the slave components identifying which slave is to
respond. This message has a header (slave identifier) and an empty data field. The identified slave
component fills the data field with the relevant information and returns the message to the master
component.
Unlike the CAN bus networks, the LIN bus utilizes a single wire network.
CONTROL DIAGRAM - MEDIUM SPEED CAN BUS

NOTE:
N = Medium speed CAN bus

2 Information and Entertainment control module
3 Convertible top control module
4 Tire pressure monitoring control module

5 Parking aid module
6 Keyless vehicle module
8 Diagnostic socket
9 Passenger door control module
10 Drivers door control module
11 Passenger seat module
12 Drivers seat module
13 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) module
NOTE:
Only the buttons of the Integrated control panel are connected to the medium speed CAN bus.
The Touch Screen Display (TSD) is connected to the MOST ring.
CONTROL DIAGRAM - HIGH SPEED CAN BUS

NOTE:
D = High speed CAN bus

1 Diagnostic socket
2 Electric steering column lock
3 Park brake module

5 Transmission Control Module (TCM)
7 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) module
8 Restraints control module
9 Adaptive front lighting system control module
10 Gear shift module
11 Adaptive Damping Control Module (ADCM)
12 Pedestrian protection module
13 Adaptive speed control module
CONTROL DIAGRAM - MOST RING (UP TO 2009 MY)

NOTE:
P = MOST ring
1 Software download socket
3 Multi-media module
4 DAB/SDARS receiver
5 Bluetooth© phone module
6 TSD
7 Audio system amplifier
CONTROL DIAGRAM - MOST RING (FROM 2009 MY)

NOTE:
P = MOST ring

1 Software download socket
4 Multi-media module
5 DAB/SDARS receiver
7 TSD
8 Audio system amplifier
CONTROL DIAGRAM - LIN BUS AND PRIVATE CAN BUS

NOTE:
O = LIN bus; U = Private CAN bus

1 CJB
2 Active anti-theft sounder
4 Engine start control module
5 Steering wheel module
7 Passenger seat switch module
9 Drivers seat switch module
11 Adaptive speed control radar
12 ABS module
13 Yaw rate/acceleration sensor
14 Steering angle sensor
16 Drivers door switch module

For a detailed description of the communications network, refer to the relevant Description and

CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage may result.
Electrical
• Fuses (refer to electrical guide)

• Wiring harness
• Correct engagement of electrical connectors
• Loose or corroded connections
• Routing of fibre optic harnesses
• Correct engagement of optical connectors
• Correct placement of optical connectors (ring order)
• Correct assembly of optical connectors (backout, etc)
• Damage to fibre (chafing, abrasion, kinking, cuts, etc)
4 . If the cause is not visually evident check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC
Index.
DTC Index
NOTE:
NOTE:
diagnostic system).
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
terminals.
Rear Junction Box (RJB)

supplies to RJB. Check CAN
Fuel pump • RJB fault
communications between RJB
B100A51 authorisation • Low speed CAN fault
• Instrument cluster fault and instrument cluster. Check
target ID not stored
power and ground supplies to
instrument cluster

• Low speed CAN fault between RJB and instrument
• RJB fault cluster. Check power and
• Instrument cluster fault ground supplies to RJB and
Fuel pump • Incorrect module installed
instrument cluster. Confirm
B100A62 authorisation signal (RJB/Instrument cluster)
• Write target SID correct module installed. Re-
compare failure
synchronisation error synchronise ID by re-configuring
following re-programming the RJB as a new module. Check
• Noise/EMC related error CAN network for

supplies to RJB and instrument
• RJB fault cluster. Check CAN
Fuel Pump
• Low speed CAN fault communications between RJB
B100A63 Authorisation Time
• Instrument cluster fault and instrument cluster. Check
Out • Low battery voltage <9V battery is in fully charged and
serviceable condition, refer to
the battery care manual

Steering column
• Steering column lock ground diagrams and test steering
B102612 lock ground circuit
circuit - short to power column lock ground circuit for
short to power
short to power

Blower fan relay • Blower fan relay circuit -
B10AF12 diagrams and test blower fan
relay circuit for short to power

Blower fan relay • Blower fan relay circuit -
B10AF14 open load or short short to ground, high
resistance the manufacturer approved
to ground
diagnostic system
Air bag deployed
• Air bag deployed circuit - diagrams and test air bag
B10DD12 circuit short to
short to ground deployed circuit for short to
ground
ground
Air bag deployed Carry out any pinpoint tests

• Air bag deployed circuit -
circuit open circuit, associated with this DTC using
B10DD15 short to power, high
short to power or resistance the manufacturer approved
no signal diagnostic system

Air bag deployed diagrams and test air bag
B10DD38 circuit signal out of • Signal frequency incorrect deployed circuit between RCM,
specification ECM and RJB for short to
power, ground and open circuit
Parking aid ignition Carry out any pinpoint tests

supply short to • Parking aid ignition supply associated with this DTC using
B111211 circuit - short to ground
ground or over the manufacturer approved
temperature diagnostic system

Parking aid ignition • Parking aid ignition supply diagrams and test parking aid
B111213
supply open load circuit - high resistance ignition supply circuit for high
resistance
Left front comfort Carry out any pinpoint tests

solenoid short to • Left front comfort solenoid associated with this DTC using
B111311
ground or over circuit - short to ground the manufacturer approved

Left front comfort • Left front comfort solenoid diagrams and test left front
B111313 circuit - high resistance
solenoid open load comfort solenoid circuit for high
resistance
Right front comfort Carry out any pinpoint tests

solenoid short to • Right front comfort solenoid associated with this DTC using
B111411
ground or over circuit - short to ground the manufacturer approved
Right front comfort • Right front comfort solenoid Refer to the electrical circuit
B111413 circuit - high resistance diagrams and test right front
solenoid open load
comfort solenoid circuit for high
resistance
High mounted stop Carry out any pinpoint tests

• High mounted stop lamp
lamp control short associated with this DTC using
B111511 control circuit - short to
to ground or over ground the manufacturer approved

High mounted stop • High mounted stop lamp
diagrams and test high
B111513 lamp control open control circuit - high
resistance mounted stop lamp control
load
circuit for high resistance
Left rear lamp

assembly control • Left rear lamp assembly
B111611 circuit short to control circuit - short to
ground the manufacturer approved
ground or over
diagnostic system
temperature

Left rear lamp • Left rear lamp assembly
diagrams and test left rear lamp
B111613 assembly control control circuit - high
resistance assembly control circuit for high
circuit open load
resistance
Right rear lamp

assembly control • Right rear lamp assembly
ground or over
diagnostic system
temperature

Right rear lamp • Right rear lamp assembly
diagrams and test right rear
B111713 assembly control control circuit - high
resistance lamp assembly control circuit
circuit open load
for high resistance
Left rear side

marker control
• Left rear side marker control associated with this DTC using
B111811 circuit short to
ground or over
diagnostic system
temperature

Left rear side
• Left rear side marker control diagrams and test left rear side
B111813 marker control
circuit - high resistance marker control circuit for high
circuit open load
resistance
Right rear side
marker control • Right rear side marker
ground or over
diagnostic system
temperature

Right rear side • Right rear side marker
diagrams and test right rear
B111913 marker control control circuit - high
resistance side marker control circuit for
circuit open load
high resistance
License plate lamps Carry out any pinpoint tests

control circuit short • License plate lamps control associated with this DTC using
B111A11
to ground or over circuit - short to ground the manufacturer approved

License plate lamps
• License plate lamps control diagrams and test license plate
B111A13 control circuit open circuit - high resistance lamps control circuit for high
load
resistance
Luggage
compartment lid Carry out any pinpoint tests
• Luggage compartment lid
open motor control associated with this DTC using
B111D11 open motor control circuit -
circuit short to short to ground the manufacturer approved
ground or over diagnostic system
temperature
Luggage Carry out any pinpoint tests

compartment lid associated with this DTC using
B111D13 open motor control circuit -
open motor control high resistance the manufacturer approved
circuit open load diagnostic system
Luggage
compartment lid Carry out any pinpoint tests
lamps power associated with this DTC using
B111E11 lamps power supply circuit -
supply circuit short short to ground the manufacturer approved
to ground or over diagnostic system
temperature
Luggage Refer to the electrical circuit

diagrams and test luggage
B111E13 compartment lid lamps power supply circuit -
lamps power high resistance compartment lid lamps power
supply circuit open supply circuit for high resistance
load

Restraints ignition
• Restraints ignition relay diagrams and test restraints
B112311 relay short to
circuit - short to ground ignition supply relay circuit for
ground
short to ground

Restraints ignition
• Restraints ignition relay diagrams and test restraints
B112312 relay short to circuit - short to power ignition supply relay circuit for
power
short to power
External luggage Carry out any pinpoint tests

compartment lid associated with this DTC using
B113E23 • Signal stuck low
release switch the manufacturer approved
stuck diagnostic system

Fuel sender No.1 • Fuel sender No.1 circuit - associated with this DTC using
B1A751C voltage out of range
fault the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

Fuel sender No.2 • Fuel sender No.2 circuit - associated with this DTC using
B1A761C
fault voltage out of range the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
Right fog lamp Carry out any pinpoint tests

control circuit short • Right fog lamp control associated with this DTC using
B1A7911 circuit - short to ground
to ground or over the manufacturer approved

Rear fog lamp
• Rear fog lamp control circuit diagrams and test rear fog lamp
B1A7913 control circuit open
- high resistance control circuit for high
load
resistance

Horn relay short to • Horn relay circuit - short to
B1C5512 diagrams and test horn control
power power
Horn relay open Carry out any pinpoint tests

• Horn relay circuit - short to
B1C5514 load or short to associated with this DTC using
ground, high resistance
diagnostic system

Heated rear
• Heated rear window relay diagrams and test heated rear
B1C8312 window relay coil
circuit - short to power window relay circuit for short to
short to power
power
Heated rear Carry out any pinpoint tests

• Heated rear window relay
window relay coil associated with this DTC using
B1C8314 circuit - short to ground,
open load or short high resistance the manufacturer approved
to ground diagnostic system
Fuel filler door lock

motor control • Fuel filler door lock motor
B1C9111 circuit short to control circuit - short to
ground or over
diagnostic system
temperature

Fuel filler door lock • Fuel filler door lock motor
B1C9113 motor control control circuit - high
resistance the manufacturer approved
circuit open load
diagnostic system
Left turn signal Carry out any pinpoint tests

lamp control circuit • Left turn signal lamp control associated with this DTC using
B1D0611
short to ground or circuit - short to ground the manufacturer approved
over temperature diagnostic system

Left turn signal
• Left turn signal lamp control diagrams and test left turn
B1D0613 lamp control circuit
circuit - high resistance signal lamp control circuit for
open load
high resistance
Right turn signal Carry out any pinpoint tests

• Right turn signal lamp
lamp control circuit associated with this DTC using
B1D0711 control circuit - short to
short to ground or ground the manufacturer approved
over temperature diagnostic system

Right turn signal • Right turn signal lamp
diagrams and test right turn
B1D0713 lamp control circuit control circuit - high
resistance signal lamp control circuit for
open load
high resistance
B1D3523 Hazard switch stuck • Signal stuck low Carry out any pinpoint tests
diagnostic system
Check battery is in fully charged

• Circuit voltage below
B2A9016 Battery low and serviceable condition, refer
threshold
to the battery care manual
Check battery is in fully charged

• Circuit voltage below
B2A9116 Battery discharged and serviceable condition, refer
threshold
to the battery care manual

Right stoplamp
• Right stoplamp control associated with this DTC using
C111A11 short to ground or
over temperature
diagnostic system

Right stoplamp
• Right stoplamp control diagrams and test right
C111A13 control circuit open
circuit - high resistance stoplamp control circuit for high
load
resistance
Left stoplamp Carry out any pinpoint tests

control circuit short • Left stoplamp control circuit associated with this DTC using
C111B11 - short to ground

Left stoplamp
• Left stoplamp control circuit diagrams and test left stoplamp
C111B13 control circuit open
- high resistance control circuit for high
load
resistance
Reversing lamp Carry out any pinpoint tests

control circuit short • Reversing lamp control associated with this DTC using
C112011 circuit - short to ground

Reversing lamp
• Reversing lamp control diagrams and test reversing
C112013 control circuit open
circuit - high resistance lamp control circuit for high
load
resistance

Fuel pump relay • Fuel pump relay circuit -
P123011 diagrams and test fuel pump
short to ground short to ground
relay circuit for short to ground
Fuel pump relay • Fuel pump relay circuit -
P123012 diagrams and test fuel pump
Medium Speed Carry out any pinpoint tests

CAN associated with this DTC using
U001088 • bus off
Communication the manufacturer approved

Lost associated with this DTC using
U014000 • Lost communication CJB
communication CJB the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

communication • Lost communication with associated with this DTC using
U015500

U016400
with climate climate control module the manufacturer approved

communication • Lost Communication with associated with this DTC using
U020600
with convertible HDM the manufacturer approved
top module diagnostic system
Lost
communication • Lost communication with
U021400 with remote remote keyless entry
module the manufacturer approved
keyless entry
diagnostic system
module

Internal control diagnostic system. Clear DTC
• Calibration parameter
U030046 module software and re-test, if DTC remains,
failure
incompatibility suspect the RJB, refer to the
new module installation note at
U1A1449 CAN initialisation • Internal electronic failure Install a new RJB, refer to the
failure the top of the DTC Index
Install a new RJB, refer to the

U300049 Control module • Internal electronic failure new module installation note at

U300055 configuration data and re-test. If the DTC remains
data received
does not match suspect the RJB, refer to the
Vehicle match. Corrupt VIN data Install original module, check
U300281 Identification being transmitted, module for DTCs and refer to relevant
vehicle
Central Junction Box (CJB)


ground supplies to CJB and
• Faulty instrument cluster instrument cluster. Re-
• Target SID re-
Ignition synchronize ID by re-configuring
B100951 synchronisation error
authorisation following programming the instrument cluster as a new
• CAN fault module. Check CAN
communications between
instrument cluster and tester

• Low speed CAN fault between CJB and instrument
• CJB fault cluster. Check ignition, power
Ignition • Instrument cluster fault and ground supplies to CJB and
B100962 (CJB/Instrument cluster)
signal compare • Target SID synchronisation correct module is installed. Re-
failure error following re- synchronise ID by re-configuring
programming the instrument cluster as a new
• Noise/EMC related error module. Check CAN network for
Check Power and Ground
supplies to CJB and instrument
• CJB fault cluster. Check CAN
Ignition
• Low speed CAN fault communications between CJB
B100963 authorisation time- • Instrument cluster fault and instrument cluster. Check
out • Low battery voltage <9V battery is in fully charged and
serviceable condition, refer to
the battery care manual

Ignition
• CJB fault supplies to CJB and instrument
authorisation
B100964 • Low speed CAN fault cluster. Check CAN
signal plausibility • Instrument cluster fault communications between CJB
failure
and instrument cluster
Steering column Refer to the electrical circuit

lock power circuit diagrams and test steering
short to ground or column lock power circuit for
over temperature short to ground

Steering column
diagrams and test steering
B102613 lock power circuit • Circuit open
column lock power circuit for
open load
high resistance
• CJB fault Check power and ground

• Low speed CAN fault supplies to CJB and RKE module.
Passive key
• Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Check CAN communications
authorisation
B102B67 module fault between CJB and RKE module.
signal incorrect • Write target SID Re-synchronise ID by re-
after event synchronisation error configuring the RKE module as a
following re-programming
new module
• CJB fault Check power and ground

• Low speed CAN fault supplies to CJB, RKE module and
• RKE module fault receiver. Check CAN
• Key fob battery low/battery
communications between CJB
contact issue
Passive key • Interference from other RF and instrument cluster. Check
B102B87 authorisation signal key fob battery. Confirm vehicle
missing message • EMC/noise surroundings, move vehicle.
• Receiver fault Check CAN network for
• Receiver not programmed interference/EMC related issues.
correctly
Disconnect battery, then re-
• Serial communications fault
(between receiver and RKE connect - confirm operation by
module) re-programming keys. Check
• Key fault serial circuit between receiver
• Passive antenna fault and RKE module. Confirm spare
• Confirm placement of key key works. Refer to the electrical
within vehicle
circuit diagrams and test circuits
to all 3 antennas. Check
whereabouts of key

B108A23 Start button stuck • Signal stuck low
diagnostic system

B108A29 Start button fault • Signal invalid
diagnostic system

Wiper On Off relay
diagrams and test wiper On Off
B109511 control circuit • Circuit short to ground
relay control circuit for short to
short to ground
ground

Wiper On Off relay
diagrams and test wiper On Off
B109512 control circuit • Circuit short to power
short to power
power

Wiper speed relay
diagrams and test wiper speed
B109612 control circuit • Circuit short to power
short to power
power
Wiper speed relay Refer to the electrical circuit

control circuit • Circuit short to ground or diagrams and test wiper speed
B109614
open load or short open relay control circuit for high
to ground resistance or short to ground
Heated front Refer to the electrical circuit

windshield relay diagrams and test heated front
B109712 • Circuit short to power
control circuit windshield relay control circuit
short to power for short to power
Heated front • Circuit short to ground or Refer to the electrical circuit

B109714 windshield relay diagrams and test heated front
open
control circuit windshield relay control circuit
open load or short for high resistance or short to
to ground ground
Intrusion sensor Refer to the electrical circuit

module power diagrams and test intrusion
B109F11 • Circuit short to ground
circuit short to sensor module power circuit for
ground short to ground
Rain sensor power

circuit short to
B10AD11 • Circuit short to ground diagrams and test rain sensor
ground or over
power circuit for short to ground
temperature

Rain sensor power
B10AD13 • Circuit open diagrams and test rain sensor
circuit open load
power circuit for high resistance
Rain sensor Install a new rain sensor.

B10AD49 • Internal electronic failure
internal fault Rain Sensor (84.12.10)

Front left global diagrams and test Front left
B10DB23 • Signal stuck low
close global close circuit for short to
ground

Front right global diagrams and test Front right
B10DC23 • Signal stuck low
close global close circuit for short to
ground
ECM wake-up Refer to the electrical circuit

B10E511 signal short to • Circuit short to ground diagrams and test ECM wake-up
ground signal for short to ground
Key In switch Refer to the electrical circuit

B10F111 circuit short to • Circuit short to ground diagrams and test Key In switch
ground circuit for short to ground
Front left side lamp Refer to the electrical circuit

control circuit diagrams and test front left side
short to ground or lamp control circuit for short to
over temperature ground
B10F313 Front left side lamp • Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit
control circuit diagrams and test front left side
open load lamp control circuit for high
resistance
Front right side Refer to the electrical circuit

lamp control circuit diagrams and test front right side

Front right side
diagrams and test front right side
B10F413 lamp control circuit • Circuit open
lamp control circuit for high
open load
resistance

Cigar lighter relay
diagrams and test cigar lighter
B10F812 control circuit • Circuit short to power
short to power
power
Cigar lighter relay Refer to the electrical circuit

control circuit • Circuit short to ground or diagrams and test cigar lighter
B10F814
open load or short open relay control circuit for high

Accessory socket
diagrams and test Accessory
B10F912 'B' relay short to • Circuit short to power
socket 'B' relay for short to
power
power

Accessory socket
• Circuit short to ground or diagrams and test Accessory
B10F914 'B' relay open load
open socket 'B' relay for high
or short to ground
resistance or short to ground
Delayed power off Refer to the electrical circuit

relay power output diagrams and test delayed power
B10FA12 • Circuit short to power
circuits short to off relay power output circuits
power for short to power

Delayed power off
diagrams and test delayed power
relay power output • Circuit short to ground or
B10FA14 off relay power output circuits
circuits open load open
for high resistance or short to
or short to ground
ground
Engine Junction
Box (EJB) and ECM Refer to the electrical circuit
ignition relay diagrams and test EJB and ECM
B10FF11 • Circuit short to ground
control circuit ignition relay control circuits for
short to ground or short to ground
over temperature
Engine Junction
Box (EJB) and ECM
diagrams and test EJB and ECM
B10FF13 ignition relay • Circuit open
ignition relay control circuits for
control circuit
high resistance
open load
O2 sensor heater Refer to the electrical circuit

relay control circuit diagrams and test O2 sensor
short to ground or heater relay control circuit for

O2 sensor heater
diagrams and test O2 sensor
B110013 relay control circuit • Circuit open
heater relay control circuit for
open load
high resistance
Intruder detection Carry out any pinpoint tests

arm/disarm control associated with this DTC using
B113F12 • Circuit short to power
circuit short to the manufacturer approved
power diagnostic system
Engine crank
authorisation
• Engine crank authorisation associated with this DTC using
B114011 circuit short to circuit short to ground the manufacturer approved
ground or over
diagnostic system
temperature

Engine crank
• Engine crank authorisation associated with this DTC using
B114013 authorisation circuit high resistance the manufacturer approved
circuit open load
diagnostic system
Ignition supply Refer to the electrical circuit

status circuits 1 diagrams and test ignition supply
short to ground or status circuits 1 for short to
Ignition supply
diagrams and test ignition supply
B114213 status circuits 1 • Circuit open
status circuits 1 for high
open load
resistance
Ignition supply Refer to the electrical circuit

status circuits 2 diagrams and test ignition supply
short to ground or status circuits 2 for short to

Ignition supply
diagrams and test ignition supply
B114313 status circuits 2 • Circuit open
status circuits 2 for high
open load
resistance
Steering wheel
heater supply
diagrams and test steering wheel
B114411 circuit short to • Circuit short to ground
heater supply circuit for short to
ground or over
ground
temperature

Steering wheel
diagrams and test steering wheel
B114413 heater supply • Circuit open
heater supply circuit for high
circuit open load
resistance
Passive sounder Refer to the electrical circuit

supply circuit short diagrams and test passive
to ground or over sounder supply circuit for short
temperature to ground

Passive sounder
diagrams and test passive
B114613 supply circuit open • Circuit open
sounder supply circuit for high
load
resistance
Front left fog lamp Refer to the electrical circuit

control circuit diagrams and test front left fog
Front left fog lamp Refer to the electrical circuit

B114713 control circuit • Circuit open
diagrams and test front left fog
open load lamp control circuit for high
resistance
Front right fog Refer to the electrical circuit

lamp control circuit diagrams and test front right fog

Front right fog
diagrams and test front right fog
B114813 lamp control circuit • Circuit open
lamp control circuit for high
open load
resistance
Front passenger
seat heater supply
diagrams and test front
B115A11 circuit short to • Circuit short to ground
passenger seat heater supply
ground or over
circuit for short to ground
temperature

Front passenger
B115A13 seat heater supply • Circuit open
passenger seat heater supply
circuit open load
circuit for high resistance
Front driver seat

heater supply
diagrams and test front driver
B115B11 circuit short to • Circuit short to ground
seat heater supply circuit for
ground or over
short to ground
temperature

Front driver seat
diagrams and test front driver
B115B13 heater supply • Circuit open
seat heater supply circuit for
circuit open load
high resistance

LIN Bus short to
B1A9801 • General electrical failure diagrams and test LIN Bus for
ground or power
short to ground or power

diagrams and test LIN circuit to
LIN Bus header
B1A9881 • Invalid serial data received battery backed sounder for short
error
to ground, power, high
resistance
Install a new CJB, refer to the
LIN Bus checksum • Value of signal protection
B1A9883 new module installation note at
error calculation incorrect

Front left seat
diagrams and test front left seat
heater
B1B651C • Circuit voltage out of range heater temperature sensor
temperature
circuit for short to ground,
sensor fault
power, high resistance

Front right seat
diagrams and test front left seat
heater
B1B661C • Circuit voltage out of range heater temperature sensor
temperature
circuit for short to ground,
sensor fault
power, high resistance

Master light switch
B1C4323 • Signal stuck low diagrams and test master light
stuck
switch circuit for short to ground

Front wiper park diagrams and test wiper park
B1C4523 • Signal stuck low
position stuck position switch circuit for short
to ground

Powerwash relay
diagrams and test powerwash
B1C7812 control circuit • Circuit short to power
short to power
power
Powerwash relay Refer to the electrical circuit

control circuit • Circuit short to ground or diagrams and test powerwash
B1C7814 open
open load or short relay control circuit for high
Windshield washer
pump control
diagrams and test windshield
B1C7911 circuit short to • Circuit short to ground
washer pump control circuit for
ground or over
short to ground
temperature
Windshield washer Refer to the electrical circuit

B1C7913 pump control • Circuit open
diagrams and test windshield
circuit open load washer pump control circuit for
high resistance
Front left cornering Refer to the electrical circuit

lamp control circuit diagrams and test front left
short to ground or cornering lamp control circuit for

Front left cornering
diagrams and test front left
B1C9813 lamp control circuit • Circuit open
cornering lamp control circuit for
open load
high resistance
Front right
cornering lamp
diagrams and test front right
B1C9911 control circuit • Circuit short to ground
cornering lamp control circuit for
short to ground or
short to ground
over temperature
Front right Refer to the electrical circuit

cornering lamp diagrams and test front right
B1C9913 • Circuit open
control circuit cornering lamp control circuit for
open load high resistance
Front left low

beam control
diagrams and test front left low
B1D0011 circuit short to • Circuit short to ground
beam control circuit for short to
ground or over
ground
temperature

Front left low
diagrams and test front left low
B1D0013 beam control • Circuit open
beam control circuit for high
circuit open load
resistance
Front right low

beam control
diagrams and test front right low
ground or over
ground
temperature

Front right low
diagrams and test front right low
circuit open load
resistance
Front left high
beam control
diagrams and test front left high
ground or over
ground
temperature

Front left high
diagrams and test front left high
circuit open load
resistance
Front right high

beam control
high beam control circuit for
ground or over
short to ground
temperature

Front right high
high beam control circuit for high
circuit open load
resistance
Battery backed Refer to the electrical circuit

sounder power diagrams and test battery backed
circuit short to sounder power circuit for short
ground to ground

Battery backed
diagrams and test LIN Bus for
B1D1787 sounder reply • Missing message
short to ground, power or high
failure
resistance
Heater coolant
pump control
diagrams and test heater coolant
pump control circuit for short to
ground or over
ground
temperature

Heater coolant
diagrams and test heater coolant
B1D2713 pump control • Circuit open
pump control circuit for high
circuit open load
resistance
P080111 Reverse inhibit to • Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit
rear view mirror diagrams and test reverse inhibit
circuit short to to rear view mirror circuit for
ground or over short to ground
temperature

Reverse inhibit to
diagrams and test reverse inhibit
P080113 rear view mirror • Circuit open
to rear view mirror circuit for
circuit open load
open load

CAN associated with this DTC using
U001088 • Bus Off
communication the manufacturer approved

Lost
• Lost communication with associated with this DTC using
RJB the manufacturer approved
with RJB
diagnostic system

U015500
Lost
communication • Lost Communication with
U015600 with Information Information and
Entertainment module the manufacturer approved
and Entertainment
diagnostic system
module

U016400 climate control module
with climate the manufacturer approved

U019900
with Driver Door DDM the manufacturer approved
Module (DDM) diagnostic system

• Lost communication with associated with this DTC using
PDM the manufacturer approved
with Passenger
Door Module diagnostic system
(PDM)

U020600
with convertible convertible top module the manufacturer approved
top module diagnostic system
Lost
communication • Lost communication with
U021400 with remote remote keyless entry
module the manufacturer approved
keyless entry
diagnostic system
module

diagnostic system. Clear the DTC
Internal control
• Invalid configuration and retest. If the DTC is still
U030000 module software
message is received logged suspect the CJB module,
incompatibility
refer to the new module
installation note at the top of the
DTC Index
Internal control Re-calibrate the CJB using the

• Calibration parameter
U030046 module software manufacturer approved
failure
incompatibility diagnostic system

CAN initialisation
U1A1449 • Internal electronic failure new module installation note at
failure
Switch illumination Refer to the electrical circuit

supply circuit short diagrams and test switch
U201011 • Circuit short to ground
to ground or over illumination supply circuit for
temperature short to ground

Switch illumination
diagrams and test switch
U201013 supply circuit open • Circuit open
illumination supply circuit for
load
high resistance

U300049 Control module • Internal electronic failure new module installation note at
Stored vehicle diagnostic system. Clear DTC and
U300055 configuration data re-test. If the DTC remains
data received
does not match suspect the CJB, refer to the new

diagnostic system. Check CJB for
U300087 Control Module • Missing message DTCs and refer to the DTC Index.
Check CAN network integrity
using the manufacturer
Vehicle match. Corrupt VIN data Install original module, check for
U300281 Identification being transmitted, module DTCs and refer to relevant DTC
Number (VIN) previously installed to other Index
vehicle

diagnostic system

diagnostic system
Auxiliary Junction Box (AJB) (86.70.55)

Removal
2 . Release the auxiliary junction box access cover.
Release from the clip.
3 . Release the auxiliary junction box.
Disconnect the battery positive cable.
4 . Remove the auxiliary junction box.
Remove the 2 nuts.

Installation
1 . Install the auxiliary junction box.
2 . Secure the auxiliary junction box.
Tighten the battery positive lead nut to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
3 . Secure the auxiliary junction box access cover.
Secure in the clip.

Central Junction Box (CJB) (86.70.72)
Removal
2
force is used.
Remove the 3 clips.
3 . Remove the cowl side trim panel.
Remove the hood release lever.
Release the forward edge of the scuff plate trim panel.

4 . Release the CJB.
Release the battery positive cables.
5 . Remove the CJB.
Remove the 2 nuts.
Installation
1 . Install the CJB.
Disconnect the electrical connectors.

2 . Secure the CJB.
Attach the battery positive cables.
3 . Install the cowl side trim panel.
Align the pegs and secure the clip.
Install the scuff plate trim panel.
Install the hood release lever and secure with the screw.

6 . Using WDS, configure a new CJB.

418-01 : Module Configuration
Module Configuration
Module Configuration
There are two modes of configuration data. The first type requires configuration information so that
the module can interact with the vehicle correctly. This information will be transferred to the new
module using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, so that it will contain the same settings
as the old module.
New modules which require configuration after installation are:
• Anti-lock control - stability assist module

• Speed control module
• Climate control module
• Adaptive damping module
• Headlamp levelling module
• Driver door module (DDM)
• Driver seat module (DSM)
• Engine control module (ECM)
• Parking brake module
• Central Junction Box (CJB)
• Navigation system display module
• Integrated audio module (CD player)
• Information and entertainment module
• Integrated control panel
• Audio amplifier
• Remote keyless entry (RKE) module
• Multimedia (navigation) module
• Parking aid module
• Passenger door module (PDM)
• Pedestrian protection system module
• Passenger seat module (PSM)
• Restraints control module (RCM)
• Rear Junction Box (RJB)
• Steering column lock
• Transmission control module (TCM)
• Telephone control module
• Tire pressure monitoring system
Customer Driven Preferences
The second type of configuration data is customer preference driven. These are items that the
customer may or may not want to have enabled. Typically, customer preference items can be toggled
on or off by the use of a compatible scan tool. You may need to ask the customer which preferences
they had enabled prior to installation of a new module, although after installation they will
automatically learn the settings by receiving information from existing modules.
To carry out the customer preference configuration process, use the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system. Refer to the configuration menu and select 'Vehicle Configuration'. Customer
options can be selected or de-selected by modifying the 'Car Configuration File'.
418-02 : Wiring Harnesses
Engine Wiring Harness - 4.2L NA V8 -

AJV8
Removal
2

4 . Remove the engine control module (ECM).

For additional information, refer to Engine Control Module (ECM) (18.30.01)

7 . Release and disconnect the engine wiring harness electrical connector.
Fully loosen the bolt.
8 . Release the ground cable from the power distribution box bracket.
Remove the nut.
9 . Release the engine wiring harness from the engine compartment side wall.
Release the grommet.
10 . Remove the engine cover RH bracket.
Remove the 2 nuts.
11 . Remove the engine cover LH bracket.
Remove the 2 nuts.
Release the 2 electrical connectors.
Remove the purge valve bolt.

12 . Release the engine wiring harness from the rear of the engine.
Remove the 2 bolts.
13 . Release the engine wiring harness from the intake manifold.
14 . Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector.

15 . Disconnect the fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor electrical connector.
16 . Disconnect the knock sensors (KS) electrical connector.
17 . Disconnect the 8 fuel injector electrical connectors.
18 . Disconnect the fuel temperature sensor electrical connector.

19 . Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor electrical connector.
20 . Disconnect the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve electrical connector.

21 . NOTE:
Release the engine wiring harness from the LH valve cover.
Repeat the above procedure for the RH side.
22 . NOTE:
Disconnect the LH variable camshaft timing ( VCT) oil solenoid electrical connector.
23 . NOTE:
Remove the LH ignition coil-on-plug cover.
24 . NOTE:
Disconnect the ignition coil-on-plug electrical connector.
Repeat the above procedure for the remaining 7 coil-on- plugs.
25 . Disconnect the LH camshaft position CMP sensor electrical connector.
Slide the red connector latch to one side.

26 . Disconnect the RH CMP sensor electrical connector.
27 . Release the RH CMP sensor electrical connector.
28 . Disconnect the engine front cover ground cable.

Remove the bolt.
29 . Disconnect the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor electrical connector.
30 . Remove the power steering pump.

For additional information, refer to Power Steering Pump - 4.2L NA V8 - AJV8 (57.20.14)
31 . Remove the power steering pump mounting bracket.
Remove the 4 bolts.

32 . LH side: Release the engine wiring harness.
33 . Disconnect the A/C compressor electrical connector.
34 . Release and disconnect the 2 LH HO2S electrical connectors.
Release the clip.

35 . Release and disconnect the 2 RH HO2S electrical connectors.
Release the clip.
36 . NOTE:
Clean the components general area prior to dismantling.
Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
37 . Disconnect the starter motor battery positive and generator cables.

Release the cover.
Remove the nut.
38 . Disconnect the starter motor solenoid electrical connector.
Remove and discard the nut.
39 . Disconnect the engine oil pressure (EOP) sensor electrical connector.
40 . Disconnect the engine oil temperature sensor electrical connector.

41 . Remove the generator cooling duct.
Release the cover.
Remove the nut.
43 . Release the generator.
Remove the nut.
Position the generator aside to access the engine wiring harness clips.
44 . RH side: Release the engine wiring harness.
45 . Remove the engine wiring harness.
Installation
1 . Install the engine wiring harness.
2 . RH side: Attach the wiring harness.
Secure the clips.
Secure the cover.
5 . Install the generator cooling duct.
Tighten the screws.
6 . Connect the engine oil temperature sensor electrical connector.
7 . Connect the EOP sensor electrical connector.
8 . Connect the starter motor solenoid electrical connector.
Tighten the new nut to 7 Nm (5 lb.ft).
9 . Connect the starter motor battery positive and generator cables.
Secure the cover.

10 . Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
11 . Connect and secure the HO2S electrical connectors.
Secure the 2 clips.
12 . Connect the A/C compressor electrical connector.
13 . LH side: Attach the wiring harness.
Secure the clips.
14 . Install the power steering pump mounting bracket.
15 . Install the power steering pump.

For additional information, refer to Power Steering Pump - 4.2L NA V8 - AJV8 (57.20.14)
16 . Connect and secure the ECT sensor electrical connector.
17 . Connect the engine front cover ground cable.
18 . Connect and secure the CMP sensor electrical connectors.
19 . Connect the ignition coil-on-plug electrical connectors.

20 . Install the ignition coil-on-plug covers.
Position and secure the clips.
21 . Connect the VCT solenoid electrical connectors.
22 . Attach the engine wiring harness to the valve covers.
23 . Connect the EGR valve electrical connector.
24 . Connect the TP sensor electrical connector.
25 . Connect the fuel temperature sensor electrical connector.
26 . Connect the fuel injector electrical connectors.
27 . Connect the KS electrical connector.
28 . Connect the FRP sensor electrical connector.
29 . Connect the MAP sensor electrical connector.
30 . Attach the engine wiring harness to the intake manifold.

31 . Attach the engine wiring harness to the rear of the engine.
32 . Install the engine cover LH bracket.
Attach the purge valve, align the peg and tighten the bolt to 6 Nm (4
lb.ft).
Secure the electrical connectors.
33 . Install the engine cover RH bracket.
34 . Attach the ground cable to the power distribution box bracket.
35 . Attach the engine wiring harness to the engine compartment side wall.
Position and secure the grommet.
36 . Connect the engine wiring harness electrical connector and secure with the captive bolt.
38 . Install the fan cowl.

39 . Install the ECM.



Engine Wiring Harness - 4.2L SC V8 -
AJV8
Removal
2
3 . Remove the intake air resonator.

4 . Remove the engine control module (ECM).


7 . Release and disconnect the engine wiring harness electrical connector.
Fully loosen the bolt.
8 . Release the ground cable from the power distribution box bracket.
Remove the nut.
9 . Release the engine wiring harness from the engine compartment side wall.
Release the grommet.
10 . Remove the engine cover RH bracket.
Remove the 3 nuts.
Release the 2 wiring harness clips.
Release the hose.
11 . Disconnect the LH variable camshaft timing (VCT) oil control solenoid electrical connector.
12 . Remove the engine cover LH bracket.
Remove the 3 nuts.
Release the wiring harness.

13 . Release the wiring harness from the rear of the engine.
Remove the 2 bolts.
14 . Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector.
15 . Disconnect the knock sensors (KS) electrical connector.

16 . Disconnect the fuel temperature sensor electrical connector.
17 . Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor electrical connector.
18 . Disconnect the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve electrical connector.

19 . Disconnect the purge control valve (PCV) electrical connector.
Release the wiring harness.
20 . NOTE:
Remove the ignition coil-on-plug cover.
21 . NOTE:

Disconnect the ignition coil-on-plug electrical connector.
Repeat the above procedure for the remaining 7 coil-on- plugs.
22 . NOTE:
Release the coil-on-plug wiring harness.
23 . NOTE:
Release the engine wiring harness from the valve cover.

24 . Disconnect the LH camshaft position CMP sensor electrical connector.
25 . Disconnect the RH CMP sensor electrical connector.

26 . Disconnect the LH fuel injector wiring harness electrical connector.
27 . Disconnect the RH fuel injector wiring harness electrical connector.
28 . Disconnect the variable camshaft timing (VCT) oil control solenoid electrical connector.
29 . Disconnect the fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor electrical connector.
30 . Disconnect the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor electrical connector.
31 . Disconnect the RH mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.

32 . Disconnect the engine front cover ground cable.
Remove the bolt.
33 . Disconnect the secondary air injection switching valve electrical connector.
34 . Disconnect the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor electrical connector.

35 . Release the engine wiring harness from the coolant manifold.
Remove the 2 bolts.
36 . Remove the power steering pump.

For additional information, refer to Power Steering Pump - 4.2L SC V8 - AJV8 (57.20.14)
37 . Remove the power steering pump mounting bracket.
Remove the 4 bolts.
38 . LH side: Release the engine wiring harness.

39 . Disconnect the A/C compressor electrical connector.
40 . Release and disconnect the 2 LH HO2S electrical connectors.
Release the clip.
41 . Release and disconnect the 2 RH HO2S electrical connectors.
Release the clip.

42 . NOTE:
Clean the components general area prior to dismantling.
Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
43 . Disconnect the starter motor battery positive and generator cables.
Release the cover.
Remove the nut.
44 . Disconnect the starter motor solenoid electrical connector.
Remove and discard the nut.

45 . Disconnect the engine oil pressure (EOP) sensor electrical connector.
46 . Disconnect the engine oil temperature sensor electrical connector.
47 . Remove the generator cooling duct.

Release the cover.
Remove the nut.
49 . Release the generator.
Remove the nut.
Position the generator aside to access the engine wiring harness clips.
50 . RH side: Release the engine wiring harness.
51 . Remove the engine wiring harness.
Installation
1 . Install the engine wiring harness.
2 . RH side: Attach the wiring harness.
Secure the clips.
Secure the cover.
5 . Install the generator cooling duct.
Tighten the screws.
6 . Connect the engine oil temperature sensor electrical connector.
7 . Connect the EOP sensor electrical connector.
8 . Connect the starter motor solenoid electrical connector.
Tighten the new nut to 7 Nm (5 lb.ft).
9 . Connect the starter motor battery positive and generator cables.
Secure the cover.

10 . Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
11 . Connect and secure the HO2S electrical connectors.
Secure the 2 clips.
12 . Connect the A/C compressor electrical connector.
13 . LH side: Attach the wiring harness.
Secure the clips.
14 . Install the power steering pump mounting bracket.
15 . Install the power steering pump.

For additional information, refer to Power Steering Pump - 4.2L SC V8 - AJV8 (57.20.14)
16 . Attach the engine wiring harness to the coolant manifold.
17 . Connect and secure the ECT sensor electrical connector.
18 . Connect the secondary air injection switching valve electrical connector.
19 . Connect the engine front cover ground cable.

20 . Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector.
21 . Connect the IAT sensor electrical connector.
23 . Connect and secure the fuel injector wiring harness electrical connectors.
24 . Connect and secure the CMP sensor electrical connectors.
25 . Connect the ignition coil-on-plug electrical connectors.
26 . Attach the coil-on-plug wiring harness.
27 . Attach the engine wiring harness to the valve covers.
28 . Connect the PCV electrical connector.
Secure the wiring harness.
29 . Install the ignition coil-on-plug covers.

Position and secure the clips.
30 . Connect the VCT solenoid electrical connectors.
31 . Connect the EGR valve electrical connector.
32 . Connect the TP sensor electrical connector.
33 . Connect the fuel temperature sensor electrical connector.
34 . Connect the KS electrical connector.
36 . Connect the MAP sensor electrical connector.
37 . Attach the engine wiring harness to the rear of the engine.
38 . Install the engine cover LH bracket.
Attach the wiring harness.
39 . Install the engine cover RH bracket.

Secure the wiring harness.
Secure the hose.
40 . Attach the ground cable to the power distribution box bracket.
41 . Attach the engine wiring harness to the engine compartment side wall.
Position and secure the grommet.
42 . Connect the engine wiring harness electrical connector and secure with the captive bolt.
44 . Install the fan cowl.
45 . Install the ECM.

46 . Install the intake air resonator.


419 : Electronic Feature Group
419-01A : Anti-theft - Active
Specifications
Specifications
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in

Antenna - bolt 5 - 44
Anti-theft alarm horn - nut 8 - 71
Battery backed sounder to bracket - nut 6 - 53
Battery backed sounder bracket to body - nut 8 - 71
Intrusion sensors - nut/screw 2 - 18
Keyless vehicle module - nut 5 - 44
Anti-Theft - Active
Authoring Template
COMPONENT LOCATION
Part
Item Description
Number
2 Left Hand (LH) and Right Hand (RH) door latch micro switches
3 Central Door Locking (CDL) RF receiver
4 Liftgate latch micro switch
5 Slave intrusion detection module
6 Intrusion detection module
7 Hood ajar switch
8 Passive anti-theft alarm horn (if fitted)
Battery backed sounder (if fitted) or battery backed sounder with tilt sensor (if
9
fitted)
10 Vehicle horns
INTRODUCTION
The active anti-theft system monitors the hinged panels for unauthorized opening. In some markets
the anti-theft system also incorporates monitoring of the vehicle interior and vehicle tilt sensing.
The active anti-theft alarm system is controlled by the following body system control modules:
• Central Junction Box (CJB)

• LH door module
• RH door module
• Auxiliary junction box
• Keyless vehicle module
• Instrument cluster.
The CJB is the main controller in the system. The CJB controls the following security functions, in
addition to other vehicle functions:
• Locking, double locking and unlocking

• Monitoring of hinged panel microswitches and panel ajar states
• Microwave intrusion detection modules
• Anti-theft horns or battery backed sounder
• Passive arming and disarming
• Panic alarm function
• Transceiver coil and transponder reading
• Valet function (via Touch Screen Display (TSD))
• Interior lighting.
Two levels of vehicle locking are available; perimeter mode locks all opening panels and volumetric
mode (if fitted) monitors the vehicle interior for intrusion and incorporates a tilt sensor to monitor if
the vehicle is being moved.
Door Modules
The door modules provide the interface between the door latch motors, the door and latch
microswitches and the CJB. The door modules provide door microswitch switch status information
and enable the door motors on request from the CJB or the keyless vehicle module. Additionally, the
door modules also control the exterior mirror functions. For additional information, refer to Rear
View Mirrors (501-09)
Auxiliary Junction Box and Central Junction Box (CJB)

The auxiliary junction box controls, in conjunction with the CJB:
• the horns
• the liftgate latch motors and microswitches (including the liftgate external release switch)
• the liftgate ajar switch
• the turn signal indicators
• the fuel filler flap operation
The auxiliary junction box is also has a connection to the Restraints Control Module (RCM) for
automatic operation of the interior lights and the turn signal indicators in the event of an accident.
The CJB and auxiliary junction box are both fitted with an anti-theft sense line. If the auxiliary
junction box is disconnected when the alarm system is active, the full alarm will be activated by the
CJB. If the CJB is disconnected when the alarm system is active, the auxiliary junction box takes
control of the security system and sounds the full alarm. The alarm will also be activated if the
instrument cluster is disconnected when the active anti-theft alarm system is active.
NOTE:
If the CJB is replaced, the new module will require configuring to the master car configuration
using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS).
The CJB automatically arms and disarms the active anti-theft system when the vehicle is locked and
unlocked after successful confirmation that a valid remote handset/smart key has been used.
Keyless Vehicle Module

The keyless vehicle module interfaces with the CDL RF receiver and collects RF signal information
which is transmitted from the Smart Key. This information is translated into commands which are
passed on the medium speed Controller Area Network (CAN) bus to the CJB, auxiliary junction box,
the door modules and the instrument cluster.
The keyless vehicle module also monitors the liftgate external release switch, 2 interior antennae, 1
luggage compartment antenna and an additional rear bumper antenna and 2 door handle antennae
if the passive entry system is fitted.
On vehicles with passive entry, the additional fast latch motors are controlled via the keyless vehicle
module and the locking status is passed to the CJB on the medium speed CAN bus.
Instrument Cluster
The instrument cluster controls the alarm indicator which is incorporated into the sunload/light
sensor mounted on the instrument panel.
The instrument cluster also controls, in conjunction with the Engine Control Module (ECM), the
engine immobilization. The ECM controls the engine crank and fuel functions and the instrument
cluster processes the valid transponder information.
Alarm Indicator
The alarm indicator is a Light Emitting Diode (LED) located in the body of the sunload/light sensor.
When the ignition is off the indicator gives a visual indication of the active anti-theft system to show
if the alarm system set or unset.
When the ignition is on, the indicator provides a visual indication of the status of the passive anti-
theft (engine immobilization) system. If the immobilization system is operating correctly, the LED will
be illuminated for 3 seconds at ignition on and then extinguish.
If a fault exists in the immobilization system, the LED will be either permanently illuminated or
flashing for 60 seconds. This indicates that a fault exists and fault code has been recorded. After the
60 second period the LED will flash at different frequencies which indicate the nature of the fault. For
additional information, refer to Anti-Theft - Active (419-01A)
Operation of the alarm indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster which varies the flash rate of
the LED to indicate the system status of the alarm and the immobilization systems.
Passive Anti-Theft Horn (if fitted)
The passive anti-theft horn is located in the RH rear corner of the engine compartment and attached
to the bulkhead. The anti-theft horn is connected directly to the CJB which activates the anti-theft
horn when the alarm is triggered.
Battery Backed Sounder (if fitted)
The battery backed sounder is located in the RH rear corner of the engine compartment and
attached to the bulkhead.
On vehicles with a battery backed sounder, a tilt sensor can be incorporated which monitors the
vehicle attitude. The CJB monitors the tilt sensor and can detect if the vehicle is being moved, towed
or raised and activate the alarm system. The type of battery backed sounder can be identified by a
suffix change to the part number; sounders without a tilt sensor have the suffix AA and sounders
incorporating a tilt sensor have the suffix BA.
Operation of the sounder is controlled by the CJB on a Local Interconnect Network (LIN) bus. The
sounder is also connected with a permanent battery supply via the CJB. An integral, rechargeable
battery powers the sounder if the battery power supply from the CJB is interrupted.
Intrusion Detection Modules
The intrusion detection modules are an optional fitment in some markets and are not available in
other markets. Two intrusion detection modules are fitted. One module is located on the front of the
floor console and monitors the front seat area, the second module is fitted at the rear of the floor
console and monitors the rear seat area. The modules are wired together in parallel with the forward
module being the master and the rearward module being the slave module.
Each intrusion detection module comprises two microwave sensors which allow the interior of the
vehicle to be monitored. The intrusion detection modules also monitor the vehicle interior on soft
top models when the soft top is down.
The intrusion detection modules are activated with the volumetric mode which in turn is enabled
when the vehicle is double locked. The vehicle can be locked and alarmed with the module de-
activated if a pet is to be left in the vehicle for example by single locking the active anti-theft system.
The intrusion detection modules can also be de-activated by deselecting the 'Intrusion/Tilt' option in
the 'Vehicle Settings' screen on the Touch Screen Display (TSD).
NOTE:
The TSD method of de-activation of the intrusion detection modules is only for one arm cycle.
They will revert to active once the vehicle is subsequently unlocked and then locked.
When the volumetric mode is active, if the vehicle battery voltage falls to below 9 volts, the CJB will
ignore any inputs from the modules to prevent false alarm activation.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE:
A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus; N = Medium speed CAN bus; O = LIN Bus
Item Part Description

Number
1 Battery
2 Megafuse (175A)
3 Megafuse (175A)
4 Steering column lock
5 CJB
7 Vehicle horns
8 Liftgate latch ajar switch
9 Intrusion detection module
10 Slave intrusion detection module
12 Hood ajar switch
13 CDL RF receiver
15 Light sensor (security LED)
16 RH door module
17 LH door module
18 LH door latch ajar switch
19 RH door latch ajar switch
Battery backed sounder (if fitted) or battery backed sounder with tilt sensor (if
20
fitted)
21 Passive anti-theft alarm horn (if fitted)

The CJB automatically arms and disarms the active anti-theft system when it operates the Central
Locking System (CLS).
On vehicles without intrusion detection modules, only the perimeter mode is available to monitor
the hinged panels and the validity of the Smart key.
When perimeter mode is active, the CJB monitors panel ajar micro switches located in the latch
mechanisms of the driver and passenger doors and the liftgate. A separate hood ajar micro switch,
located in the engine compartment, monitors the hood status.
When volumetric mode is active, the CJB monitors the interior of the vehicle for movement using 2
microwave intrusion detection modules located within the center console.
Arming
On vehicles without intrusion detection modules and a tilt sensor, the active anti-theft system is
armed in the perimeter mode when the vehicle is either locked or double locked.
On vehicles fitted with intrusion detection modules, the system has 2 modes of operation; perimeter
mode and volumetric mode.
Perimeter Mode
• Perimeter mode only monitors the hinged panels and validity of the remote handset/smart
key in the start control module. Perimeter mode is activated by a single press of the lock
button on either the Smart key or the door handle lock button on vehicles with the Passive
Entry system.
Volumetric Mode
• Volumetric mode monitors the vehicle interior for intrusion. If the vehicle is fitted with a
battery backed sounder, which incorporates a tilt sensor, the vehicle attitude is also
monitored when volumetric mode is active. Volumetric mode is activated by a second press
of the lock button on either the Smart Key or the door handle lock button on vehicles with
the Passive Entry system. The second press of either lock button must occur within 3 seconds
of the first press. The second press of the lock button also activates the perimeter mode
double locking feature.
The CJB arms the active anti-theft system when it locks or double locks the vehicle providing the
following conditions are met:
• All doors, liftgate and hood are closed

• The Smart key is not sensed inside the vehicle
• With no valid Smart Key outside of the vehicle
• The CJB is not in transit mode.
When the vehicle has successfully completed its locking routine, confirmation will be given by a long
single flash of the turn signal indicators to indicate the locked condition. If double locking is activated
then confirmation will be given by a double flash of the turn signal indicators, one flash for locked
and one long flash for double locked. In certain markets an audible warning is emitted to confirm
arming or double locking.
Mislock
If any doors, liftgate or hood is open when a lock or double lock request is received, the anti-theft
alarm system remains disarmed and the CJB generates a short mislock sound on the vehicle horns,
battery backed sounder or passive anti-theft horn and the turn signal indicators will not flash. Each
attempt to lock will be confirmed by two audible chimes being emitted.
When the CJB arms the active anti-theft alarm system, it first enables perimeter mode and monitors
the status of the hinged panels. If the vehicle is double locked and the vehicle is fitted with a battery
backed sounder, an arming signal is sent from the CJB to enable the sounder. If the vehicle is fitted
with intrusion detection modules, the CJB then sends an arming signal to the modules and the tilt
sensor when double locked. The CJB ignores the signals from the intrusion detection modules for the
first 30 seconds to allow time for the vehicle interior to settle and prevent false alarm activation.
If the liftgate is opened via the Smart Key or external mechanical lock the intrusion detection
modules and the tilt sensor are inhibited until the liftgate is closed.
Disarming
The CJB will disarm the active anti-theft system when it receives an unlock request from the Smart
Key or, on vehicles with Passive Entry, when the Smart Key is sensed and the driver's or passenger
door handles are pulled.
The CJB can selectively disarm parts of the active anti-theft system to prevent false alarm activation
under certain conditions as follows:
• When the vehicle active anti-theft alarm system is armed in volumetric mode, if the vehicle
battery voltage decreases to less than 9 V, the CJB will disable the volumetric mode and
remain in the perimeter mode only. This prevents false alarm activation because the
intrusion detection modules do not operate below 9 volts.
• On vehicles fitted with a battery backed sounder, if the vehicle battery voltage decreases
from 9.5 to 9 V in more than a 30 minute period, the CJB de-activates the battery backed
sounder and if required, will use the vehicle horns to sound an audible alarm trigger warning.
This prevents false alarm activation. At voltages below 9 volts, the CJB will not generate the
'heartbeat' signal to the battery backed sounder. If the sounder fails to receive the
'heartbeat' signal, it interprets this as the CJB has been tampered with and self activates its
sounder. If the battery voltage subsequently rises above 9.5 V, the CJB will re-arm the
battery backed sounder.
• If the vehicle is unlocked using the unlock button on the smart key and within 45 seconds a
hinged panel is not opened, the CJB automatically re-locks the vehicle and re-arms the active
anti-theft system (if 'auto re-lock' feature is enabled). This prevents leaving the vehicle
unlocked and disarmed by accidental operation of the Smart Key unlock button.
Alarm
When the alarm is triggered, the CJB activates audible and visual warnings. The audible warnings are
produced by the vehicles horns, the passive anti-theft horn or the battery backed sounder or a
combination of the audible devices. Visible indications are produced using the turn signal indicator.
The CJB activates the vehicle horns, passive anti-theft horn or battery backed sounder for 30 seconds
or a combination of the audible devices. The activation is stopped for 5 second and, if the alarm
trigger is still present, the CJB will cycle again for 30 seconds. This will be repeated for up to a
maximum of 10 cycles (3 cycles in some markets) of 30 seconds for any one arming period. The CJB
will deactivate the alarm if the 10 cycles (3 cycles in some markets) have been completed and the
alarm trigger is still present or until it receives a disarm signal.
NOTE:
If the battery backed sounder is triggered due tamper detection, the visual indication using the
turn signal indicators is not activated.
The alarm can be triggered by any of the hinged panels being opened, an intrusion detection module
detects a movement inside the vehicle, the tilt sensor detects vehicle movement, the CJB is
disconnected or an ignition tamper is detected (invalid Smart Key).
Battery Backed Sounder

When the CJB arms the active anti-theft system, in either the perimeter mode or the volumetric
mode, the CJB sends an arming signal to the sounder on the LIN bus. When the system is armed in
the volumetric mode, the CJB also sends an arming signal to the tilt sensor (if fitted).
On receipt of the arming signals, the sounder and the tilt sensor respond with a status message. If
the CJB does not receive the status signals within 12 seconds, the CJB assumes there is a fault and
responds with a disarm signal to either the sounder and/or the tilt sensor and stores a related fault
code. If the sounder is disarmed when the active anti-theft system is armed and the system is
subsequently triggered, the CJB instructs the auxiliary junction box to energize the horn relay and use
the vehicle horns to sound the audio warning in place of the sounder.
When the sounder is armed, the CJB sends a periodic (heartbeat) signal to the sounder which
prompts the sounder to monitor the vehicle battery supply and the LIN bus link with the CJB. The
sounder will operate if:
• it receives an alarm signal from the CJB or the tilt sensor

• the power supply or the LIN bus link from the CJB is disrupted.
The tilt sensor measures the longitudinal and lateral angle of the vehicle over a range of ±16° from
the horizontal. When the active anti-theft system is armed in volumetric mode, the tilt sensor stores
the current vehicle angles in its memory and monitors the tilt sensor readings. If the vehicle angle
changes in either direction by more than the alarm limit, the tilt sensor activates the sounder.
If the alarm system is active and the battery or battery backed sounder is disconnected, the battery
backed sounder will operate without the visual indication of the turn signal indicators flashing.
Customer Programmable Security Features

A number of security features can be programmed to the customers requirements by use of the
Touch Screen Display (TSD).
Global Open/Close
The global open/ close feature allows the driver to fully raise/lower the driver and passenger
windows with a single press of a Smart Key button. The button must be pressed and held for more
than 2 seconds. Either or both of the open/close functions can be disabled from the TSD.
NOTE:
Remote global close is not available in some markets, i.e. NAS market.
From the 'Home' screen, select the 'Vehicle' screen and select 'Veh. Settings'. The 'Security button
will be highlighted as the default selection. Scroll the screen until the 'Global Open' and 'Global Close'
selections are displayed. Global open and/or global close can be switched on or off by touching the
applicable button on the TSD.
Valet Mode
Valet mode allows the liftgate to be inhibited when in valet mode. When in valet mode, if either the
switch pack or exterior luggage compartment release button is pressed, an audible warning chime is
emitted to warn that the liftgate is inhibited.
Enabling Valet Mode

Using the emergency key from the Smart Key, lock the glovebox. From the 'Home' screen, select the
'Valet' button'. The valet mode screen is displayed and requires a four digit Personal Identification
Number (PIN) for access. Enter the PIN using the digits on the TSD and press 'OK'. When the PIN is
accepted the screen displays 'Valet On'. The glovebox and the liftgate are now locked in valet mode.
On leaving the vehicle, only give the attendant the Smart Key without the emergency key installed.
Disabling Valet Mode

After entering the vehicle, access the valet mode screen and enter the four digit PIN number and
touch the 'OK' button. When the PIN is accepted, the screen displays 'Valet Off'. Unlock the glovebox
using the emergency key and replace the emergency key in it stowage slot in the Smart Key.
Single Point Entry

The single point entry feature only unlocks one door, all other panels remain locked.
On vehicles with the remote Central Locking system (CLS), a single press of the unlock button on the
Smart key unlocks only the driver's door and the liftgate. A second press will unlock the passenger
door.
On vehicles with the passive entry system, the first door handle which is pulled will only open that
door to gain access to the vehicle. The remaining door and the liftgate will revert to central locking.
The locked door can be unlocked by operating the interior door release lever and the liftgate can be
released using the liftgate release button in the auxiliary lighting switch, the Smart Key liftgate
release button or the exterior liftgate release button.
From the 'Home' screen, select the 'Vehicle' screen and select 'Veh. Settings'. The 'Security' button
will highlighted by default. Select '2 stage unlock' and touch the on or off button to enable or diable
the single point entry feature.
Changing from central locking to single point entry and back again can also be carried out by pressing
the lock and unlock buttons on the Smart Key simultaneously. The turn signal indicators will flash for
4 seconds to confirm that the change has been performed.
Drive Away Locking

The drive away door locking feature locks the doors and the liftgate if they are unlocked when the
transmission selector lever is not in 'P' and the vehicle speed is more than 7 km/h (5 mph).
From the 'Home' screen, select the 'Vehicle' screen and select 'Veh. Settings'. The 'Security' button
will highlighted by default. Scroll the screen until the 'Drive away locking' section is displayed. Select
the drive away locking feature on or off by touching the applicable button on the TSD.
Smart Key Additional Features

The Smart Key has convenience buttons in addition to the lock/unlock buttons.
Panic alarm
A panic alarm feature allows the driver to activate the vehicle alarm system using the Smart Key. The
'panic' button, identified by a triangle symbol, can be pressed 3 times or pressed and held for more
than 3 seconds to activate the panic alarm.
Global Open/Close
A global open and close feature can be operated from the Smart Key. This feature allows the vehicle
windows to be opened/closed by a single press of the lock or unlock button. The button must be
pressed and held for more than 2 seconds to activate the global open/close feature.
NOTE:
Remote global close is not available in some markets, i.e. NAS market.
Liftgate Release
A liftgate release button can be pressed to open the liftgate. This will operate with car locked and
alarmed or unlocked. If the vehicle is locked and alarmed, when the liftgate release button is
pressed, the liftgate can be opened without triggering the alarm system. When the liftgate is
subsequently closed, the alarm will be re-activated.
Headlamp Convenience
A headlamp convenience button can be pressed to operate the headlamp to assist departure or
approach to the vehicle. A single press of the button will operate the headlamps for approximately
25 seconds after which they will automatically turn off. A second press of the button will turn off the
headlamps if the 25 second period has not been reached. Pressing the Stop/Start button within the
25 second period will also turn off the headlamp convenience feature.
Convenience Mode
When a door is opened, for a vehicle with either remote RF central locking or passive entry, the
vehicle’s electrical system initiates the convenience mode. The following systems become active:
• Memory - seat adjustment and steering column

• Interior and exterior lighting
• TSD and Audio
• Instrument cluster message centre
• Horn
• Cigar lighter and power socket.
Anti-Theft - Active
The complexity of the electronics involved with the anti-theft system, and the multiplexed
communication network which are connected to it, preclude the use of workshop general
electrical test equipment. Therefore, reference should be made to the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system for detailed instructions on testing the anti-theft system.
The manufacturer approved diagnostic system systematically tests and analyses all functions
and the various systems affected by it.
Where a fault is indicated, some basic diagnostic methods may be necessary to confirm that
connections are good and that wiring is not damaged before installing a new component.
Antenna
Removal
1 . Remove the floor console.
For additional information, refer to Floor Console (76.25.01)
2 . Remove the keyless vehicle antenna.
Installation
1 . Install the keyless vehicle antenna.
2 . Install the floor console.

For additional information, refer to Floor Console (76.25.01)
Anti-Theft Alarm Horn (86.52.03)
Removal
1 . Make the pedestrian protection system safe.
2 . Remove the air intake cover.
Remove the 3 clips.
3 . Release the pedestrian protection actuator bracket.
Release the 3 wiring harness clips.
Remove the 4 bolts.
4 . Remove the pedestrian protection actuator and bracket.

5 . Remove the anti-theft alarm horn.
Loosen but do not remove the 2 nuts.
Installation
1 . Install the anti-theft alarm horn.
2 . Install the pedestrian protection actuator and bracket.
3 . Secure the pedestrian protection actuator bracket.
Attach the wiring harness clips.
4 . Install the air intake cover.

Install the 3 clips.
Rear Intrusion Sensor
Removal
1 . Remove the rear seat armrest.
For additional information, refer to Rear Seat Armrest (76.70.39)
2 . Remove the rear intrusion sensor.
Installation
1 . Install the rear intrusion sensor.
2 . Install the rear seat armrest.

419-01B : Anti-Theft - Passive
General procedures
Anti-Theft Security Access

1. The complexity of the electronics involved with the passive anti-theft system of which the
security access is a part, and the multiplexed communication network which are connected to
it preclude the use of workshop general electrical test equipment. Therefore, reference should
be made to the Jaguar approved diagnostic system for detailed instructions on security access .
The Jaguar approved diagnostic system systematically tests and analyses all functions and the
various systems affected by it.
Key Programming Using Diagnostic
Equipment
1. The complexity of the electronics involved with the anti-theft, of which the key
programming is a part, and the multiplexed communication network which are connected to it
preclude the use of workshop general electrical test equipment. Therefore, reference should be
made to the Jaguar Approved Diagnostic System for detailed instructions on key
programming . The Jaguar approved diagnostic system systematically tests and analyses all
functions and the various systems affected by it.
All new keys must be programmed using IDS. When using IDS to programme new key(s), the
lost or obsolete key(s) will cease to function.
Anti-Theft - Passive
COMPONENT LOCATION
1 Starter motor and solenoid

3 Electric steering column lock (Not NAS)
4 RF receiver
5 Start control module
7 Low Frequency (LF) antennae - Passive start system (3 off)
INTRODUCTION
The Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) prevents the vehicle from being driven away by unauthorized
persons. This is achieved by having uniquely coded keys (both passive and transponder) and an
encoded data exchange between multiple control modules. Unauthorized starting is prevented by
inhibiting the fuel, engine (spark, injectors and crank) and ignition systems from operating.
The PATS is a function of the 'Passive Start' system. The system uses the following components:
• 'Smart Key'
• LF antennae - 3 off
• RF receiver
• Keyless vehicle module
• Start control module
• CJB
• ECM
• Instrument cluster.
The system is automatic and requires no input from the driver. The engine start system is initiated
when the start/stop switch and the brake pedal are pressed simultaneously. Refer to Engine Controls
for details of the ignition modes. For additional information, refer to Electronic Engine Controls (303-
14 Electronic Engine Controls - Vehicles Without: Supercharger)
The engine management system will only allow engine crank, spark and injector functions when the
following conditions are met:
• A hardwired Park/Neutral signal is received from the Transmission Control Module (TCM)
• A hardwired ignition signal is received from the CJB
• A hardwired crank request signal is received from the CJB
• Encrypted data exchange between the instrument cluster and the ECM is verified.
Before the CJB will send the hardwired ignition signal, it must satisfactorily complete the following:
• Exchange encrypted data with the keyless vehicle module to validate the smart key
• Exchange encrypted data with the instrument cluster to authorize the ignition status.
Additionally, before the CJB will send the hardwired crank request signal it must receive the following
signals:
• Brake pressure signal from the ABS module which must be greater than a pre-determined
threshold
• Hardwired transmission in 'Park' (P) signal from the selector lever.
START CONTROL MODULE
The start control module is located in the floor console, at the rear of the arm rest. The start control
module is used if the keyless vehicle module is unable to authorise the Smart Key.
If the keyless vehicle module is unable to identify the Smart Key for any reason, for example if the
Smart Key battery voltage is low or there is local RF interference, the transponder within the Smart
Key can be read in the conventional manner. The driver will be alerted to this by a chime and a
message in the instrument cluster message center 'SMART KEY NOT FOUND, PLEASE INSERT IN SLOT'.
The Smart Key can be inserted into the start control module.
To insert the Smart Key, lift the arm rest on the floor console and slide back the spring loaded access
cover on the start control module. Insert the Smart Key, with the key fob loop uppermost, into the
slot. The start control module is motorized and will draw the Smart Key into the slot once inserted.
The start control module will then read the transponder within the Smart Key and, if the transponder
identification is valid, pass authorization to the instrument cluster on the Local Interconnect Network
(LIN) bus.
NOTE:
Inserting the Smart Key into the start control module will not charge the Smart Key battery. The
battery is non-chargeable and must be replaced with a new CR2032 battery if defective.
A message 'REMOVE SMART KEY' will be displayed if the Smart Key is still in the start control module
and the driver's door is opened. The Smart Key can be removed by pushing downwards on the key
fob loop and releasing. The start control unit motor will then drive the Smart Key out from the slot.
LF ANTENNA
Three Low Frequency (LF) antennae for the passive start system are positioned in specific locations in
the vehicle. The LF antennae are positioned in the following locations:
• Behind center console, below heater assembly and audio modules.

• In floor console between the driver and passenger seats, below start control module.
• On the battery tray.
NOTE:
On vehicles with the passive entry system, three additional antennae are used; one integrated
into the rear bumper and one in each door handle assembly. These are only used by the passive
entry system and have no function in the passive start system.
The keyless vehicle module transmits an LF signal via the antennae which is received by the Smart
Key. The Smart Key then responds by transmitting a Radio Frequency (RF) signal which is received by
the RF receiver and passed to the keyless vehicle module for authorization.
KEYLESS VEHICLE MODULE

The keyless vehicle module is located on the Right Hand (RH) 'A' pillar. The module controls signal
transmissions to and from the Smart Key and provides authorization to allow the vehicle to be
entered and started. The module has a medium speed Controller Area Network (CAN) connection to
the Central Junction Box (CJB) for authorizing vehicle unlocking and starting.
RF RECEIVER
The RF receiver is located behind the overhead console. The receiver is available in two variants; 315
Mhz or 433 Mhz depending on market requirements. Transmissions are received from the Smart Key
for key identification and remote lock/unlock requests or requests for operation of additional
features.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE:
A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus; N = Medium speed CAN bus; O = LIN bus
1 Battery
2 Megafuse (400 A)
3 Megafuse (175 A)
4 Megafuse (175 A)
5 CJB
8 Starter motor and solenoid
9 ECM
10 Electric steering column lock (Not NAS)
11 Start/Stop switch
12 ABS module
14 RF receiver
16 Start control module
At the request of the CJB, the keyless vehicle module prompts each of the LF antennae to output a LF
signal. When the Smart Key is within range, it detects the LF signals and responds with an RF
identification signal. The RF signal is detected by the RF receiver and passed to the keyless vehicle
module.
NOTE:
The LF antenna located in the rear bumper and in each door handle are only fitted if the vehicle
has the Passive Entry option.
The keyless vehicle module authorizes the Smart Key and passes this information to the CJB via the
medium speed CAN bus. Once the CJB receives the authorization and confirms response with internal
calculation, it passes the result to the instrument cluster on the medium speed CAN bus. Once the
CJB receives the authorization and confirms the response, it allows the ignition to be activated when
the start/stop switch is pressed.
On receipt of the authorization message, the instrument cluster initiates the unlocking of the electric
steering column lock (if fitted). Once the electric steering column lock is unlocked and power has
been removed, the instrument cluster will set its internal key status to valid. The instrument cluster
will pass this key valid authorization to the auxiliary junction box. Once the auxiliary junction box
receives the authorization and confirms the response with an internal calculation, it will enable the
Fuel Pump Driver Module (FPDM).
The CJB also controls the engine crank request. If the transmission selector lever is in the park
position and the driver presses the brake pedal and simultaneously presses the start/stop switch, the
CJB interprets this as an engine crank request.
Before the engine crank request is allowed, the CJB compares a brake pressure signal received from
the ABS module. The brake pressure signal is compared to an internally stored threshold value within
the CJB. If the signal is greater than the stored threshold value, a crank request signal is sent to the
ECM on the high speed CAN bus.
NOTE:
If the Smart Key is not in the vehicle and an attempt is made to start the engine by pressing the
start/stop switch, a message 'SMART KEY NOT FOUND, PLEASE INSERT IN SLOT' is displayed in
the instrument cluster message center.
If the keyless vehicle module is unable to identify the Smart Key for any reason, the Smart Key can be
inserted into the start control module. The start control unit will then read the transponder within
the Smart Key and, if the transponder identification is valid, pass authorization to the instrument
cluster on the Local Interconnect Network (LIN) bus.
If a replacement Smart Key is required, 2 Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) diagnostic procedures
are required to synchronize the passive start/entry and transponder functions of the Smart Key. If
any module, which is involved in the Smart Key authorization process, require replacement, an IDS
diagnostic procedure is also required to synchronize the replacement module into the system.
For a detailed description of the Anti-Theft - Passive system, refer to the relevant Description and
Anti-theft - Passive
The best method to confirm the correct operation of the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) is to check
the LED (located in the center of the instrument panel). The LED should illuminate solid for 3
seconds, when the ignition status is set to ON, and then extinguish. This validates all PATS functions
(i.e. the key transponder matches a stored key code, the challenge/response sequence between the
respective modules was successful resulting in the EMS being enabled).
Ignition fails to operate

Check that the smart key is located within the vehicle interior, and that it is the correct one for the
vehicle. Insert the smart key into the start control unit (located in floor console cubby box), this is an
alternative method to allow Ignition On/Engine Start.
Check that the start button circuit to the CJB is not open circuit or short circuit to power.
Check that the CAN network is not malfunctioning, i.e. open circuit or short circuit. This would mean
that the remote keyless entry module, Central Junction Box (CJB) and instrument cluster would be
unable to communicate.
Engine fails to crank

If a PATS fault is detected, the LED will flash for 60 seconds at 4Hz with a 50% duty cycle. At the end
of this period, the LED will flash a 2 digit code; this code is repeated 10 times. The meaning of these
fault codes along with the frequency of flashing is given in the accompanying table. As a general rule
a fault code of 16 or less will cause the vehicle not to crank. Additionally, the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system should be used to check the instrument cluster, CJB & ECM for Diagnostic Trouble
Codes (DTCs).
One potential occurrence for failing to crank could be due to the 'Not In Park' switch (input to the
CJB) or the P & N start switch (input to the ECM).
Check the Crank Request output from the CJB to ECM is not short circuit to ground or open circuit.
Check the Starter Relay circuit.

NOTE:
Due to Smart Start both sides of Relay Coil are switched directly from ECM (If conditions correct)
Check that the Steering Column Lock correctly operates and the steering wheel can turn freely.
Check that the CAN network is not malfunctioning, i.e. the CAN circuit is open or short circuit. This
would mean that the instrument cluster and ECM would be unable to communicate resulting in no
Challenge being performed to enable the ECM. This would be supported by LED Flash Code 24, see
PATS Fault Code Table.
Also check the CAN network between the ABS module and the CJB. The CJB uses the
CAN_BrakePressureTMC signal to determine if the brake pedal has been pressed in order to allow an
engine crank. The CJB uses a value of 0x03, if the CJB sees a value less than this, it will not enable the
Crank Request Output.
Engine cranks but will not start

If the Engine is cranking it means that the ECM has passed the authorisation required with the
Instrument Cluster. If this authorisation failed, the ECM would not engage the starter relay. This
could be confirmed by verifying the PATS LED prove out (illuminated solid for 3 seconds) or by
reading DTCs from the instrument cluster and ECM.
In this case, the fuel pump circuit should be verified. The Fuel Pump Delivery Module (FPDM), which
is supplied via the RJB (authentication required with the instrument cluster) and controlled by the
ECM, supplies the fuel pump.
In all cases of suspected non-start issues, the most logical failure modes should be eliminated first.
i.e.
• Check all relevant supplies and grounds to the relevant modules listed herein.
• Note any unusual behaviour from other systems/functionality.
• Note any functions that are not operating as expected.
PATS Fault Codes

For the various PATS modes/faults listed in the table , the instrument cluster will store a DTC and
indicate this to the customer during the detection period defined in the 'when logged' column, by
illuminating the indicator as described for 60 seconds and then flashing the LED 10 times as
appropriate. The indication will stop immediately the ignition status is set to OFF any time during the
fault indication sequence. Up to 4 DTCs could be stored per key read sequence (1-10 read attempts).
No DTCs will be stored until all retry attempts are complete. Only the highest priority fault code will
be flashed.
To determine the fault code from the LED: The LED will flash initially ten times with 1.5 seconds
between. The LED will remain OFF for 2.5 seconds then flash a number of times with 0.5 seconds
between (the number of times the LED flashes represents the first digit of the code), the LED will
remain OFF for 1.5 seconds then flash a number of times with 1.5 seconds between (the number of
times the LED flashes represents the second digit of the code).
The PATS LED will be commanded on as shown under 'indication'. Normal PATS operations are
complete within 400ms of the ignition switch transition from OFF to ON or START, worst case for
ECM communication problems will be less than 2 seconds. If PATS is not complete during the 2
seconds the ECM will terminate PATS and await the next ignition ON or START event. PATS faults will
be indicated via the LED as soon as possible and will terminate the LED prove out. At ignition OFF all
previous flashing will cease and the perimeter anti-theft system will control the LED when the vehicle
is locked and armed.
LED
Ignition
Mode of Operation/Fault When Logged DTC Fault Indication
Status
Code
Transition 3 Seconds of
Prove out N/A from OFF N/A N/A steady
to ON illumination
OFF - Off or 0.5Hz

Vehicle flashing at 5%
Perimeter Anti-theft Control N/A N/A N/A
locked and duty cycle ± 20%
armed until Off
Start Control Unit already

Key Insert Any B1B0105 N/A No Indication
programmed
Start Control Unit status =

invalid response
Start Control Unit programming

error
Start Control Unit challenge

Key Insert OFF B1B0162 N/A No Indication
response error
Key Programming timer expired

or Key Auth Timer expired
Transponder challenge response

error
Transponder keys stored below

B&A/Dealer Any B1B0100 N/A No Indication
minimum number required
Transponder not programmed B&A/Dealer Any B1B0155 N/A No Indication
If the instrument cluster sends a 60 seconds of

'theft' key status to the ECM or 4Hz flashing at
the ECM returns a status EMS CAN 50% duty cycle
OFF to ON B1B3364 16
message containing the data communication followed by fault
'Disabled/Theft', the instrument code 16 flashing
cluster will set this DTC 10 times
During manufacturing a Target

ID is transferred from the ECM
when requested by the 60 seconds of
instrument cluster. The steady
instrument cluster stores this indication
B&A/Dealer OFF to ON B1B3305 22
unique vehicle number in followed by fault
EEPROM. If this ID fails to store code 22 flashing
in EEPROM correctly, the 10 times
instrument cluster will set this
DTC
60 seconds of
If the status message received
steady
from the ECM contains the data
indication
challenge response error, the Challenge/Response OFF to ON B1B3362 23
followed by fault
code 23 flashing
DTC
10 times
After the instrument cluster has

transmitted its first PATS idle
60 seconds of
message, it will start a 2 second
steady
timer running. If the PATS
Idle message indication
sequence does not complete OFF to ON B1B3387 24
missing followed by fault
(Cluster received the Enable
code 24 flashing
msg) within this time period the
10 times
DTC
diagnostic system.
419-02 : Remote Convenience
General procedures
Universal Transmitter Programming

WARNING: A garage door opening system that cannot stop or reverse itself after
detecting an object in its path does not meet current federal safety standards. To
decrease the risk of serious injury or death, do not use this HomeLink transmitter with
a door opening system that lacks stop and reverse features as required by federal
standards. This includes any garage door opening system manufactured before April 1,
1982. For more information, call HomeLink customer assistance at 1-800-355-3515.
1.
CAUTION: During this procedure, the system that you are programming will be
made to operate. Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage door or gate
being programmed.
Verify the hand-held transmitter is operative.
2. Prepare for programming the universal transmitter by erasing all three channels by holding
down the two outside buttons until the red light begins to flash (20-30 seconds). Release both
buttons.
3. Select one of the three universal transmitter channels to be programmed by pressing the
desired button.
4. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter 50-150mm (2-6 in) from the front surface of the
universal transmitter so that the red light can still be seen.
5. NOTE:
During programming, the hand-held transmitter may automatically stop transmitting after
two seconds, which may not be long enough to program the universal transmitter. If
programming this type of hand-held transmitter, continue to hold the button on the
universal transmitter while re-pressing the hand-held transmitter button every two
seconds (Canada only).
Use both hands to press the hand-held transmitter button and the desired button on the
universal transmitter. Do not release either button.
6. Hold down both buttons until the red light on the universal transmitter flashes, first slowly
and then rapidly. Release both buttons when the rapid flashing begins. The universal
transmitter has successfully learned the new frequency signal and can be used in place of the
hand-held transmitter(s).
7. NOTE:
If the hand-held transmitter appears to program the universal transmitter but does not
open the garage door, the garage door opener may have a ' code protected' or ' rolling
code' feature.
To operate, simply press the appropriate button on the universal transmitter. The red light is
on while the signal is being transmitted.
Training a Garage Door Opener Equipped

With ' Rolling Codes'
1. Program the hand-held transmitter to the universal transmitter.
2. Train the garage door opener receiver to recognize the universal transmitter.
1. Remove the cover panel from the garage door opener receiver.
2. Locate the training button on the garage door opener receiver. Location and color of the
button may vary by garage door opener manufacturer. Refer to the garage door opener
instruction manual or call HomeLink customer assistance at 1-800-355-3515.
3. Press the training button on the garage door opener receiver for 1-2 seconds.
4. Press the programmed universal transmitter button for as long as the universal
transmitter red light flashes (1-2 seconds). Release the button and re-press the button to
confirm that the universal transmitter is trained to the receiver.
5. The garage door opener should recognize the universal transmitter.
Erasing Channels
1. NOTE:
Individual channels cannot be erased, but can be reprogrammed using the procedures for
programming.
To erase all three programmed channels, hold down the two outside buttons until the red light
begins to flash (20-30 seconds). Release both buttons.
Universal Transmitter
1 . Verify the customer concern by operating the system.
2 . Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical damage.
Mechanical
• Damaged universal transmitter

• Damaged receiver
4 . If the concern is not visually evident, verify the concern and refer to the Symptom Chart. Refer to
the electrical circuit diagrams for schematic and connector information.
Symptom Chart
The universal transmitter is • Universal transmitter GO to Pinpoint Test

inoperative • Receiver unit G92661p1.
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST G92661p1 : THE

UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTER IS
INOPERATIVE
G92661t1 : CHECK THE ROOF CONSOLE ASSEMBLY OPERATION
1. Check the illumination of the interior lamp.
• Does the interior lamp illuminate?

-> Yes
.
-> No
Check and rectify fault with interior lamp circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
G92661t2 : PROGRAM HAND-HELD TRANSMITTER INTO UNIVERSAL

TRANSMITTER
1. NOTE:
If the garage door is equipped with rolling codes, refer to Training a Garage Door Opener
Equipped With "Rolling Codes."
Program the universal transmitter.

Universal Transmitter Programming
• Did the universal transmitter program successfully?
-> Yes
The universal transmitter is OK. VERIFY receiver operation.
-> No
REPLACE the roof console assembly. TEST the system for normal operation.
419-07 : Navigation System
Specifications
Specifications
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in

Antenna - bolt 1.5 - 13
Display module to module bracket - bolt 3 - 26
Display module to module bracket - screw 2.5 - 22
Navigation system module to bracket - bolt 2 - 18
Navigation System
COMPONENT LOCATION
Part
Item Description
Number
2 Touch Screen Display
3 Integrated Control Panel
4 Microphone
6 AM/FM antenna
8 GPS antenna
9 Information and entertainment control module
10 Audio amplifier
Vehicle Information and Communication Systems (VICS) beacon antenna (Japan

11
only)
INTRODUCTION
The navigation system provides audible and visual route guidance information to enable the driver to
reach a desired destination. The system allows the driver to choose the desired route using minor or
major roads or motorways and the quickest or shortest route. Directions to hospitals, museums,
monuments and hotels are also available. The computer uses map information stored on a DVD-ROM
to determine the best route for the journey and provide the driver with details of directions and
approaching junctions.
The navigation system is controlled from the integrated control panel and the Touch Screen Display
(TSD). Control signals from the touch screen display are sent on the MOST ring to the navigation
computer. The navigation computer uses a dedicated GVIF bus to transmit its video signals to the
TSD.
Vehicles with navigation systems also incorperate additional traffic information systems. These are
market dependant and are as follows:
• Japan-Voice recognition and VICS

• Europe-TMC
• NAS-No TMC, VICS or voice rrecognition
1 TSD (rear)
2 ICP
3 TSD (front)
4 IAM
5 ICM
NAVIGATION COMPUTER
The navigation computer is located in the rear loadspace next to the battery.
The navigation computer incorporates the following:
• GPS receiver
• VICS receiver (Japan only)
• Traffic Message Channel (TMC) receiver
The navigation computer is connected to the MOST bus. The navigation computer generates its own
graphics and transmits them to the TSD on a dedicated GVIF (Gigabyte video Interface) bus.
The navigation computer contains a solid state piezo gyro which measures the motion of the vehicle
around its vertical axis. The gyro operates on the principle known as the Coriolis force. The Coriolis
force is the force that appears to accelerate a body moving away from its rotational axis against the
direction of rotation of the axis.
Using inputs from the ABS module, the GPS antenna and the gyro sensor, the computer calculates
the vehicle's current position, direction and speed.
The navigation computer houses the DVD-ROM drive. The drive is used to read map data from region
specific DVD's. The regions are as follows:
• Europe (3 discs)
• NAS (2 discs)
• Japan, Middle east and Australia (1disc)
A button, located adjacent to the DVD slot, is provided to eject the DVD from the unit. Prior to
ejecting the disc the slot protection has to be slid to the side. If the ignition is on, or the
Entertainment System is in 1-hour mode, one press of the button will eject the DVD.
The GPS receiver receives information from between 1 and 8 satellites at any one time. This
information is received from the GPS antenna. The built in GPS receiver is used for calculating the
position (i.e. Latitude, longitude and height), direction and speed.
The navigation computer uses non-volatile memory to store settings and configuration information
when it is powered down. This process takes place just before the computer turns off.
For the Japanese market the navigation computer incorporates a VICS receiver. The VICS receiver,
receives information from the beacon antenna in the center of the instrument panel and the electric
FM antenna. The VICS system receiver allows the vehicle to receive information about traffic
conditions from roadside transmitters and adjust the navigation instructions accordingly.
For ceratin European markets the navigation computer incorporates the Traffic Message Channel
(TMC) receiver. The TMC receiver decodes TMC data. The navigation computer then displays this
information on the TSD and also re-routes the navigation guidance around any traffic hold ups. The
TMC data is received via the electric FM (frequency modulation) antenna via the antenna signal
splitter.
TOUCH SCREEN DISPLAY (TSD)
The Touch Screen Display (TSD) is located in the center of the instrument panel. TSD is a touch
sensitive 7 inch LCD (liquid crystal display) VGA screen containing 800 x 480 pixels in a 15:9 format.
The TSD is connected to the Information and Entertainment system on the Media Oriented Systems
Transport (MOST) ring. The MOST ring is a fibre optic communications data bus that allows high
speed transfer of control instructions and audio around the system.
The TSD processes its own video for system operation but receives the navigation graphics from the
navigation computer on a dedicated serial link called GVIF (Gigabit Video Interface).
The TSD is also the control interface for the following vehicle systems:
• Climate control
• Audio system
• Heated seats
• Customer programmable security features
• Cellular phone
• Vehicle settings
The TSD navigation control signals are sent on the MOST ring to the navigation computer,
GPS ANTENNA
The GPS (global positioning system) antenna is located in the rear liftgate spoiler. The GPS antenna is
connected to the GPS computer by a single co-axial cable and passes signals from the GPS satellites
to the navigation computers built in receiver for processing.
It is possible for the GPS antenna to lose the signal from the GPS satellites:
• In hilly or tree lined areas

• Built up areas with tall buildings
• In multi storey car parks
• In garages
• In tunnels
• In bridges
• During heavy rain or thunderstorms.
When the signal is lost the navigation computer will continue to give guidance using memory
mapped data from the DVD (digital versatile disc) map until the signal is restored.
INFORMATION AND ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL MODULE
The Information and Entertainment Control Module (ICM) is located between the TSD and the IAM.
The ICM is mounted in the vehicle using four M6 bolts.
The ICM is the gateway between the vehicle MS CAN bus and the Information and Entertainment
system MOST bus.
INFORMATION AND ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL PANEL
The Information and Entertainment Control Panel is connected to the MS CAN bus. The ICP
incorperates switches for audio system control, climate control hazard warning lamps and the
navigation system. The navigation system is operated from the TSD via signals on the MOST ring.
Hard switches on the ICP send CAN signals to the ICM which transfers signals to the relevant module
on the MOST ring.
VICS BEACON ANTENNA (JAPAN ONLY)
VICS Beacon Antenna
The VICS beacon antenna is located on top of the instrument panel. The antenna receives infra red
and RF signals from road side transmitters. The Antenna is connected to the navigation computer
which incorperates a VICS reciever.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE:
A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus; N = Medium speed CAN; P = MOST ring; Q = GVIF; T =
Coaxial
Part
Item Description
Number
1 ABS control module
2 Steering wheel controls

4 Audio amplifier
5 Speakers
6 Microphone
Vehicle Information and Communication Systems (VICS) beacon antenna (Japan

9
only)
10 GPS Antenna
11 AM/FM antenna splitter
12 AM/FM antenna
13 Integrated Control Panel
15 Clock spring
The system used to calculate the current position of the vehicle is called the GPS (global positioning
system) . The system utilizes satellites which are owned by the United States Department of Defense
(DoD). A total of 24 satellites orbit the earth every 12 hours at a height of 20,000 km (12500 miles),
and between 5 and 11 of these satellites can be seen from a single point at any given time. The orbits
are tilted to the earth's equator by 55 degrees to ensure coverage of polar regions. Each satellite
transmits radio signals to provide information about the satellite position i.e. latitude, longitude,
altitude, almanac data and an accurate time signal generated by an on-board atomic clock. Each
satellite contains four atomic clocks.
The vehicle needs to receive data from at least four different satellites to give a three dimensional fix
on its current position.
As the vehicle moves, this information is continually being updated. The computer determines which
satellites are 'visible' to the system and their current position and relationship to each other. Using
this information the computer can account for positional deviations of the satellites and compensate
to enhance the accuracy of the navigation system.
The GPS (global positioning system) signal is also known as the Precision Positioning Signal (PPS).
PPS predictable accuracy is:
• 22 meters horizontal accuracy

• 27.7 meters vertical accuracy
• 200 nanoseconds time accuracy.
The navigation system provides computer generated audible and visual route guidance information
to enable the driver to reach a desired destination. The system allows the driver to choose the
desired route using minor or major roads or highways and the quickest or shortest route. Directions
to hospitals, museums, monuments and hotels are also available. The computer uses map
information stored on a DVD-ROM to determine the best route for the journey and provide the
driver with details of directions and approaching junctions.
The navigation system receives GPS (global positioning system) information via the GPS antenna. The
GPS signals are used by the navigation computer to calculate the vehicles position. Once the driver
has input a desired destination the navigation computer can calculate a route, based on the drivers
pre-determined preferences or the default settings in the navigation computer.
The navigation system is accessed by pressing the navigation soft key on the TSD.
Navigation is initiated by the driver inputting a destination. This can be achieved by:
• Entering in an address using the TSD.

• Entering a post code.
• Choosing a previous destination.
• Choosing a point of interest from the map disc database.
• Chosing the home location
• Chosing a memory stroed location.
The driver is then guided to the destination by a scrolling map display and voice guidance. The
display can be varied by scale and display type.
In addition to the standard navigation system there are two market dependant systems that supply
extra information to the navigation system and the driver. These are:
• Traffic Message Channel (TMC)

• Vehicle Information and Communication System (VICS) (Japan only).
Traffic Message Channel (TMC)

The Traffic Message Channel (TMC) is a function of the FM (frequency modulation) Radio Data
System (RDS). The system broadcasts real-time traffic and weather information. Data messages are
received and decoded by the TMC receiver and passed onto the navigation system, which then
delivers them via the navigation system interface. TMC messages can be filtered by the navigation
computer so that only those relevant to the current journey are displayed, allowing the navigation
system to offer dynamic route guidance - alerting the driver of a problem on the planned route and
calculating an alternative route to avoid the incident. All TMC events on the map can be viewed not
just the ones on the calculated route.
TMC traffic information systems conform to a global standard that has been adopted by traffic data
gatherers, information service providers, broadcasters and vehicle/receiver manufacturers. TMC
information is received via the normal FM (frequency modulation) radio antenna.
All TMC receivers use the same list of event codes, while the location database (on the map disc)
contains both a country-specific set of location codes for the strategic European road network.
TMC traffic data is currently broadcast in many European countries.
Vehicle Information and Communication System (VICS)

The VICS system supplies the navigation computer with information to enable the navigation
computer to re-route the navigation guidance or to inform the vehicle driver of traffic conditions in
the vehicles vicinity. Information is provided to the system through three routes:
• RF transmission
• Infra-red transmission
• FM (frequency modulation) multiplex transmissions.
The RF transmissions are generally transmitted from road side beacons mainly on expressways. The
information transmitted is as follows:
• Traffic congestion
• Travel time to next intersection
• Traffic conditions in surrounding areas and expressway turn offs
• Traffic accidents
• Speed limits
• Lane regulations
• Tire change
• Parking availability at expressway service areas and parking areas.
The Infra-Red transmissions are received by the beacon antenna mounted on the top of the
instrument panel.
Infra-Red transmissions are transmitted from road side beacons on major trunk roads. The
information transmitted is:
• Traffic congestion and travel time

• Traffic accidents
• Breakdowns
• Road works restrictions
• Parking availability.
FM (frequency modulation) transmissions are broadcast as part of the normal RDS FM (frequency
modulation) transmission. Information transmitted is:
• Traffic congestion and travel time for wide areas
• Traffic accidents, road works, speed limits and lane restrictions for a wide area
• Parking availability information.
FM transmissions are received via the FM antenna and split from the normal FM transmissions by the
FM signal splitter.
Navigation System
For a detailed description of the navigation system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
Navigation System

2 . Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage, water ingress and system integrity.
• Navigation system display

• Navigation system module
• GPS antenna
• Navigation system DVD player Mechanism • Wiring harness for damage and corrosion
• ABS Module
• Audio unit
Index.
Symptom Chart
• Electrical harness
open/short circuit, dis-
Poor satellite reception connected GO to Pinpoint Test G841057p1.
• Component failure
• No reception from satellite
Map disc will not
open/short circuit, dis- GO to Pinpoint Test G841057p2.
insert/eject connected
• Map disc failure
Black screen open/short circuit, dis-
(navigation map screen connected GO to Pinpoint Test G841057p3.
does not display) • Component failure
• GVIF cable
Navigation map screen
connected GO to Pinpoint Test G841057p4.
color is abnormal • Component failure
• GVIF cable
Vehicle’s current
connected
position mark turns GO to Pinpoint Test G841057p5.
independently • Vehicle on a turntable in a
parking building
Car current position open/short circuit, dis-
GO to Pinpoint Test G841057p6.
not stable connected
• Map disc
contaminated/damaged
Map display is
open/short circuit, dis- GO to Pinpoint Test G841057p7.
incomplete connected
• Incorrect market map disc
• Voice guidance soft key set

No navigation voice to OFF position
guidance • Volume level set too low GO to Pinpoint Test G841057p8.
• Interruption during map

disc update
No response to
pressing navigation GO to Pinpoint Test G841057p9.
connected
menu • Incorrect Navigation
Control Module (NCM)
installed
data received
'NO DVD PLEASE

• A disc other than the map
INSERT MAP DVD' Insert the correct map disc
disc is inserted
message is displayed
'UNABLE TO READ Check and install a new Navigation

DATA CONSULT YOUR Control Module (NCM) as required.
• DVD player abnormality
DEALER' message is Refer to the new module/component
displayed installation note at top of DTC Index.
Move the vehicle to a cool location, and

'UNABLE TO READ • Operating temperature has turn the engine OFF. Wait for a while,
been exceeded
DATA TEMPERATURE IS then verify conditions again. If the
• Navigation Control Module
TOO HIGH' message is (NCM) internal temperature around the Navigation
displayed temperature is high Control Module (NCM) is high, take
measures to lower temperature
'UNABLE TO READ DVD • Check map disc for

CORRECTLY CHECK IF contamination,
Clean the map disc and retest, replace
THE DVD IS DAMAGED deformation, cracks,
scratches or non-genuine the map disc
OR DIRTY' message is
displayed disc
'UNABLE TO READ
DATA CHECK IF MAP • Incorrect DVD map disc is Insert a map disc with the correct part
DVD IS CORRECT' inserted number
message is displayed
DTC Index
NOTE:
NOTE:
diagnostic system).
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
terminals.
• Satellite antenna Check satellite antenna connections. Refer to

Satellite
B1A8911 circuit - short to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
antenna ground satellite antenna circuit for short to ground
• Satellite antenna Check satellite antenna connections. Refer to

Satellite
B1A8913 circuit - open the electrical circuit diagrams and test
antenna circuit satellite antenna circuit for open circuit
• Satellite antenna - Install a new navigation system module,

Satellite
B1A891B circuit resistance refer to the new module installation note at
antenna above threshold the top of the DTC Index
B1D5514 Antenna #2 • TMC/VICS FM Check TMC/VICS FM antenna connections.

antenna circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Circuit open test TMC/VICS FM antenna circuit for open
circuit
Check VICS antenna connections. Refer to

Antenna #3 • VICS antenna
B1D5614 the electrical circuit diagrams and test VICS
Circuit circuit - open
antenna circuit for open circuit
Check ABS module and Instrument Cluster

for speed related DTCs and refer to relevant
• Missing vehicle
U200531 Control Module DTC Index.
speed message
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist
Instrument Cluster
Install a new navigation system module,

• Internal electronic
U300049 Control Module refer to the new module installation note at
failure
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

system check/amend the Car Configuration
Stored vehicle File parameter in block 2, byte 127 to match
• Incorrect car
configuration vehicle market/specification. If the DTC
U300055 configuration data
data does not received remains check navigation system module
match part number and ensure the correct
component is installed to vehicle
market/specification
Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer

approved diagnostic system. Check
navigation module for DTCs and refer to the
U300087 Control Module • Missing message
DTC Index. Check CAN network integrity
using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system
• Component or Check for additional DTCs and refer to DTC

U300098 Control module system over Index. Clear DTC and re-test/monitor
temperature condition for re-occurrence
• Circuit voltage
Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
mismatch with
U300362 Battery voltage this DTC using the manufacturer approved
navigation control
module diagnostic system
Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with

• Circuit voltage
U300317 Battery voltage this DTC using the manufacturer approved
above threshold
diagnostic system
Pinpoint Tests
NOTE:
any prior approval Program is in operation, prior to the installation of a new
module/component.
NOTE:
Navigation Diagnostic Screen Access
• 1.With the vehicle at rest, place the ignition switch in either "ACC", "ON", or start the
engine.
• 2.On the "Menu" screen, press the top center of the screen for more than three
seconds.
• 3.Enter the PIN code, and then touch "OK". 660: Diagnosis Menu screen 661: System
Check screen (DTC code verification screen) 662: GPS Information screen.
• 4.The diagnostics screen will be displayed.
PINPOINT TEST G841057p1 : Poor

satellite reception
G841057t1 : SYSTEM CHECK FOR DTCs
1. Check the system for DTCs which may be logged.
• Are any system DTCs logged?
-> Yes
Carry out repair actions to correct the DTCs logged.
Check satellite reception. GO to Pinpoint Test G841057t3.
-> No
G841057t2 : RETRO-INSTALL INSTALLATIONS CHECK

1. Check to see if there are any retro-install installations (anti-theft, radar, etc.)
• Are there any retro-install installations?
-> Yes
Aftermarket items may cause either electrical or radio frequency interference that can cause satellite
reception to deteriorate.
Remove the power supply (including backup power supplies) from any aftermarket items installed. If
reception returns to normal after disconnection of aftermarket items, carry out the following. Alter
the installation position of any aftermarket items. Check satellite reception. GO to Pinpoint Test
G841057t3.
-> No
G841057t3 : SATELLITE RECEPTION CHECKS

1. Check the 'ST' column of the navigation diagnostics GPS information screen (PIN code 662) after 10
minutes have passed. There must be more than 4 ‘P’s displayed for accurate positioning. Check the
‘HDOP’ value, this must be less than 5.
• Are there more than 4 'P's displayed and is HDOP less than 5?
-> Yes
Satellite reception is normal.
-> No
Confirm the GPS antenna is connected to the navigation module.
Refer to the electrical circuit wiring diagrams and check the integrity of the coaxial cable and
connectors from the Navigation Control Module (NCM) to the GPS antenna.
Install a new GPS antenna or coaxial cable as required.
Re-check satellite reception.
PINPOINT TEST G841057p2 : Map disc

will not insert/eject
G841057t4 : CHECK NAVIGATION DISC SLOT SHUTTER
1. Check the navigation map disc slot shutter is open.
• Is the navigation map disc slot shutter is open?

-> Yes
-> No
Open the map disc slot shutter.
G841057t5 : CHECK NAVIGATION MAP DISC WILL INSERT/EJECT

1. Check that it is possible to insert/eject navigation map disc.
• Is it possible to insert/eject navigation map disc?
-> Yes
Operation is normal.
-> No
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check power supply and ground connections to the
Navigation Control Module (NCM). If power supply and ground connections are good, install a new
Navigation Control Module (NCM) as required. Refer to the new module/component installation
note at top of DTC Index.
PINPOINT TEST G841057p3 : Black

screen (navigation map screen does not
display)
G841057t6 : CHECK SCREEN SAVER FUNCTION
1. Check the screen saver function operation.
• Does the screen saver function operate?
-> Yes
Press the display panel button. GO to Pinpoint Test G841057t8.
-> No
G841057t8 : CHECK DISPLAY BACKLIGHT

1. Check the display backlight operation.
• Does the display backlight operate?
-> Yes
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the GVIF cable between Navigation Control Module
(NCM) and HLDF screen is properly connected.
If the GVIF cable between Navigation Control Module (NCM) and HLDF screen is properly connected,
check and install a new GVIF cable as required. Refer to the new module/component installation
If the GVIF cable between Navigation Control Module (NCM) and HLDF screen is properly connected
and NOT damaged, check and install a new Navigation Control Module (NCM) as required. Refer to
the new module/component installation note at top of DTC Index.
Re-check the system.
-> No
Check the HLDF display.
PINPOINT TEST G841057p4 : Navigation

map screen colour is abnormal
G841057t9 : COLOUR BAR CHECK
1. Carry out the display diagnostics 'colour bar check' (PIN code 660).
• Are the results of the display diagnostics 'colour bar check' normal?
-> Yes
Check the HLDF display.
-> No
Check the condition of the map disc for dirt or scratches.
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the GVIF cable between Navigation Control Module
(NCM) and HLDF screen is properly connected.
If the GVIF cable between Navigation Control Module (NCM) and HLDF screen is properly connected,
check and install a new GVIF cable as required. Refer to the new module/component installation
If the GVIF cable between Navigation Control Module (NCM) and HLDF screen is properly connected
and NOT damaged, check and install a new Navigation Control Module (NCM) as required. Refer to
the new module/component installation note at top of DTC Index.
PINPOINT TEST G841057p5 : Vehicle’s

current position mark turns independently
G841057t10 : VEHICLES CURRENT POSITION MARK TURNS
INDEPENDENTLY
1. Determine if the ignition status was turned to Auxiliary or On, while the vehicle was in motion with
steering turned such as after an engine stall.
• Was ignition status set to Auxiliary or On?
-> Yes
The angular speed of the vehicle at the time of the ignition status change will be logged as the
standard value. To re-set the standard value, turn ignition status to 'OFF' then to 'Auxiliary' or 'On'
with the vehicle stationary.
Re-test the vehicle.
-> No
Check and install a new Navigation Control Module (NCM) as required. Refer to the new
module/component installation note at top of DTC Index.
PINPOINT TEST G841057p6 : Car

current position not stable
-> Yes
Re-check the system for car current position not stable.
-> No
G841057t12 : VEHICLE SPEED INPUT CHECK

1. Select Vehicle Sensor from the navigation diagnostic menu screen (PIN code 660), check Current
speed. The current speed must match the speedometer.
• From the Vehicle Sensor screen, does the current speed must match the speedometer?
-> Yes
-> No
Carry out MOST ring circuit checks.
Check the Anti-Lock Brake System Module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
Carry out network integrity tests using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to
electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN circuits if required. Repair wiring harness as required.
G841057t13 : CHECK NUMBER OF SATELLITES

1. From the navigation diagnostic GPS information screen (PIN code 662), check the number of
satellites displayed.
• Is the number of satellites displayed on the screen 0?
-> Yes
Carry out pinpoint test A "Poor Satellite Reception"
-> No
G841057t14 : CHECK IF SYMPTOMS ARE OCCURRING IN PARTICULAR

LOCATIONS
1. Confirm if the 'car current position not stable' symptom is occurring in particular locations.
• Is the 'car current position not stable' symptom occurring in particular locations?
-> Yes
Signal reflections from buildings or a particular location may be responsible.
-> No
Carry out pinpoint test A "Poor Satellite Reception"
PINPOINT TEST G841057p7 : Map
display is incomplete
-> Yes
Re-check the system for 'Map display is incomplete'.
-> No
G841057t16 : CHECK MAP DISC

1. Check map disc for contamination, deformation, cracks, scratches or non-genuine disc and correct
market.
• Has a fault been identified with the map disc?
-> Yes
Replace the map disc.
Re-check the system for 'Map display is incomplete'.
-> No
PINPOINT TEST G841057p8 : No

navigation voice guidance
G841057t17 : CHECK ALL AUDIO OUTPUT SYSTEMS
1. Check audio output across all systems.
• Is there sound output across all systems?
-> Yes
-> No
G841057t18 : CHECK VOICE GUIDANCE SOFT KEY

1. Check navigation screen menu, voice guidance soft key is not set to OFF position.
• Is the voice guidance soft key set to OFF position?
-> Yes
Set the voice guidance soft key to ON position.
Re-check the system
-> No
G841057t19 : VOLUME LEVEL CHECK

1. Check the volume level is not set too low.
• Is the volume level set too low?
-> Yes
Increase the volume level and re-test vehicle.
-> No
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check integrity of amplifier and speaker system wiring harness
and connectors.
G841057t20 : NAVIGATION VOICE ONLY NOT AUDIBLE

1. Press the 'Navigation voice repeat' soft key.
• After the navigation voice repeat soft key is pressed, can voice still not be heard even
though it has become louder?
-> Yes
-> No
PINPOINT TEST G841057p9 : No
response to pressing navigation menu
G841057t21 : NO RESPONSE TO PRESSING NAVIGATION MENU
1. Check that the engine was not turned 'OFF' during a navigation software update.
• Was the engine turned 'OFF' during a navigation software update?
-> Yes
Check the correct map disc is inserted into the Navigation Control Module (NCM). Start the engine
and allow to idle for 15 minutes Turn the engine 'OFF', and then start the engine again. Verify that
the navigation screen displays. Navigation was in the program update mode.
-> No

1. Check that the engine was not turned 'OFF' after inserting the new map disc.
• Was the engine turned 'OFF' after inserting the new map disc?
-> Yes
and allow to idle for 15 minutes Turn the engine 'OFF', and then start the engine again.
-> No

1. Check the "Loading" button on the navigation diagnostics screen (PIN code 660) has been pressed,
and "YES" has been selected.
• Has the "Loading" button on the navigation diagnostics screen been pressed, and has "YES"
been selected?
-> Yes
and allow to idle for 15 minutes Turn the engine 'OFF', and then start the engine again.
-> No
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check integrity of navigation system wiring harness and
connectors.

• Is DTC U300055 logged?
-> Yes
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check/amend the Car Configuration File
parameter in block 2, byte 127 to match vehicle market/specification. If the DTC remains check
navigation system module part number and ensure the correct component is installed to vehicle
market/specification.
-> No

1. Turn the engine 'OFF', wait for a moment, and then turn the engine 'ON' again.
• Does the navigation screen fail to display even if the navigation button is pressed?
-> Yes
Check the HLDF is installed correctly.
Check the Navigation Control Module (NCM) is installed correctly.
-> No
Navigation System Antenna (86.62.06)

Removal
1 . Remove the rear spoiler.
For additional information, refer to Rear Spoiler (76.19.86.60)
2 . Disconnect the electrical connector.
3 . Remove the navigation system antenna.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1 . Install the navigation system antenna.

2 . Install the rear spoiler.

For additional information, refer to Rear Spoiler (76.19.86.60)
Navigation System Display Module
(86.62.07)
Removal
2 . Remove the instrument panel center reinforcement trim panel.
3
component.
Release the navigation system module bracket.
Release the assembly.

4 . NOTE:
Remove the navigation screen module.
Remove the trim panel veneer upper retaining clip.

Installation
1 . Install the navigation screen module.
Install the clip.
2 . Install the navigation system module bracket.
3 . Install the instrument panel center reinforcement trim panel.

Navigation System Module (86.62.05)
Removal
2 . Release the navigation system module bracket.
Remove the 4 nuts.
3 . Remove the navigation system module.

Installation
1 . Install the navigation system module.

419-08 : Cellurar Phone
Specifications
Specifications
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in

Cellular (Bluetooth) phone antenna 7 5 62
Transceiver module 6 4 53
Cellular Phone
COMPONENT LOCATION
3 Microphone

5 Speakers
7 Bluetooth antenna
10 Audio amplifier
INTRODUCTION
The cellular phone system is based on using the customers own Bluetooth capable handset with the
vehicle Information and Entertainment system.
NOTE:
There is no physical connection (cradle) between the phone handset and the Telephone Control
Module. Communications between the two components are purely Bluetooth. This can limit the
available functions dependant on the handset used.
The cellular phone system comprises the following components:
• Telephone Control Module

• Microphone
• Bluetooth antenna
The system allows the driver to send, receive and end phone calls using the Touch Screen Display
(TSD), steering wheel switches and voice recognition system.
Phone dialing is achieved using one of the following methods:
• Dialing a number using the TSD keypad

• Selecting a number from the handsets phonebook
• Selecting from the handsets call register, typically the last 10 calls made, received and
missed.
The Telephone Control Module is connected to the Information and Entertainment system on the
MOST ring. This allows audio and control signals to be routed to and from the Telephone Control
Module.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE:
A=Hardwired; N=Medium speed CAN; P=MOST; T=Coaxial
3 Audio amplifier
4 Speakers
7 Bluetooth antenna
9 Microphone
10 Clock spring

Cellular Phone Antenna (86.51.17)

Removal
1 . Remove the rear seat armrest.
2 . Release the auxiliary junction box access cover.
Release from the clip.
3 . Remove the cellular phone antenna.
Remove the 2 nuts.

Installation
1 . Install the cellular phone antenna.
2 . Secure the auxiliary junction box access cover.
Secure in the clip.
3 . Install the rear seat armrest.

Transceiver Module
Removal
2 . Remove the transceiver module.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Installation
1 . Install the transceiver module.

419-10 : Multifonction Electronic Modules
Specifications
Specifications
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in

Module Controlled Functions

COMPONENT LOCATION-MOST/LIN

4 SDARS/DAB module (where fitted)
6 Engine start control module
7 Audio amplifier
8 Passenger door module
10 Drivers door module

COMPONENT LOCATION-MEDIUM SPEED CAN

6 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) module
7 Convertible top control module (convertible vehicle only)
9 Passenger door control module
10 CJB
11 Parking aid control module
12 ATC control module

COMPONENT LOCATION-HIGH SPEED CAN
1 ECM
2 Steering column lock
4 Pedestrian Protection System module

5 Headlamp leveling/adaptive front lighting module
7 Active Damping Control Module (ADCM)
8 Electric park brake module
9 RCM
10 L Gate
11 TCM
12 ABS control module
INTRODUCTION
The vehicle electrical system consists of a number of control modules connected via two multiplexed
CAN busses For additional information, refer to Communications Network (418-00 Module
Communications Network)
. The Instrument cluster acts as a gateway between the two CAN bus systems.
Lower speed control modules use a Local Interconnect (LIN) Bus. Control modules on the LIN bus are
generally configured to be master/slave i.e. one module controls other module(s).
The vehicle entertainment system uses a fibre optic bus system which uses the MOST protocol for
transmission of data and audio to the relevant components of the audio system.
Module Bus System Function Location
ECM HS CAN Controls the engine in response to Front LH side in engine

various sensor inputs. compartment adjacent
to bulkhead.
ABS HS CAN Controls the braking force applied to In the engine

the road wheels. compartment next to
the ECM.
Instrument cluster HS CAN Gateway between High speed and On the drivers side in
and MS Medium speed CAN, Gateway the instrument panel.
CAN LIN between the CAN busses and the LIN
Bus. bus
Parking aid control MS CAN. Control of parking sensors and Lower LH A post below
module routing of audio feedback to driver the CJB.
Navigation computer MOST, Route guidance out put based on In the luggage
GVIF inputs from GPS satellites and driver compartment to the
destination. right of battery.
RCM MS CAN. Controls the deployment of On the transmission

supplementary restraint tunnel between the
components. seats under the trim.
Tire Pressure MS CAN. Monitors the vehicle tires to warn of Behind the rear seats
Monitoring System deflation. next to the Auxiliary
(TPMS) module Junction Box.
TCM MS CAN. Electronic control of the automatic In the sump of the

gear change. transmission.
Steering column lock MS CAN. Inhibits the steering from being On the steering column.
turned without the proper security
parameters being met.
Headlamp HS CAN. Controls headlamp levels and RH foot well mounted

leveling/adaptive front adaptive front lighting system. against inner bulk head.
lighting module
Adaptive speed control HS CAN. Controls vehicle road speed in At the bottom of the RH
module relation to other vehicles when in A post.
speed control mode.
CJB MS CAN. Controls body functions and power In the passenger

distribution. compartment LH side on
the A post.
Auxiliary junction box MS CAN. Controls body functions and power In the center behind the
distribution. backrest of the rear
passenger seat.
Active Damping Control HS CAN. Controls the adjustment of the Behind the backrest of
Module (ADCM) dampers. the RH rear passenger
seat.
Electric park brake HS CAN. Controls the application and release Behind the auxiliary
module of the parking brake. junction box.
Air conditioning control MS CAN. Controls the operation of the climate Attached to the side of
module control/air-conditioning system. Air conditioning unit.
Information and MS CAN. Gateway between the MOST and Behind the Touch Screen
entertainment control CAN systems for information and Display and above the
module control distribution. integrated audio unit.
Drivers door module MS CAN. Memory/adjustment functions for In the drivers door
seats, steering column and mirrors behind the trim.
and security functions.
Passenger door module MS CAN. Memory/adjustment functions for In the passenger door
seats, steering column and mirrors behind the trim.
and security functions.
Integrated control MS CAN. Contains controls for entertainment Center of the instrument
panel system and air conditioning system panel surrounding the
Touch Screen Display.
Drivers seat module MS CAN. Controls seat positioning and Under the drivers seat.
memory seat functions.
Passenger seat module MS CAN. Controls seat positioning and Under the front
memory seat functions. passenger seat.
Keyless vehicle module MS CAN. Allows the vehicle to be opened and Right hand ‘A’ Post.
started without the use of a key.
L Gate MS CAN. Electronic control of the selected On top of the

gear/driving mode. transmission tunnel.
Key Start Control LIN Bus In the center consol.

Module
Pedestrian Protection HS CAN. Control and monitoring of Pedestrian On the RH side under
System module Protection System the wheel arch liner at
the top of the wheel
arch.
Multifunction Electronic Module

Description and Operation
For a detailed description of the multifunction electronic control modules, refer to the relevant
Module Controlled Functions

2 . Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
Electrical
• Fuse(s)
• Wiring Harness
4 . If the cause is not visually evident, check for DTCs and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
NOTE:
NOTE:
The DTC Index in this section shows information for DTCs that could be logged in the Driver Door
Module (DDM) or Passenger Door Module (PDM). For diagnosis and testing information for:
Driver/Passenger Seat module.
Seats Information and Entertainment module.
Audio System Remote Keyless Entry module.
Locks, Latches and Entry Systems
NOTE:
diagnostic system).
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
terminals.

Front Courtesy diagrams and test front
B109C15 • Short to power or open circuit
Light courtesy light circuit for short
to power or open circuit
B109D11 Front Courtesy • Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit

Light courtesy light circuit for short
ground

Driver door double diagrams and test driver door
B10EB11 • Short to ground
locking motor double locking motor circuit
for short ground

diagrams and test driver door
Driver door double
B10EB15 • Short to power or open circuit double locking motor circuit
locking motor
for short to power or open
circuit

Passenger door
diagrams and test passenger
B10EC11 double locking • Short to ground
door double locking motor
motor
circuit for short ground

Passenger door diagrams and test passenger
B10EC15 double locking • Short to power or open circuit door double locking motor
motor circuit for short to power or
open circuit

Driver door central diagrams and test driver door
B110811 • Short to ground
locking motor central locking motor circuit
for short ground

diagrams and test driver door
Driver door central
B110815 • Short to power or open circuit central locking motor circuit
locking motor
for short to power or open
circuit

Passenger door
B110911 central locking • Short to ground
motor
diagnostic system
Passenger door Carry out any pinpoint tests

B110915 central locking • Short to power or open circuit
motor the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

Left Mirror Heater
diagrams and test left mirror
B116311 Output short to • Short to ground
heater output circuit for short
ground
to ground

Left Mirror Heater
diagrams and test left mirror
B116315 Output short to • Short to power or open circuit
power

Right Mirror
diagrams and test right mirror
B116411 Heater Output • Short to ground
short to ground
to ground

Right Mirror
diagrams and test right mirror
B116415 Heater Output • Short to power or open circuit
short to power

Left Front Puddle
diagrams and test left front
B116511 Lamp Output short • Short to ground
puddle lamp output circuit for
to ground
short to ground
Left Front Puddle Refer to the electrical circuit

Lamp Output open diagrams and test left front
B116515 • Short to power or open circuit
load or short to puddle lamp output circuit for
power short to power or open circuit

Right Front Puddle
diagrams and test right front
B116611 Lamp Output short • Short to ground
puddle lamp output circuit for
to ground
short to ground
Right Front Puddle Refer to the electrical circuit

Lamp Output open diagrams and test right front
B116615 • Short to power or open circuit
load or short to puddle lamp output circuit for
battery short to power or open circuit
Front Power Install a new DDM/PDM, refer

B117E72 • Actuator stuck open
Window up to the new module
the DTC Index
Install a new DDM/PDM, refer

Front Power to the new module
B117E73 • Actuator stuck closed
Window up installation note at the top of
the DTC Index

B117F72 • Actuator stuck open
Window down installation note at the top of
the DTC Index

B117F73 • Actuator stuck closed
Window down installation note at the top of
the DTC Index

Front Window associated with this DTC using
B118929 • Signal invalid
Position Sensor the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

Rear Window associated with this DTC using
B118A29 • Signal invalid
Position Sensor the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

diagrams and test driver
B1A9411 Driver Mirror • Short to ground
mirror fold motor circuit for
short to ground

B1A9415 Driver Mirror • Short to power or open circuit
short to power or open circuit

B1A9511 Passenger Mirror • Short to ground
short to ground

B1A9515 Passenger Mirror • Short to power or open circuit
short to power or open circuit

diagrams and test LIN circuit
between driver switch pack
and DDM for short/open
• Value of signal protection
B1A9883 LIN Bus Circuit #1 circuits, clear DTC and re-test.
calculation incorrect
If DTC remains install a new
switch pack.
Window Control Switch
(86.25.08)

B1A9886 LIN Bus Circuit #1 • Signal Invalid circuits, clear DTC and re-test.
switch pack.
(86.25.08)

B1A9887 LIN Bus Circuit #1 • Missing Message circuits, clear DTC and re-test.
switch pack.
(86.25.08)

Driver Left/Right
B1C0911 Mirror Motor • Short to ground
left/right mirror motor circuit
Circuit
for short to ground

Driver Left/Right diagrams and test driver
B1C0915 Mirror Motor • Short to power or open circuit left/right mirror motor circuit
Circuit for short to power or open
circuit
B1C1011 Driver Up/Down • Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit

Mirror Motor diagrams and test driver
Circuit up/down mirror motor circuit
for short to ground

Driver Up/Down diagrams and test driver
B1C1015 Mirror Motor • Short to power or open circuit up/down mirror motor circuit
Circuit for short to power or open
circuit

Passenger
B1C1111 Left/Right Mirror • Short to ground
Motor Circuit
diagnostic system

Passenger
B1C1115 Left/Right Mirror • Short to power or open circuit
Motor Circuit
diagnostic system

Passenger
B1C1211 Up/Down Mirror • Short to ground
Motor Circuit
diagnostic system

Passenger
B1C1215 Up/Down Mirror • Short to power or open circuit
Motor Circuit
diagnostic system

B1C1311 Mirror Motor • Short to ground up/down mirror motor
Feedback Circuit feedback circuit for short to
ground

B1C1315 Mirror Motor • Short to power or open circuit up/down mirror motor
power or open circuit
Driver Left/Right Refer to the electrical circuit

B1C1411 Mirror Motor • Short to ground diagrams and test driver
Feedback Circuit left/right mirror motor
feedback circuit for short to
ground

Driver Left/Right diagrams and test driver
B1C1415 Mirror Motor • Short to power or open circuit left/right mirror motor

Passenger
Up/Down Mirror
B1C1511 • Short to ground up/down mirror motor
Motor Feedback
Circuit
ground

Passenger
Up/Down Mirror
B1C1515 • Short to power or open circuit up/down mirror motor
Motor Feedback
Circuit

Passenger
Left/Right Mirror
B1C1611 • Short to ground left/right mirror motor
Motor Feedback
Circuit
ground

Passenger
Left/Right Mirror
B1C1615 • Short to power or open circuit left/right mirror motor
Motor Feedback
Circuit

diagrams and test window
C1B1411 Sensor Supply #1 • Short to ground
sensor supply circuit for short
to ground

diagrams and test window
C1B1415 Sensor Supply #1 • Short to power or open circuit
sensor supply circuit for short
Medium speed • Medium speed CAN Carry out any pinpoint tests
U001000 CAN associated with this DTC using
communication Bus
communication the manufacturer approved

Lost
message missing from CJB the manufacturer approved
with CJB
diagnostic system

With Driver Seat the manufacturer approved
Module (DSM) diagnostic system

diagnostic system. Clear the
Internal control
• Invalid configuration message DTC and retest. If the DTC is
U030000 module software
is received still logged suspect the
incompatibility
DDM/PDM, refer to the new
module installation note at
Clear DTC and re-test. If DTC

U200224 Switch • Signal stuck high remains, install a new
passenger side window switch
Carry out CAN network tests

U201011 Switch illumination • Circuit short to ground using the manufacturer
Carry out CAN network tests

U201012 Switch illumination • Circuit short to battery using the manufacturer
Cycle the ignition status and

re-test. If DTC remains, re-
Car Configuration
U201208 • Bus signal/message failures configure the RJB using the
Parameter(s)
diagnostic system
Clear DTC and re-test. If DTC

remains, install a new driver
U201324 Switch Pack • Signal stuck high side window switch pack.
(86.25.08)
Control module to the new module
U201444 • Data Memory Failure
hardware installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
Initial Re-configure the DDM/PDM

U210000 configuration not • No sub type information using the manufacturer
complete approved diagnostic system

to the new module
U300049 Control module • Internal electronic failure
the DTC Index
Re-configure the relevant

module as new using the
Vehicle
diagnostic system and re-test.
U300255 Identification • Not configured
Number (VIN)
module, refer to the new
module installation note at
U300281 Identification transmitted, module for DTCs and refer to relevant
vehicle

• Mis-match of battery voltage,
U300362 Battery voltage of 2 volts or lower, between
DDM/PDM and RJB the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
Driver Seat Module (DSM) (86.75.28)

Removal
1 . Remove the front seat.
For additional information, refer to Front Seat (76.70.01)
2 . Remove the front seat control module.
Installation
1 . Install the front seat control module.
2 . Install the front seat.

For additional information, refer to Front Seat (76.70.01)
Information and Entertainment Module
(86.53.48)
Removal
2 . Remove the instrument panel center reinforcement trim panel.
3
component.
Release the navigation system module bracket.
Release the assembly.

4 . Remove the information and entertainment module.
Installation
1 . Install the information and entertainment module.

3 . Install the instrument panel center reinforcement trim panel.


Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Module
Removal
NOTE:
This module is installed on the inside of the RH A-pillar above the footwell and does not change
with the hand of drive.

2
force is used.
Remove the RH side footwell trim panel.
Remove the 3 clips.
3 . Remove the keyless entry module.

Installation
1 . Install the keyless entry module.
Install the screws.
2 . Install the RH side footwell trim panel.


150 FX 4 Electri

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

150 FX 4 Electri

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

150 FX 4 Electri

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

4.

412-00 : Climate Control System – General Information

Air Conditioning (A/C) System Flushing

WARNING: When flushing the A/C system, refer to the manufacturers

Recover the refrigerant.

2. Remove the desiccant sack. <<412-03>>

4. Install new refrigerant lines if blocked with debris.

5. Install a new desiccant sack. <<412-03>>

7. Evacuate and charge the A/C system.

8. Carry out fluorescent dye leak detection test.

9. Check the A/C system for correct operation.

WARNING: Servicing must be carried out by personnel familliar with both

4. Open the valves on the connections.

5. Turn the valves on the station to the correct positions.

6. Turn the process switch to the correct position.

7. Turn the main switch to 'ON'.

Allow the system to recover the refrigerant from the system.

9. Close the valves on the refrigerant station.

10. Turn the main switch 'OFF'.

11. Close the valves on the connections.

12. Disconnect the high and low pressure connections.

13. Install the dust covers to the connectors.

16. Close the tap at the rear of the station.

20. Open the valves on the connections.

21. Turn the valves on the station to the correct positions.

22. Turn the process switch to the correct position.

23. Turn the main switch to 'ON'.

CAUTION: The system must be evacuated immediatley before recharging

26. Close the valves on the refrigerant station.

27. Close the valve on the oil charger.

28. Disconnect the yellow line from the refrigerant station.

29. Remove the cover from the oil charger.

31. Install the cover to the oil charger.

32. Connect the yellow line to the refrigerant station.

33. Open the valve on the oil charger.

38. Close the valves on the connections.

39. Disconnect the high and low pressure connections.

Climate Control System

1 . Verify the customer concern by operating the system.

2 . Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage and system integrity.

Item Nm lb-ft lb-in

Air Distribution and Filtering

Right-Hand Drive (RHD) shown, Left-Hand Drive (LHD) similar

Item Part Number Description

2 Windshield and side window air duct

4 Driver instrument panel register

5 Driver instrument panel air duct

6 Driver footwell air duct

7 Center instrument panel register

8 Air deflector nozzle

9 Passenger footwell air duct

10 Passenger instrument panel air duct

11 Passenger instrument panel register

12 Passenger side window vent

15 Cabin air filter

AIR REGISTERS AND VENTS

CABIN AIR FILTER

Item Part Number Description

2 Cabin air filter